JP7730064B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, play begins when a predetermined number of gaming medals are inserted and the start lever is operated, spinning multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the periphery. The reels are then stopped when the stop button to stop the rotation is operated. If a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bonus role such as "7 symbols lined up") lines up on an active line, the slot machine typically transitions to a special game mode (a gaming state in which the probability of winning a small role, etc., is higher than normal), which is more profitable for the player than regular game mode. In addition to these basic games, slot machines also offer various other effects to enhance overall entertainment value.

Most pachinko machines in recent years are designed to draw a special symbol with a predetermined probability when a game ball enters a starting winning slot on the game board (play area), and if a jackpot is won in the special symbol drawing, the game transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), in which a large winning slot on the game board opens and the player can win a large number of prize balls. Among pachinko machines configured in this way, there are also machines equipped with a probability fluctuation function that increases the probability of winning in the special symbol drawing, and a fluctuation time reduction function that increases the efficiency of the symbol fluctuations used to notify the results of the special symbol drawing, and these machines enhance the excitement of the game by creating specific game states that are advantageous to the player through the operation of these functions in combination.

Among various pachinko gaming machines, there is a known prior art pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing high-expectation preview effects that occur during play while a game standby demo effect is being executed to entice players to start playing, even when the pachinko gaming machine is not being played.

JP 2015-181620 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-215803 JP 2014-171710 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-263138 JP 2015-181620 A

Improvements in the performance of this type of gaming machine are desired.

The present invention provides
It has a stop switch,
Has a max bet switch,
It has one bet switch,
It has an adjustment switch,
Max bet switch lamp,
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode, a predetermined symbol combination may or may not be displayed;
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a specific manner, the predetermined symbol combination cannot be displayed.
When a specific lottery result is achieved, a specific symbol combination may or may not be displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop switch.
When a specific lottery result is obtained and a specific symbol combination is displayed, a specific number of gaming media can be awarded.
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the second gaming state can be started;
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the second gaming state is not started,
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a specific operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the second gaming state is not started,
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, even if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the operation probability of the condition device related to replay does not change,
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, even if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the activation probability of the condition device related to the winning does not change,
When a predetermined lottery result is reached, the stop switch is operated in a predetermined manner, and even if a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the predetermined lottery result is not carried over to the next game or later.
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first game state, the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation manner, and a game after the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed is compared with a game in the second game state, and the game in the second game state has a higher rate of announcing an operation manner that can display a specific symbol combination,
In a predetermined situation, a power outage occurs, the 1 bet switch is pressed when there is no power supply, and the power is turned on when the 1 bet switch is pressed. If the 1 bet switch continues to be pressed after the power is turned on, the bet process based on the pressing of the 1 bet switch will not be executed, but if the max bet switch is pressed in this situation, the bet process based on the pressing of the max bet switch can be executed.
In the first situation, a power outage occurs, the settlement switch is pressed while no power is being supplied, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed. In the second situation, where the settlement switch continues to be pressed after the power is turned on, the settlement process is not executed, the max bet switch lamp is lit, and pressing the max bet switch in the second situation allows the bet process to be executed. A gaming machine.
The present invention also provides
a display device;
A speaker and
one or more selection switches;
a performance control means for controlling the performance;
The device is configured to output music from a speaker,
A display device is configured to display an indication of the music piece,
The production control means is
The music can be changed based on a predetermined operation of the selection switch,
The volume can be changed based on a specific operation of the selection switch,
the music can be changed when a predetermined operation after the selection switch is accepted at a first timing that is a predetermined period after the music has been changed in response to the previous predetermined operation of the selection switch;
the music cannot be changed when a predetermined operation after the selection switch is accepted at a second timing that is within a predetermined period of time after the music has been changed in response to the predetermined operation before the selection switch is accepted,
The volume can be changed when a specific operation after the selection switch is accepted at a first timing that is a predetermined period after the volume is changed in response to the specific operation before the selection switch,
The volume can also be changed when a specific operation after the selection switch is accepted at a second timing that is within a predetermined period after the volume has been changed in response to the specific operation before the selection switch,
The gaming machine may be configured so that within a predetermined period of time after a predetermined operation of the selection switch is received to change the music, a display indicating the changed music is displayed on the display device.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the outside of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 2 is a view showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating functional blocks. 10 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-off recovery process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. A flowchart showing the advantageous zone clear counter management process. This is an example of a push button effect. 10 is an example of a display mode of a display device when a push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up preview in normal presentation mode. This is an example of a line preview in a normal presentation state. This is an example of a line preview during a continuous performance. This is an example of a switch image for effect when the front panel PS2 is open. 10 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. 10 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a reel arrangement according to specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the symbol combination 1/4 for the gaming machine specification 1 according to the present invention. A diagram showing the pattern combination 2/4 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the pattern combination 3/4 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the symbol combination 4/4 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a condition device 1/4 relating to specification 1 of the gaming machine according to the present invention. A diagram showing condition device 2/4 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing condition device 3/4 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the condition device 4/4 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the number of non-RT internal lottery placements 1/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the number of non-RT internal lottery placements 2/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the non-RT internal lottery placement number 3/3 for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the RT fluctuation trigger for the gaming machine specification 1 according to the present invention. A diagram showing the internal lottery placement number 1/3 of the RT for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the internal lottery placement number 2/3 for RT for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the internal lottery placement number 3/3 for RT for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. A diagram showing the transition of advantageous zones for specification 1 of the gaming machine of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where payout is performed normally. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program showing interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time chart of an 8-bit counter and timer interrupt processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of a timer interrupt process. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. This is an oblique view of the front of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine with the frame member open. This is an oblique view from the rear of the above-mentioned pachinko game machine with the frame member open. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko gaming machine. This is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state of the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the power-on process of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine. A diagram showing the game stop state setting process during the power-on process. This is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning/losing lottery table for the assumed pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table for the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during a low base state of the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during a high base state of the assumed pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referenced during a limited period of time for the underlying pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the power-on process of the performance control board of the pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the performance control board of the pachinko gaming machine that is the premise. This is a diagram showing the game presentation of the pattern change display (while decorative patterns are displayed stopped) during normal play (low probability/low base) of the assumed pachinko game machine. This is a diagram showing the game presentation in a situation where a reach presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot is being performed on the underlying pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the game presentation when a jackpot game is being played on the pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the game presentation when the electric chute support function is operating during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the underlying pachinko game machine. FIG. 10 is an image diagram of the confirmation effect according to the present invention. A diagram showing the timing of the confirmation effect and error notification in the present invention. A diagram showing the timing of the confirmation effect and error notification in the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen in a case where a song change is possible according to the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing timings for enabling/disabling song changes and volume changes according to the present invention. 10A and 10B are conceptual diagrams showing transitions between enabling and disabling of music change and volume change according to the present invention; 1 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in a slot machine according to the present invention. FIG. A diagram showing an example of a power supply line in a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in a slot machine according to the present invention. FIG. A diagram showing an example of a power supply line in a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply line in a slot machine according to the present invention. FIG. A diagram showing an example of a power supply line in a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention.

First, we will explain the slot machine and pachinko machine that are the premise of this invention. Note that when both the premise slot machine and the premise pachinko machine are included, they may be referred to as "the premise gaming machine," "the premise technology," "the gaming machine in the premise technology," etc.

<<Slot Machines>>
<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals),""game media (number of game media)," and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet,""BET," and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous and all refer to the act of betting game media. When expressing a hexadecimal number, "0x00" or "00h" is used, and unless otherwise specified before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reels" may also be referred to as "machine," all of which are synonymous. "Storage means" may also be referred to as "RWM,""RAM," or "storage area," all of which are synonymous. "Awarding" as used in "awarding game media" or "awarding points" may also be referred to as "payout," all of which are synonymous. "Setting/resetting switches" may also be referred to as "setting change switches" or "resetting switches" depending on their functions, but in both cases, they refer to the same switch. The "setting change switches" and "resetting switches" may each be provided as separate switches. When a small combination with a large payout or a small combination with a small payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small combination with a large payout is called a high-payout (high-payout bell, high-payout small combination are also synonymous), and the small combination with a small payout is called a low-payout (low-payout bell, low-payout small combination are also synonymous). In addition, if a symbol combination with no payout stops at this time, it may be called a spilled symbol (synonymous with a spilled symbol).

The underlying slot machine PS1 will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of the slot machine PS1>
The components of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG.

The slot machine PS1 can be broadly divided into two sections, with the necessary components and circuit boards mounted on the front panel PS2 side and the cabinet PS3 side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, front surface door PS2, or front door PS2) is made up of a decorative plate member, and on the front side (player side) there are provided a display window 4, an operation indicator lamp 24, a bet number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, a number of coins won display 27, an operation panel 11, a lower panel 5, upper or both side performance lamps, etc., and on the back side there are provided a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., a setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, or setting value display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided in the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to the reel rim of each of the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front (player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (which may be freely designed as 20, 16, or other symbols depending on the specifications) are visible. In other words, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible through the display window 4. Here, of the stop positions where the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c each stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is referred to as the upper row, the center stop position is referred to as the middle row, and the lowermost stop position is referred to as the lower row.

<Valid line>
The active line is a symbol combination line that is the target of a win determination process (described later) when the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c stop. The active line in the slot machine PS1 is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the win determination process determines that a symbol combination that has stopped on the active line corresponds to one of the winning combinations, processing is performed according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination such as a bell has stopped, a payout process for game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and a credit addition process are performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, five pay lines may be set: an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, an upward-right line, and a downward-right line. Alternatively, six or more pay lines may be set, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped lines (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped lines (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), and roughly L-shaped lines (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c). Pay lines may also be set to change depending on the number of coins bet, and can be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. Straight lines other than pay lines may also be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamp 24>
The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4 and instruct the player on the order of operating the stop switches 13 (described later) while the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25>
The bet number indicator lamps 25 (bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25, bet number indicator lamps 25) are provided on the operation panel 11 and have the function of displaying the number of coins bet by the player. They are also composed of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up. When a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up. When a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. Furthermore, although not shown, after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number indicator lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won is turned on, and the replay lamp is turned on. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one of them may be configured to light up first.

<Credit number display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number refers to the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. Furthermore, when an error is detected and normal game play cannot proceed, a message regarding the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin count indicator 27>
The earned coin count display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 27a (not shown) which is made up of seven segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the earned coin count, and a segment display 27b (not shown) which is made up of seven segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the earned coin count. The earned coin count refers to the number of medals paid out to the player (including those stored in the credit count display 26) based on the results of the game on the slot machine PS1. When normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a message related to the error may be displayed.

In addition to displaying their respective information using segment displays 26a, 26b, 27a, and 27b, the credit number display 26 and the acquired coin number display 27 may also display information other than the credit number or acquired coin number depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described below) or that a specified external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired coin number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the order in which to press buttons using the display for the upper and lower digits. When the acquired coin number display 27 is used to notify the player of the order in which to press buttons, the acquired coin number display 27 is sometimes referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided approximately in the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped configuration with a substantially horizontal section and a vertical section extending substantially vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section, with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13 (described later) provided on the vertical section, and a medal insertion slot 17, multiple bet switches (MAX BET switch 18, 1 BET switch 19), a sub-switch 20, a sub-cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch, and a performance switch (described later) provided on the horizontal section.

<Start switch 12>
The start switch (also referred to as a start lever) 12 is located on the vertical portion of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation unit, and its start switch sensor is ON when not in operation. When the start switch sensor is operated, it turns OFF, indicating that the start switch has been operated. The start switch 12 becomes valid when the number of coins bet reaches a predetermined number. When the start switch 12 is operated, it executes an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like. Furthermore, in the slot machine PS1, the input signal is low active. Therefore, when the start switch sensor is ON when not in operation, the start switch input signal turns OFF. When the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF during operation, the start switch input signal turns ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The start switch input signal may be ON when the start switch sensor is ON.

Hereinafter, when we simply say "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In the case of the assumed slot machine PS1, the left reel 8a corresponds to the left stop switch 13a, the middle reel 8b corresponds to the middle stop switch 13b, and the right reel 8c corresponds to the right stop switch 13c. Furthermore, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of a lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or a lamp around it changes, indicating that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, the light may be blue when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and red when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated. Another example is that the light may be on when the stop switch 13 can be operated, and off when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal slot 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal slot, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Multiple types of medal slots 17 are manufactured to correspond to the standard sizes of multiple types of medals, but the installation standards for the various medal slots 17 are the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may be, for example, gaming balls (so-called Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming media information stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets is set and added when a prize is won based on the input gaming media information.

<Bet Switch (MAX BET Switch 18, 1 BET Switch 19)>
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are medals stored in the credits, a bet process is executed and the bet number is set as if medals were inserted into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credits, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that illuminates the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp notifies the player that a bet can be made when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification methods are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or flashing the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, if the MAX BET switch is operated but a bet cannot be made, the MAX BET lamp may light in a specific color or not light at all.

The slot machine PS1 is also equipped with a MAX BET switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins set for each slot machine PS1 (three coins in the assumed slot machine PS1), and a 1 BET switch 19 that allows the user to bet one coin. The system is configured to execute a MAX BET process when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, and execute a 1 BET process when the 1 BET switch 19 is operated. The MAX BET process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently bet is three or more, and the number of bets currently bet is less than three. The MAX BET process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently bet is less than three (in other words, when the number of bets is less than three even if the MAX BET switch 18 is operated), or when three bets have already been made. The 1 BET process can be executed when the number of credits is one or more, and the number of bets currently bet is less than three, but cannot be executed when three bets have already been made.

Furthermore, each time the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, one bet is processed; if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated three times from a state where no bets have been placed, three bets will be placed; three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

Furthermore, while an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the switch may be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the switch will enter the 1 bet state and 2 credits will be returned.

Furthermore, while an embodiment has been described in which the max bet process, which is executed when the max bet switch 18 is operated, is not executed when the number of bets is less than three, a process in which the maximum number of bets that can currently be made is also conceivable. In other words, a process in which two credits are bet when the max bet switch 18 is operated when no bets have been made and the number of credits is two is also conceivable.

The maximum number of coins that can be bet may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state, such that the maximum number of coins that can be bet during non-bonus periods is 3, and the maximum number of coins that can be bet during bonus periods is 2.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is located on the operation panel 11 and consists of a push-button made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detector for detecting operation of the push-button, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-button of the sub-switch. The sub-switch 20 is primarily used to display a menu screen on the display device 32 (described below). In addition to the sub-switch 20, the sub-control board 1000 also provides input devices such as a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a presentation switch (a switch operated by instructions during gameplay). The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for activating a linkage system with a mobile device (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile-device linkage system), described below. While the sub-switch 20 is shown as a menu display function and the presentation switch is shown as a switch for operation during gameplay, they may be combined into a single switch.

The menu screen displays winning combination items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up or down by operating the up or down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21. Furthermore, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on one of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub-switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted using the left or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 after a game has finished and no bets have been placed. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at that time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, automatic time display, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after a game has finished, displaying the manufacturer's name and an introduction to the presentation as a moving image). However, this is not limiting to the present embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or automatic time display.

<Show switch>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down section made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection section that detects that the push-down section has been operated, and an effect switch lamp that illuminates the push-down section of the effect switch. When the effect switch is operated in a situation in which operation of the effect switch is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a series of effects is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "LCD") 32, one possible mode is to display "success" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect"), which means that a bonus will be awarded in the final game of the series of effects, or "failure" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failed effect"), which means that a bonus will not be awarded.

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, thereby notifying the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be set to be unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be set to alternately turn on and off at regular intervals.

In addition, when operation of the effect switch is valid, a display simulating the effect switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that operation of the effect switch is valid. When displaying the effect switch on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, it is possible to display the effect switch simulating the effect switch based on a start switch reception command, or to display the effect switch simulating the effect switch based on a command to stop all reels.

<Settlement switch>
The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after a game is completed, the settlement switch executes a process (settlement process) to pay out the number of gaming media betted and the number of gaming media accumulated in the credits to the player. Note that, in the slot machine PS1, when the settlement switch is operated under conditions in which a bet has been made and gaming media are accumulated in the credits, the bet gaming media are paid out first, followed by the gaming media accumulated in the credits. However, this is not limited to this, and a process may be executed to pay out the gaming media accumulated in the credits only when the number of gaming media betted is zero. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated under conditions in which a bet has been made, only the bet gaming media are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the gaming media accumulated in the credits are paid out.

<Lower panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a design that represents the characteristics of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45>
The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected by a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28>
The tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and it protrudes toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. They are connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and output sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify users that an error has occurred.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is located above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices, such as a liquid crystal display, plasma display, organic electroluminescence display, or projector, can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and displays various visual effects, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order and key positions for pressing the stop switch 13 during play (when only the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position image, or key position image)). When only the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as a key position navigation image (also referred to as a key position image, or a key position navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image)). When both the key positions and the key positions are displayed, this may be referred to as an operation mode navigation image (also referred to as an operation mode image) as a broader concept than the key positions and key positions), error images when an error occurs, etc. Some slot machines PS1 do not have a display device 32.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable props>
Other effect devices, such as dot displays and movable gadgets, are located at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4 or on the top and bottom panels. The other effect devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000 and display various effect images and actions, as well as game instruction images and actions that indicate the order and timing of pressing the stop switch 13 during play, and error images and actions when an error occurs. Other effect devices are installed as desired depending on the model of slot machine PS1. Various devices, such as LCD displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors, can also be used as other effect devices. In particular, in gaming machines equipped with an auxiliary LCD as an additional effect device, the display device 32 may be referred to as the main display device, and the LCD as the other effect device may be referred to as the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device has a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the back side of the front panel PS2 and is provided in the flow path below the medal insertion slot 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow path, a medal removal function that guides inserted non-standard medals to a tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are being accepted from the flow path using an electrically driven blocking member (also referred to as a blocker). Furthermore, if a medal inserted when accepting medals is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal into a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors within the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion slot, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insert sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of medals passing insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, and to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insert sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. The passage sensor and chute sensor have overlapping functions, so only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow game medals to pass through. Allowing game medals to pass means that game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing game medals to pass through means that game medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 side of the slot machine PS1.

<PS3 Cabinet>
The cabinet PS3 is configured in the shape of a rectangular box with an opening on one side, and inside are provided a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or "setting switch"), a power supply unit 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are fitted together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are caulked together to prevent them from being easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to a main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed in place with locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, center reel 8b, right reel 8c) consist of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple designs attached to the outer periphery of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base that fixes the stepping motor and is considered to be the reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor is moved one step for each interrupt to maintain a constant rotation speed (constant rotation). Then, depending on the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant rotation speed to the stop position determined for each stop operation acceptance position. After the reel has reached the stop position, the brake is applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the reel's rotation and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spokes at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor attached to the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference symbol (also referred to as the initial symbol) during each rotation. The stepping motor that drives the reels in the slot machine PS1 has 336 steps, and one rotation takes 336 timer interrupts during constant-speed rotation. During constant-speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every two timer interrupts, and a rotation failure is determined when the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180. In other words, a rotation failure is determined when the reel does not complete one rotation even after 360 timer interrupts. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when an index is detected, and if the constant-speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before reaching 180.

In the slot machine PS1 used as the premise, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, but a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing. However, this is not limited to this, and a determination as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing may also be made. With this configuration, it is possible to more quickly bring the player into a state where a stop can be accepted.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which lights up to highlight the stopped symbol after the reel has stopped, and also lights up to improve the visibility of the symbol while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by players. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with rails attached to the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3 and can slide back and forth along the rails. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is journaled by the hopper motor and aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that has a discharge mechanism that rotates the turntable to discharge medals one by one into the tray 28, a medal discharge port from which medals are discharged by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 via a downwardly sloping rail provided in the storage tank. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box-like structure. When installed in the cabinet PS3, two full tank detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are exposed to the interior of the auxiliary tank 46 through through holes provided in at least one side. When a certain amount of medals inserted through the medal insertion slot are stored, the two full tank detection electrodes become electrically conductive via the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and auxiliary tank 46 are full. Note that the number of full tank detection electrodes is not limited to two; the number may be changed, such as three. Furthermore, the method of full tank detection is not limited to using full tank detection electrodes; full tank detection may also be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided on a setting key switch unit with a door on the front side inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is gained by opening the door on the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on while medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if the setting key switch 37 is determined to be on during the power-on recovery process (also referred to as the power-on process) when the power is turned on, a setting change process (described below) is executed.

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply unit 39 is located at the lower left of the cabinet PS3 when viewed from the front. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box-like structure, an external power switch 40, and an internal power supply board for generating voltage. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via harnesses (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness, supplying power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 takes in power from outside the slot machine PS1, then generates a predetermined voltage and causes the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage.When the power switch 40 is turned off, the power supply device 39 is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally installed inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts signals related to game results output from the main control board 100 into signals in a predetermined format and transmits them to the outside of the slot machine PS1. Game results include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (number of big bonuses, number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting signals to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the automatic timer is activated, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, or when the value of a game-related counter reaches a predetermined value.

<Function block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
The slot machine PS1 is based on a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that controls the general flow of play, and is electrically connected to a sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), a door relay board (also referred to as central display board), a reel device board, a reset/setting switch 38, a setting key switch, etc., thereby enabling data communication. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible via one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, allowing data communication between the main control built-in register and the main control CPU via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program in response to a call command (e.g., CALL command), and interrupt registers (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manage the enable/disable status of maskable interrupts.

The main control chip controls the role drawing (also referred to as internal drawing), reel drive control (also referred to as reel control), payout control, etc., and transmits data to various boards as appropriate. Furthermore, when a selected role (also referred to as AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye-pressing role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye-pressing role) is won as a result of the internal drawing, and information regarding the display of the selected role (push order, operation timing) is notified on the main control means 100 side, the sub-control means also notifies the sub-control means by transmitting selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of the selected role). This enables the sub-control means to also notify the sub-control means of information regarding the display of the selected role. Note that all processing related to the AT, such as transitioning to the AT, extending the number of AT plays, and notifying the push order, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. Note that a push order role is a conditional device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and a press timing role is a conditional device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less," and includes a usage area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less," and an area outside the usage area (also referred to as the second program area). The usage area includes a control area (also referred to as the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which programs executed by the main control board 100 are stored, and a data area (also referred to as the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than programs (e.g., internal lottery table information) is stored, or will be stored. Similar to the usage area, the area outside the usage area also includes a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area). The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, while the area outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," and has a usable area of "512B or less" (also referred to as the first working area) and an area outside the usable area (also referred to as the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM built into the main control chip has storage areas for switch status flags indicating the on/off status of the play stop switch and the automatic settlement switch, a storage area for setting value information indicating which of several RT states is set (1-6), a storage area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states the current state is in, a storage area for specific condition devices indicating the winning status of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a storage area for game information storing other information necessary to progress the game, unused storage areas, a storage area for the stack area where data saved from registers is stored, and a storage area for the temporary stack area set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change means is used to change the settings, when the power is turned off and back on, and at the start of each game. The range of memory area in the main control RAM that is initialized differs depending on the situation.

If power recovery cannot be performed normally or recovery is not possible during the setting change process, data 0 is set (initialized) to the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag retains the state before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not retained.

In addition, during the setting change process, if recovery from a power outage can be performed normally or if the state is not one in which recovery is impossible, that is, if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch status flag, setting value information, RT status information, and specific condition device. In other words, the RT status, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game state before the setting change is maintained and play becomes possible with the setting values after the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and new setting values are set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether a setting change has been made.

In addition, during power-off recovery processing, and at the start of each game, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area, and during power-off recovery processing, data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the most used area when RAM is initialized after power-off recovery.

The main control internal registers built into the main control chip are used to set the operation of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuits) built into the main control chip and control their functions.

For example, by writing (also called setting or storing) data to a specified memory area in the main control built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) for maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip allows the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. to communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamp, sub-switch 20, performance switch, etc. Information to the display device 32 is transmitted as data to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that communicates data between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also referred to as external central terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reels. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reels are operating normally and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also referred to as an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is open or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether medals pass through properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external central terminal board is a relay board that transmits data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board receives input information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, chute sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the selector, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board>
The performance control board (also called the performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable parts, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the performance output to the performance device based on the performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The presentation control means selects presentation content based on the results of the lottery for winning combinations performed by the internal lottery means. The underlying slot machine PS1 is provided with multiple types of presentation content pre-installed, and the presentation control means selects presentation content by lottery using software random numbers after the internal lottery means has performed a lottery for winning combinations, such as at the start of play.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation effects depending not only on the results of the winning combination lottery but also on the results of the freeze combination lottery and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation effects corresponding to when a bonus combination is won, when a small combination is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will light, flash, or go out, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to player operation. For example, effects could be generated by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands sent from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100. Effects could also be generated directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, and effect switches, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Furthermore, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may also be configured as a single board. In this case, the sub-control board 1000 may have the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance content on the display device 32.

<Power supply board>
The slot machine PS1, which is the premise of this invention, supplies power from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting them. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, which then supplies power to the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, thereby electrically connecting them.

This section explains the control of the main control board 100, which controls the gameplay of the gaming machine.

<Error type>
Errors are broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
Recoverable errors are errors that indicate selector-related errors (medal retention errors, medal backflow errors, medal passing time errors), hopper 44-related errors (hopper retention errors, hopper empty errors, abnormality detection errors), door open errors, harness disconnection errors, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and the reset switch is operated, it is possible to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after the game in which the recoverable error was detected has ended. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement facility manager can be minimized even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover once the cause of the error has been removed; an error that can be recovered from without cycling the power is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1, when an irrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict the progress of the game, and the fact that an irrecoverable state is present is notified by displaying a message on the credit number display 26 according to the type of error.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when a reset switch (not shown) is operated; however, once an unrecoverable error is set, the unrecoverable error cannot be cleared by simply operating the reset switch or by cycling the power. In this case, the unrecoverable error is cleared by performing a setting change process. When the power is cycled during an unrecoverable error, part of the power-off recovery process is executed, and then the unrecoverable error display is repeatedly displayed, preventing further game processing from being executed.

Irrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet during the draw is outside the specified range, when a setting error check indicates a value that is not within the normal range, when it is determined that the power-off process was not performed correctly when power is restored after a power outage, when a random number error is detected, such as when an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency is detected, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a non-winning role is stopped on an active line during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or in standby mode (from the end of one game until the start of the next).

<How to play, game flow>
To play on the slot machine PS1, a predetermined number of medals to bet (also called a prescribed number) is set by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17 or by operating the MAX BET switch 18 or 1 BET switch 19 to bet medals stored in advance. The prescribed number for the slot machine PS1 is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to bet, the pay line is set to be valid, and the game becomes available for play.

If a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot when the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credits will increase. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is 50. If medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the medal selector's blocker is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the upper limit of the number of medals bet and the upper limit of the number of stored credits are reached, the blocker is turned off (no path to the hopper 44 in the selector is formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet amount is added when the bet amount is less than three (less than the maximum bet amount in the game state when the medals are inserted). Furthermore, when medals are inserted, they can be saved as credits when the bet amount is three (the maximum bet amount in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the maximum number of credits that can be saved). In other words, when the sum of the bet amount and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted through the medal slot. Note that another condition for medals to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that they are in standby mode (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, if a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and the game is in standby mode after the automatic bet process has been executed, the medal insertion requirement is met. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the role lottery result or condition device number), it is determined whether the minimum play time (also referred to as the wait time (period) or 4.1 second timer) has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the reels begin to spin, but if the wait time has not elapsed, the reels wait without spinning until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 will stop according to the result of the role lottery and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called a full stop), a determination is made as to whether or not the stopped symbols determined when each reel was stopped are abnormal. If no abnormalities are found, a search is made to determine which symbol combination has stopped. Depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search results, processing such as medal payout (including addition to credits), replay setting (automatic betting), bonus state setting, bonus state termination, RT state setting, and RT state termination is carried out, and one game is completed.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also called freeze effect) that temporarily stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time may, for example, temporarily stop functions related to the progress of the game, such as accepting game media, accepting the operation of a bet switch to determine the number of pre-credited game media to be bet, accepting the operation of the start switch 12 to start the game, or accepting the operation to stop the reels. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may temporarily halt all of the aforementioned functions related to the progress of the game, or it may temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily suspend game progress include not performing control processes based on player operation (processing to form a path for guiding medals to the hopper 44 using blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or perform an internal lottery based on operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued while game progress is paused by a freeze effect, the game will not perform control processing based on the input signal, will not accept the input signal, or will delay sending the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of a single game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding freeze effects that are performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, examples include cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period of time, but then rotate the reels after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, but then an internal drawing and reel rotation are performed after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed but the reels do not rotate for a predetermined period of time, but then the reels rotate after the predetermined period has passed; cases where, after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a predetermined period is set during which the reels rotate and stop during the predetermined period; cases where, after the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a predetermined period is set during which the stop switch 13 is disabled for the predetermined period of time.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect differs between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

One example of control processing for freeze effects based on acceptance of stop switch 13 operation is when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are spinning. After the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops, the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c are disabled for stop operation. This prevents the player from stopping the spinning middle and right reels for a specified period of time, but after the specified period has elapsed, the middle stop switch 13b and right stop switch 13c are enabled for stop operation, delaying the timing until the end of a single game.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of coins to be bet based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passage sensor, or automatic betting when a replay stops on an active line, based on the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel due to the acceptance of the operation of the last stop switch 13.

During the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, game progress control based on player operation is temporarily suspended, but gaming machine operations unrelated to game progress can still be performed. For example, even if stop control processing based on operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set as desired, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating at a slower or faster speed than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times and then stopping a specific symbol combination, stopping a specified reel among multiple reels while the other reels start spinning, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to player operation.

The specified period for which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, or settlement switch, etc.), and the results of a freeze lottery. Examples of changing the period include shortening or lengthening the specified period for which the freeze effect is performed, during which game progress is temporarily stopped, or switching the reel rotation pattern.

Control processes for shortening the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Control processes for lengthening the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. Furthermore, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of accepting an operation.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or it may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period may be set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period may be resumed after the freeze effect ends. Furthermore, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

A freeze effect (also called a pseudo game) can be performed during acceleration processing, making it appear as if normal play is in progress. In pseudo play, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo game period is determined during the reel acceleration process after an internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo game period, reel rotation is controlled as in normal play (reel rotation is controlled based on operation of the start switch upon the start of pseudo play), and reel stop control is performed based on operation of the stop switch 13. The reels may also be configured to rotate again when the start switch 12 is operated during the pseudo game period. However, internal lottery processing based on operation of the start switch 12, and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in simulated games, when the reels stop due to the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as part of a reel effect, the stopped reels are made to oscillate up and down (so-called oscillating fluctuations). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a simulated game when they operate the stop switch 13.

<Pattern combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means a symbol combination that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on an active line, no matter when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (a 100% draw rate), so this symbol combination can be said to not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a 100% draw rate will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with a 100% draw rate on all reels will sometimes be referred to as a PB=1 role.

On the other hand, PB≠1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to a winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB≠1, and this winning symbol may be referred to as a PB≠1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
The small win priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small win is won within a bonus, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small win is drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus is won, if both a small win symbol and a bonus symbol can be drawn, the bonus symbol will be drawn.

Also, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and small win, or replay and bonus, are turned on at the same time, the replay symbol will always be drawn.

<Normal section>
The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a push order role is won in the normal section, a process is executed to send masked information (effect group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. Also, when a push order role is won in the normal section, the notification of the push order (both correct and incorrect push orders) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the push order even if a push order role is won, so even if a push order role is won in the normal section, it is not always clear whether it is correct or incorrect.

<Advantageous Zone>
The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and is set up to prevent excessive medal acquisition through the automatic timer. If a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery executed in the normal zone, they can transition to the advantageous zone. While the transition lottery to the automatic timer can be held in the advantageous zone, in order to prevent the aforementioned excessive medal acquisition, the advantageous zone is designed to end and transition to the normal zone based on certain conditions. Specifically, these conditions include: 1) when 1,500 games have been played since the next game after transitioning to one advantageous zone; 2) when more than 2,400 medals have been acquired since the next game after transitioning to one advantageous zone; and 3) when an arbitrary condition is met. These conditions can prevent excessive medal acquisition. Examples of the arbitrary condition in 3) include when one automatic timer ends or when a specific symbol combination is displayed.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp>
A favorable zone lamp is provided as information on the main side indicating that the player is in a favorable zone. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in a favorable zone by checking whether the favorable zone lamp is lit. Specifically, a lit DP on the credit number display 26 indicates that the player is in a favorable zone, while an unlit DP on the credit number display 26 indicates that the player is not in a favorable zone. The favorable zone lamp may be lit after all reels have stopped, after a bet switch operation is accepted, upon detection of the first medal inserted during servicing, upon detection of the second medal inserted during servicing, upon detection of the third medal inserted during servicing, after acceptance of a start switch, or after a winning combination is selected by an internal lottery. The lamp is always lit when the player is in a favorable zone, operation procedure information for a winning combination is announced, and the payout rate (maximum payout rate) for the game being announced exceeds 1 (increases).

In addition, the machine is designed so that the advantageous zone lamp will light up even when it is notified of the push order sequence to transition to RT, which has a high replay probability but does not have a payout rate of more than 1 due to the machine's specifications not being equipped with a push order minor feature. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the machine's specifications.

However, if the conditions for lighting the advantageous zone lamp as described above are not met, it is acceptable to choose the timing for lighting the advantageous zone lamp after moving into a new advantageous zone.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the advantageous zone ends (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected).

By configuring it this way, it is possible to be in a favorable zone even when the favorable zone lamp is not lit, and it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed even when the favorable zone lamp is not lit. As a result, while in the conventional normal zone, the game was simply a matter of waiting to move to the favorable zone, with the slot machine PS1, it is possible that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held even in the normal zone, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game where the zone is in the normal zone (advantageous zone type is 0) and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, causing the advantageous zone type to become 1, the advantageous zone type is 1, but the zone has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone, so the game state is still in the normal zone. When executing the process to send a test signal to determine whether the zone is advantageous or normal, referencing the advantageous zone type will result in sending a signal for the advantageous zone even though the zone is normal, and so a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

To prevent this situation, when a test signal indicating whether the zone is advantageous or normal is sent, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is referenced. When the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating the zone is normal, and when the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), processing is executed to output a test signal indicating the zone is advantageous. By configuring in this way, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state simply by determining whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, thereby eliminating pressure on program capacity and improving program execution speed. Note that, as mentioned above, even when the advantageous zone is terminated under any termination condition, the value of the advantageous zone clear counter is set to 1, so the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is advantageous even in games where the advantageous zone ends.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and is also called the notification period, which is a period for making it easier for a player to win a role that has been selected by lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, means for notifying during AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switch, and are also called operation procedures or operation modes.

<Grouping of choice roles>
When a selected role is won during a non-AT game, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 an effect group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT game, the main control means 100 transmits the effect group number and operation procedure information to the sub-control means 1000. In other words, because operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT game, the sub-control means 1000 is unable to notify the operation procedure. As a result, it is unclear from the sub-control means 1000 side which operation procedure will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT game, but because operation procedure information that will display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT game, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device and operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. This allows the player to easily recognize the operation procedure and also prevents the operation procedure information from being illegally obtained during a non-AT game.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lotteries, AT addition lotteries, and updating of AT termination conditions (addition/subtraction of the AT game count, addition/subtraction of the AT execution notification count), but also processing related to AT state management. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed for a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and if multiple bet numbers are set as specified numbers in a certain game state, the processing is configured to be executed only for one of the bet numbers. For example, if two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only when playing with a three-coin bet, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed when playing with a two-coin bet. In other words, when playing with a two-coin bet, even if a winning combination for the AT lottery is selected, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT game count is not updated as the game progresses. Furthermore, if an SB or CB that ends in one play is exclusively for two-coin bet play, and the play after the SB or CB ends is for two-coin bet or three-coin bet, if a replay is won on the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function becomes impossible in the play after the SB or CB ends (processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet). Therefore, the number of coins automatically bet when a replay is won on the SB or CB is set to three. This makes it possible to execute processing related to the instruction function even in the play after the replay is won on the SB or CB, thereby eliminating a game that is disadvantageous to the player. Note that, as mentioned above, processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of coins bet.

<Instruction monitor>
During AT, when reporting information about the operation procedure of the push order role, the operation procedure information may be reported using the number of coins acquired display. Specifically, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, players can know the correct button press order by checking the instruction monitor. Furthermore, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify players of the correct button press order even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

Also, if the indicator monitor also doubles as the number of coins won display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1-6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display an identifier "=". In this case, the identifier can be used to determine whether the number of coins won display is displaying the number of coins won or the push order, so the player's recognition can be unobstructed.

Also, if the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, for push order A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor; for push order E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor; and for push order F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. This configuration makes it easier for players to intuitively grasp the push order on the instruction monitor, allowing them to easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within a favorable zone, and any time after the push order role is selected through an internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch, and before the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before they operate the stop switch, preventing them from operating the stop switch with an incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches between displaying the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio (selectable depending on the specifications of the gaming machine), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role status ratio every 4800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four 7-segment LEDs (with DP).Of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs, the top two digits are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

The "role" in the role ratio refers to the first-class special role (known as RB), second-class special role (known as CB), and regular role (known as SB), and the "role ratio" is the ratio calculated by: payout during role operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first-class special role continuous operation device (known as BB) and the second-class special role continuous operation device (known as MB) are also included in "payouts during role operation," but payouts during regular play during BB or regular play during MB are not included in "payouts during role operation."

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to a Type 1 special feature (known as RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is a ratio calculated by: payout during activation of a Type 1 special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during activation of a Type 1 special feature continuous activation device (known as BB) are also included in "payouts during feature activation," but payouts during regular play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature activation."

In the command-inclusive device ratio, "command-inclusive devices" include payouts from games in which the command function is activated (so-called automatic transmission). The "command-inclusive device ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) ÷ total payouts × 100. Here, (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated) does not refer to payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated, but rather refers to the sum of payouts from games in which the command function is activated and the device is activated. If the game in which the command function is activated is also a game in which the device is activated, the payout for that game is (payouts while the command function is activated, or payouts while the device is activated), rather than the sum of the two payouts. Note that if a player operates the stop switch incorrectly during a game in which the automatic transmission is activated, they may not receive the maximum payout; in this case, the calculation is based on the actual payout.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed: cumulative advantageous zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, or cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", or "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6,000 games.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment allows the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" will be displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result will be rounded down to the nearest integer. If the calculation result is 100, "99" will be displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment will display "00".

The identification segment will flash if the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio over the most recent 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role and other status ratio.

The ratio segment blinks when the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to the various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment will light up.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed by flashing all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in flashing mode. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed during setting changes, setting confirmation, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error.

In the identification segment, when the cumulative number of games played is less than the reference number of games played, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, and when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a flashing mode. Specifically, the flashing mode is displayed by alternating between lighting and off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → off 300 ms → .... In addition, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and flashing.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure the display so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it in this way, the display starts with lighting even when various ratio information switches, so it is possible to continuously display the display without any sense of incongruity due to a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period for the test pattern after power-on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so once the test pattern has finished displaying for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED will turn off, and the next timer interrupt process will turn it on and display information regarding the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the ratio monitor.

In order to flash the display mode of the role ratio monitor, a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) is provided for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and a process of adding 1 is executed for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a borrow occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").)

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "299." In this case, the carry flag becomes 1 (the result of calculating "298 - 299" is a borrow, so the carry flag becomes 1).

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching the light on and off is "299" and an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) used to manage the time for switching the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299 - 299" is that no borrow occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is a value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1; if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible to have the display mode of the role ratio monitor alternate between a lit state and an off state every 300 ms (blinking display).

The winning ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment. In all other cases, the monitor is displayed in a lit mode without referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between on and off is updated for each timer interrupt process regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated as needed, and even when switching from not referencing the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referencing it, the timing of the light turning on and off and the timing of the various ratio displays can be displayed without any discrepancy.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the main CPU functions, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal; if the conditions are met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal; if the conditions are not met, the power-off recovery data is determined to be abnormal.

Next, the status of the setting key switch signal and door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power failure recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power failure recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process of the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the game progress main of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, an unrecoverable error is notified and the process transitions to unrecoverable error processing, which stops game progress on the slot machine PS1. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an unrecoverable state, the process transitions to the power failure recovery processing of Figure 8. After the power failure recovery processing, the process transitions to the main game progress of Figure 9. Note that after the power failure recovery processing, the state saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when handling an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and output from the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the acquired coin count display 27 repeatedly displays (announces) the error.

<Power off processing>
The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the slot machine PS1, the operating voltage required to operate the slot machine PS1 drops when the power switch 40 is turned off or a power outage or other event occurs that cuts off the power supply (also referred to as a power outage). When the operating voltage drops below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the timer interrupt processing, a determination process is performed to determine whether the power outage detection signal has been input. When determining whether the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt processing, the determination may be made in a single timer interrupt processing, or in two or more timer interrupt processing cycles. In other words, when determining whether a power outage has occurred in multiple timer interrupt processing cycles, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input in the first cycle but not in the second cycle, the power outage processing is not performed. This is to prevent power-off processing from being performed in the event of noise or momentary interruption (when the voltage momentarily drops below the threshold but immediately rises above it).

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, periodically executed interrupts are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibit/enable status at the time of power-off is saved. Next, used registers are saved and the stack pointer is saved. After saving, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. RAM writing is then prohibited and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, whether the power-off processing completed flag is set, and whether the checksums for all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the assumed slot machine PS1, timer interrupt processing is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt process begins, the necessary data stored in the registers is compared. If a power-off detection signal is received, power-off processing is executed. Input ports are read to determine input from various sensors and control switches. Various timers (such as timers for measuring freeze periods and timers for measuring wait periods) are measured. Reel drive control involves controlling and updating the drive status of each reel, depending on whether it is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data for each output port (such as excitation signals for the stepping motor and drive signals for the hopper 44). Various abnormalities are checked for. Examples of abnormalities include whether the current setting values are normal and whether the operation patterns of the insertion and withdrawal sensors are normal. Next, external signal output is performed to set (control the on/off) external signals such as bonus signals, ART signals, and security signals, as well as medal insertion signals and medal withdrawal signals, which are output to external systems such as hall computers (S304).

Next, in the control command transmission process, if a sub-control command has been set, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs, notification data to be sent to the sub-control board, such as the sound of operating the stop switch or the sound of inserting a medal, signals related to performance tests are output, the registers are restored, and the timer interrupt process is terminated by saving the interrupt permission flag on.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the results of the internal lottery, a start reel rotation command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels are operated.

Furthermore, the timer measurement process may be performed within the timer interrupt process.
In timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process is performed to update (e.g., subtract 1) the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) for one game. In addition to the RWM memory area that monitors the minimum game time, the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button, and a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal.
In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in a storage area of the RWM that stores information about the timer (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area), such as a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, or a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C. Furthermore, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is set to "0".

Note that while the control process for updating the information about the timer stored in the RWM was described as subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area, it may also be a process of adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area.

Here, the monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button will be explained.
Monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button is a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that prevents the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated from being executed until the value of the timer reaches "0".

For example, under certain circumstances where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1-bet switch 19), a bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 19, and then "20" is stored in timer area B. Thereafter, the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process subtracts "1." Then, when the timer interrupt process has been executed 20 times, the value stored in timer area B becomes "0." Note that if the value stored in timer area B is not "0" (when the value stored in timer area B is any value between "1" and "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1-bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1-bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in timer area B is not "0," the bet process is not executed. After that, once the value stored in timer area B becomes "0," the bet process can be executed when the 1-bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration prevents multiple bet processes from being executed due to a malfunction despite a single operation of the 1 bet switch 19. It also prevents a malicious player from repeatedly pressing the 1 bet switch 19, which would result in multiple bet processes being executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 and commands based on the execution of bet processes being sent consecutively to the sub-control means 1000.

<Power off recovery process>
The power-off recovery process executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the assumed slot machine PS1, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state it was in before the power was turned off.

The power failure recovery process restores the stack pointer and restores output data related to the sub-control command sent to the sub-control board 1000. It then determines whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination reveals an abnormality (value outside the specified range), it moves on to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the value is normal (value within the specified range), it initializes unused RAM areas, activates a periodically executed interrupt, and reads the input port. It then clears the power failure processing completion flag, restores used registers, and restores the interrupt disable/enable state that was in place at the time of the power failure, completing the power failure recovery process. Note that when the power failure recovery process is completed, the system returns to the state before the power failure occurred; if it does not return to the normal state (when settings are changed), it restarts the main game progress control process.

In the assumed slot machine PS1, an interrupt is initiated at a predetermined timing within the power-off recovery process, but the interrupt may also be initiated after the power-off recovery process of the program start process.

<Main explanation of game progress>
The main control process for game progress executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 references the value of the freeze effect number saved before the previous game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it executes the freeze effect, but if the saved freeze effect number does not correspond to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may also be configured not to save the freeze effect number when a freeze effect is not to be executed, in which case it may be configured to determine whether the freeze effect number has been saved, and if not, proceed to the next process.

Next, when a gaming medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game medal insertion process). Next, it is determined whether the number of bets that will enable a game to be played has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has been operated. If it is determined that no bet has been placed, it waits for a gaming medal to be placed, or, if credits have been accumulated, for the bet switch to be operated (if credits have been accumulated). If the number of bets that will enable a game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), it performs an internal lottery process, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), it waits for the start switch 12 to be operated.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if stop switch operation is accepted immediately after stop switch operation acceptance after reel rotation is permitted.

The types of winning combinations available on the PS1 slot machine can be broadly divided into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

A bonus is a device that activates in predetermined circumstances. Generally, it activates when the symbol combinations "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" are displayed statically on an active line in the display window 4. The activation of bonus-related devices changes the number of symbol combinations that result in a winning combination for each set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for each winning symbol combination for each set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also known as a first-class special bonus. RB is generally set to end when eight small wins or 12 game results are achieved, and during RB, the winning combination is drawn using an RB medium combination drawing table, which sets the winning probability of a small win higher than the normal combination drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also referred to as a continuous operation device for Type 1 special roles. The end condition for BB is set to the payout of more than 285 game medals for winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB role lottery table, which sets the probability of winning a small role (described below) higher than the normal role lottery table. Note that a BB role lottery table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a BB role lottery table that continuously operates the RB role lottery table described below until the BB end condition is met may be referred to as a BB role lottery table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also known as a Type 2 special feature. CB can be set to a state in which at least all minor features are won, regardless of the results of the feature lottery. Furthermore, during CB, stop control that differs from normal stop control is performed on predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

As described above, the CB may be configured so that at least all minor winning combinations are achieved, preventing the display of symbol combinations that would be displayed according to the operating procedure (also known as missed combinations). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operating timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operating timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also known as a continuous operation device for second-class special features. MB is terminated when more than 153 medals are paid out for a small prize, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a regular bonus. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, the bonus is drawn using the SB medium bonus lottery table, which sets the probability of winning a small bonus higher than the regular bonus lottery table.

In the assumed slot machine PS1, the BB is performed by drawing lots using a BB mid-role lottery table, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role lottery table in which the winning probability of small roles is set to the same as that of the normal role lottery table and the winning probability of RB is increased, or an RB mid-role lottery table in which the winning probability of small roles is set higher than that of the normal role lottery table. Even in this case, the end condition for BB remains the same: a payout of more than 285 medals for winning a small role. Furthermore, the devices that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A minor win is a win in which a symbol combination based on a winning minor win is displayed on a winning line, and when the winning determination process (described below) determines that a win has been achieved, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed on the winning line.

A replay (also known as a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by automatic betting without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed stopped on an active line and determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small win, or replay roles, it is a loss and the winning process described below will not be carried out. When it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any role will be displayed on the active line.

Of the roles selected by the role lottery, for BB, RB, and MB, if the symbol combination does not stop and display on an active line in a winning play, the winning flag can be carried over to the next play or later (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag was carried over, or the role lottery may be performed using a carry-over role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag (also referred to as an internal-internal lottery table or internal-internal role lottery table). When using the carry-over role lottery table, if a symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB stops and displays on an active line, it is determined that the transition conditions for the role lottery table are met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The winning probability for multiple types of roles is set in the role selection table, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB, etc.

The winning combination table sets single winning combinations, where one type of symbol combination can be displayed stop on an active line, and multiple winning combinations, where multiple symbol combinations can be displayed stop on one or more active lines, according to the results of the winning combination lottery.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be able to display one winning role depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to display a winning role. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles corresponding to some symbol combinations that cannot be displayed are sometimes referred to as control roles.

The role of the control utility is to control the effective line on which the symbols are displayed to differ depending on the type of control utility set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple role draws.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role lottery results. Then, when the player operates all stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is completed, the means turns off the flag corresponding to the winning role.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, a flag is turned on in a winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the active line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game or later in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed stopped, completing the winning processing for the winning role, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table.

Specific examples of the use of RT include replacing the losing area of the normal role lottery table with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or replacing the replay area of the normal role lottery table with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay. Furthermore, the normal role lottery table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different. The slot machine PS1 has multiple RT role lottery tables, each configured to transition to another RT state when a specified transition condition is met.

The transition conditions for the RT role lottery table are as follows: Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop symbol; transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won; transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends; transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop symbol; and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays have been played since BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions for the RT role lottery table can be set appropriately depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries is the number of winning entries for each lottery result as determined by the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means, and the winning probability is calculated by dividing each entry by 65,536. The total of all entries is 65,536. For example, the winning probability for a lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16,384.

In addition, the number of replays can be changed when any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role lottery table described above is met. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3 and the replay probability for RT2 is changed to 1/1.5 when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This reduces the loss of medals by transitioning to a state with a high replay probability, making the game more interesting.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set during the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if the value of the minimum play time timer is determined to be 0), a new minimum play time is set. If it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if the value of the minimum play time timer is not determined to be 0), the value of the minimum play time timer is decremented and then a check is made to see if the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and the main game progress process is configured so that no other processing is executed between the processing for determining the minimum play time and the processing for setting the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processing, allowing the player to play as quickly as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent gameplay from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limiting, and the system may be configured to execute other processing as the main game progress processing between the processing for determining the minimum play time and the processing for setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processing may be processing for clearing the RWM address, processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processing times are so short that the user does not feel an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, processing for preparing to start reel spinning is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up to correspond to the symbol control number determined by the results of the role lottery conducted by the internal lottery means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels start spinning) is executed. The freeze effect involves slightly moving the reels or spinning them in reverse, primarily to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

If a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect has been executed and the execution of that freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel rotation process, reel rotation start process, or reel rotation start process) is executed. There are four reel rotation states: acceleration state, constant speed rotation state, stop preparation state, and stop state, and the acceleration state is set when the reels are to be rotated. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor using timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process performed in the acceleration state is the process performed from a stopped reel rotation state until constant-speed rotation processing is performed. During constant-speed rotation processing, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt. However, if constant-speed rotation processing is suddenly performed while the reels are stopped, the torque will be insufficient, increasing the likelihood of step-out. For this reason, acceleration processing is necessary to gradually rotate the reels. Note that the acceleration process in the PS1 slot machine first moves the stepping motor one step after 50 timer interrupts, then one step after 30 timer interrupts, then one step after 10 timer interrupts, then one step after five timer interrupts, then one step after two timer interrupts, and then one step after one timer interrupt. This then leads to constant-speed rotation processing, in which the stepping motor moves one step after each timer interrupt.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the rotation failure detection counter's initial value is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing. However, if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the rotation failure detection counter's value can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, when in a constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and the system waits for the stop switch to be operated. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp lights up blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp lights up red). The control of the stop switch lamp lighting may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub-control means 1000. In addition, when executing push order navigation, the stop switch lamp may be flashed to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

A command indicating that the reels have started to spin is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spinning time timer that measures the reel spinning time and starts counting. When the value of the reel spinning time timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (a reel stop warning image) on the LCD screen to prompt the player to continue spinning the reels. The reel spinning time timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the stop switch operation is accepted), and counts again if there are any reels that are still spinning. In this way, the reel spinning time timer continues to be updated until all reels have stopped.

If the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it will be displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, clearly prompting the player to operate the stop switch. Also, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time and players may not know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be hidden (or made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or special switch, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling acceptance of stop switch operation in the game progress main processing, the process of determining whether or not a stop switch operation has been accepted (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any stop switch has been operated, stop control (also known as slip control) is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel continues to rotate at a constant speed until it reaches the desired stop position. Then, when it reaches the desired stop position, it transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON, applying the brakes. Note that slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds of operation of the stop switch 13. In the assumed slot machine PS1, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols when operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing symbol number matches the symbol number saved as the stop position, and if they match, all four-phase excitation is turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing symbol number is determined by the initial symbol number being set the moment the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then the symbol number following the initial symbol number being set when the timer interrupt process moves one symbol from there.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it checks whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, it executes the prize determination process and then the prize winning process. If all reels are not stopped, it executes the process of waiting for acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. After all reels have stopped, it updates the display contents of the status display monitor and moves on to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. It then executes the game end check process, which updates the RT status, etc., and ends the main series of game progression flows. Note that it is also possible to perform a software random number update process between the start of reel rotation and the acceptance of the stop operation.

The winning determination process is a process that determines whether a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped and displayed on a valid line. It determines whether the stopped symbols determined when the stop switch operation is accepted are abnormal, so it does not determine whether the symbol combination that actually stopped on the valid line has been used. After the winning determination process determines that a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped and displayed on a valid line, winning processing is performed. If the winning determination process does not determine that a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a valid line, processing based on a loss is performed.

Winning processing is the process of awarding a bonus to a player based on the symbol combination that stops on an active line. When a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped, the winning processing involves paying out medals based on the stopped symbol combination and changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped, the winning processing involves granting the right to replay and changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. When a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped, the winning processing involves changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that no winning processing is performed in the case of a loss.

However, this is not limited to this. When the result of the winning determination process is a loss, winning processing based on the loss may be performed, and processing may be performed in which no bonus is awarded to the player as a result of the winning processing. Furthermore, winning processing based on a loss may involve transitioning the game state depending on the operation mode at the time of the loss. For example, if all stop switches 13 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence when a loss occurs, the game state may transition to one with a different probability of winning a freeze. Even in the case of an apparent loss due to a missed minor combination, winning processing may be performed by controlling the transition of the game state, such as transitioning to an RT state, without making a payout. Furthermore, bonus-based winning processing may include the payout of medals based on the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed, or the granting of the right to a replay.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

When the winning symbol combination is determined, the winning symbol combination determination process transmits winning symbol combination information (stopped number information) displayed on the active line and role lottery result information to the sub-control board 1000. Meanwhile, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output effects corresponding to the winning symbol combination information and role lottery result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

The winning determination process determines whether a win has occurred on all active lines, and if the result of the determination is that multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning roles are displayed on multiple active lines, winning processing is performed for each of the multiple symbol combinations that are displayed.

For example, when a minor winning combination with a payout of 2 coins and a minor winning combination with a payout of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will pay out 12 coins by adding together the payout number based on the minor winning combination set to 2 coins and the payout number based on the minor winning combination set to 10 coins.

An upper limit is set for the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and if a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning combinations is displayed stopped on an active line and the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit will be paid out.

For example, if the upper limit for the number of coins to be paid out is set to 15, and a small win with a payout of 12 coins and a small win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the small win with 12 coins and the small win with 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

The underlying slot machine PS1 is set to pay out medals only for small wins, but it may also pay out medals equal to the number of medals bet in a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals in a winning process based on a bonus.

<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>
Of the processes executed by the main game progress unit of the slot machine PS1, the advantageous zone clear counter management process for managing the advantageous zone will be explained with reference to FIG.

Set the advantageous zone clear counter RWM address.

Next, perform a 2-byte subtraction operation.

Next, it determines whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0, it proceeds to a process to determine whether the advantageous zone type is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before the subtraction is not 0, it determines whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. Note that advantageous zone type = 0 means that the zone is not an advantageous zone and is a normal zone, and advantageous zone type = 1 means that it is an advantageous zone.

Next, it determines whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0, it proceeds to the RWM initialization process, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is not 0, it proceeds to the process of obtaining the value of the MY counter.

Next, in the process to obtain the MY counter value, the current MY counter value is obtained.

Next, after executing the process to obtain the value of the MY counter, it determines whether the replay activation symbol has stopped and is displayed. If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has stopped and is displayed, it moves on to the process to determine whether the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit (2400). If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has not stopped and is displayed, it moves on to the process to obtain data from the payout number buffer. The data in the payout number buffer is data that indicates the number of coins paid out in the event of a win, or no payout in the event of a loss or a missed minor win (the number of coins paid out is 0).

Next, the process of obtaining data from the payout number buffer obtains the payout number for that game.

Next, the process executes the process of adding the data (OUT number) from the dispensed number buffer obtained to the MY counter.

Next, a process is executed to obtain medal count data. This medal count data corresponds to the number of medals inserted.

Next, the process executes a process to subtract the IN number (number of inserted coins) from the MY counter.

Next, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the initial value is set in the MY counter and saved in the MY counter. Also, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the IN number from the MY counter is saved in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, which means that if the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Also, whether the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0. The carry flag is a flag that is set to 1 if the subtraction process results in a negative value, and is set to 0 if the subtraction process does not result in a negative value.

Next, after saving the MY counter value, a process is executed to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400). If the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), an RWM initialization process is executed and the process moves to the favorable zone type determination process. If the favorable zone type is 0 in the favorable zone type determination process, the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated. If the favorable zone type is not 0, the favorable zone clear counter is set to its initial value (1500) and the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated. Furthermore, if the MY counter value has not exceeded the upper limit (2400) in the process to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated.

The value of the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction is determined to be 0 or not. If the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous zone type is not 0, this process is carried out when the advantageous zone begins; it is not carried out at any other time. The value 1500 stored in the advantageous zone clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in the advantageous zone, and once a maximum of 1500 plays have been played in the advantageous zone, the normal zone will be set from the next play. This is to prevent addiction, prevent medals from continuing to increase all day, and not excessively stimulate gambling instincts.

The timing for setting the advantageous zone type to 1 is during the advantageous zone transition lottery process, which occurs between the time the start switch is received and the start of reel rotation. The advantageous zone transition lottery process is a process that is performed when the condition device number that is the subject of the lottery is selected, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone type is set to 1, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is not won, the advantageous zone type is set to 0 (normal zone).

The RWM initialization process, which is executed after the MY Counter value exceeds its upper limit, updates all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function to 0. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game status related to the AT. Updating the advantageous zone type to 0 changes it to a normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, and if the MY Counter value is 2400 or less, this process ends while maintaining the advantageous zone. Note that if a replay is won in an advantageous zone, the MY Counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY Counter is above 2400 is passed. In the case of a replay, the same number of coins as inserted are automatically bet, so OUT-IN is always 0. However, because there is a possibility that the MY Counter value may be updated at a different time than the normal process due to noise or fraud, a determination is made as to whether the MY Counter has reached its upper limit even during a replay.

Furthermore, the advantageous zone can be terminated at any timing for each gaming machine, in addition to 1,500 plays or exceeding MY2,400. For example, this can occur when the termination lottery is won when a predetermined combination is won, or when a desired number of plays (fewer than 1,500 plays) are performed. When terminating an advantageous zone at any timing, the advantageous zone clear counter is set to 1 before executing the advantageous zone clear counter management process (preferably an AT-related process executed after all reels have stopped). When executing the advantageous zone clear counter management process, the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 before decrementing, and the decrement result of the advantageous zone clear counter is 0, thereby terminating the advantageous zone through the advantageous zone clear counter management process. In other words, by setting the advantageous zone clear counter to 1 and then subtracting 1 from the counter value, the advantageous zone clear counter becomes 0, thereby terminating the advantageous zone. This allows processing within the same module when any desired termination condition is met, without the need for a separate advantageous zone termination module.

In addition, the advantageous zone clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous zone clear counter management process is configured to be executed for any bet number (if multiple specified numbers are set for the gaming machine) and any game state.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 of the slot machine PS1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When setting change mode is activated, it determines whether the current setting value is within the normal range. If it is within the normal range, it retrieves the current setting value. If it is outside the normal range, it saves "1" as the setting value and retrieves "1."

After obtaining the setting value, the setting value display data is saved. After saving the setting value display data, the lighting is controlled by dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process, referencing the setting value display data every five interrupts.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it again determines whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it determines whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented again. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and processing returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is confirmed and the system waits until it determines that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it determines that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a path for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as 1 to 6 setting values). After a setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the next time the setting value is changed by the setting change means. Note that a role selection table is provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the result of the internal lottery (probability of winning the role).

When the setting key used to change settings is rotated by the gaming parlor manager while the slot machine PS1 is powered off, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in the rotation position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal when the slot machine PS1 is powered on. In the assumed slot machine PS1, the setting key switch signal being turned on means a rising edge on (OFF → ON); if the setting key was on before a power outage occurred, the rising edge on is not detected after power is turned on, so the setting change mode is not entered; however, the setting key switch signal being turned on may be a level on, and the setting change mode may be entered when the setting key is on when the power is turned back on, even if it was on before a power outage occurred.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change enable flag is on, it activates a setting change mode in which the setting values of the slot machine PS1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, one possible configuration is to keep the setting change possible flag off from the time the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and to keep the setting change possible flag on at other times. However, this is not the only configuration, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game begins or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting may be changed in any state by not providing a setting change possible flag.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," and "6." The higher the setting value, the higher the winning combination table with a higher payout rate.

After the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to indicate that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 located on the front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) located on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1," the setting value display shows "1." When the setting value data is "2," the setting value display shows "2." When the setting value data is "3," the setting value display shows "3." When the setting value data is "4," the setting value display shows "4." When the setting value data is "5," the setting value display shows "5." When the setting value data is "6," the setting value display shows "6."

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5," if the setting value data is "0," the setting value display will show "1," if the setting value data is "1," if the setting value data is "2," if the setting value data is "2," if the setting value data is "3," if the setting value data is "3," if the setting value data is "4," if the setting value data is "4," and if the setting value data is "5," the setting value display will show "6."

After starting the setting change mode, the system continues to determine whether the sensor signal from the start switch 12 is on. If it determines that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal from the start switch 12 has turned on, the setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, if it determines that the sensor signal from the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not change even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when the sensor signal from the start switch 12 is not determined to be on but the setting switch signal is determined to be on, the setting switch rising edge data is cleared, and a determination is made as to whether the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "6"). If it is determined that the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data to "1"); if it is determined that the current setting is less than the maximum setting (setting value "1" to "5"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting. Note that when the setting value data has six levels (0 to 5), the setting change mode processing is as follows: a determination is made as to whether the current setting is equal to or greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "5"); if it is determined that the current setting is greater than the maximum setting (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data to "0"); if it is determined that the current setting is less than the maximum setting (setting value "0" to "4"), the setting value is incremented to the current setting.

In addition, when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED may display the setting value in a manner different from that in which the setting can be changed, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Control for Responding to Power Outage While Various Switches of the Assumed Slot Machine PS1 are Pressed>
When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has finished, no three bets have been made (including situations where no automatic bet has been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows for a three-bet (for example, the number of credits is three or more when no bets have been made, or the number of credits is two or more when one bet has been made) (hereinafter referred to as the MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, the number of bets is stored as three, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off).

In addition, not only when the front panel PS2 is closed, but also when the front panel PS2 is open, if a game has ended, no three bets have been made (including when no automatic bets have been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows for a three-bet (for example, the number of credits is three or more when no bets have been made, or the number of credits is two or more when one bet has been made), when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX BET process is executed, three is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are illuminated (before the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp are off). Unless otherwise specified below, the front panel PS2 is closed when the power is turned on, but the device may be configured to behave similarly even when the front panel PS2 is open.

The MAX bet available state includes a state where no bets have been made, a state where 1 bet has been made, and a state where 2 bets have been made. When the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps are newly lit, this is the MAX bet available state where no bets have been made. In the MAX bet available state where 1 bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamps are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet available state where 2 bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamps are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible, the MAX bet lamp is lit, notifying the player that operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet possible state, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 changes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even while the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor for the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the MAX BET switch 18 is in a MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the MAX BET process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again. In other words, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX BET switch is on), the MAX BET switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX BET process cannot be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid by lighting it in a certain manner. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid can place a MAX BET (perform MAX BET processing) by temporarily releasing the MAX BET switch 18 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the MAX BET switch 18 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again (the sensor for the MAX BET switch 18 changes from OFF to ON).

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the MAX bet is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will indicate that betting is possible and suggest that the 1 BET switch 19 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 BET switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, the MAX BET switch 18 may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET process may be executed. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may be on or off after power is turned on. If the MAX BET lamp is on after power is turned on, this indicates that the 1 BET switch 19 is operable, and operating the 1 BET switch 19 changes the state from 3 BET to 1 BET and returns the difference of "2" to the credits. (If the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 BET state and the number of credits is 50, operating the 1 BET switch 19 does not change the state to 1 BET, and the 3 BET state remains, so the MAX BET lamp does not light up (it is off) after power is turned on.) If the MAX BET lamp is off after power is turned on, this can indicate that the MAX BET process has been executed. Additionally, whether the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power-on, three bet sounds (three one-bet sounds) are output when power is turned on, making it possible to notify the user that the MAX BET process has been executed.

Next, when the MAX BET switch 19 is operated (pressed) while the MAX BET is enabled (no bets have been placed), 1 is stored as the bet number and the 1 BET lamp lights up. Also, since operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is still valid, the MAX BET lamp also lights up.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX BET is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor for the 1 BET switch 19 remains ON), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the 1 BET process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a 1 BET process by pressing the 1 BET switch 19 again.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp indicates that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that operation of the MAX BET switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can perform a 1 bet or MAX bet processing by releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the 1 bet switch 19 changes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX BET switch 18 again (when the sensor for the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON) without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that they had pressed, thereby performing a 1 bet or MAX bet processing.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will indicate that betting is possible, suggesting that the MAX BET switch 18 is operable. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX BET enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 BET switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 BET process may be executed. In this case, the MAX BET lamp lights up after power is turned on, indicating that the MAX BET switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX BET switch 18 is operated, the 1 BET state changes from the 1 BET state to the 3 BET state. Also, by outputting a 1 BET sound when power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the 1 BET process has been executed.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs, the operating voltage drops below the threshold, and the gaming machine becomes inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case whether the front panel PS2 is not open or is already open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed. Furthermore, when the gaming machine is in a state where a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage drops below the threshold, making it unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or when it is already open), if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are made and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 was valid.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, by enabling 1 bet processing using the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in conjunction with the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings or setting the administrator menu). Furthermore, since playing at an arcade is not normal when the front panel PS2 is open, deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound makes it possible to let the player know that something is not normal.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs when the maximum bet is possible (no bets have been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, the maximum bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be when the front panel PS2 is not open or when it is already open), and if the power is turned on while the front panel PS2 is open and the maximum bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be when the power outage recovery process is executed), the maximum bet lamp will not light up, the maximum bet process will not be executed, and even if the one bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the one bet process will not be executed; and thereafter, if the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the maximum bet switch 18 is still being operated (pressed), the maximum bet lamp will light up, and when the one bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the one bet process will become possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX BET lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that they cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX BET switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), bet operation with the 1 BET switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize disruption to game progress.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the MAX bet is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, when a power outage occurs in the MAX bet enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process will be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid. Even in such cases, the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 and 1 BET switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has finished, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and a normal effect is being displayed (an effect other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as the menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), the menu screen display process is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the menu screen is displayable, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen will not be displayed, and the lighting of the sub switch lamp will indicate that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that they had pressed (after the sensor for the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor for the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby displaying the menu screen.

Also, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it can be indicated that the confirmation operations for each item on the menu screen were valid.

Furthermore, when a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up, the MAX BET process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Furthermore, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18. In other words, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX BET switch is on), the MAX BET switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX BET process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets from being made and the menu screen from being displayed, even if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage. Even in such cases, the MAX BET lamp's illumination mode accurately indicates that the MAX BET switch 18 has been operated, and the sub switch lamp's illumination mode indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

Furthermore, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain depressed, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, when a power outage occurs while the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may light up, the MAX BET process may not be executed, the sub switch lamp may light up, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and the sub switch lamp may light up, indicating that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may remain lit even after the menu screen is displayed, indicating that the MAX BET process may be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has finished, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is one or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), operating (pressing) the settlement switch executes the settlement process and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the settlement process will not be executed. Furthermore, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is being pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that medals remain in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the settlement process will not be executed, but if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will be executed.

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and since operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game will not be hindered as much as possible, so the enjoyment of the game will not be diminished.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the settlement is possible, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may light up and the settlement process may be executed.

This means that, for example, if the power is turned on before an amusement center opens, if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is being operated (such as with a hand on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be carried out immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for any remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when a power outage occurs in a settlement-enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp on the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is being executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting operation of the sub-switch 20).

This means that even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub-switch 20. On the menu screen, information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting volume, can be viewed or changed. Furthermore, by enabling all operations related to game progress at this time, all gameplay operations other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player will not be at a disadvantage even if the settlement process is not performed, the number of inserted medals can be adjusted, making it possible to carry out the process without interfering with game progress as much as possible.

In addition, when a power outage occurs while the machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and settlement is enabled, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and the MAX BET process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX BET switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed and the MAX BET switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX BET process can be executed; and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX BET switch 18 is still being pressed and the settlement switch is still being operated (pressed) again, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when power is turned on after a power outage. Furthermore, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp accurately indicates that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, play has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), operating (pressing) the start switch 12 executes the reel rotation process, causing each reel to spin. Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the start switch 12 is pressed and then power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up, but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet. Furthermore, even in such cases, the start lamp's lighting pattern can accurately indicate that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Furthermore, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp light up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 turns off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet.Furthermore, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until they have finished operating the start switch 12, and once the operation of the start switch 12 is finished, the start lamp will light up, accurately notifying the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotatable, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage rises above the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all reels will spin after the power is turned on. This means that the game can proceed (all reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the player's effort and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the stop switch 13 is enabled to accept operation (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when a stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, or right stop switch 13c changes from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning; it can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state even when only one reel is spinning.

When the reels can be stopped, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is enabled. When the reels cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 lights up to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state in which the reels cannot be stopped may be a state in which the stop switch 13 is not accepted even though the reels are rotating (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated), or a state in which the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

Furthermore, the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is enabled is when it lights up in white or red, etc., and the lighting mode indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is disabled is when it is unlit (off) or when it lights up in a color (e.g., blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is enabled.

Furthermore, when the reels are in a stoppable state and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor for the left stop switch 13a remains ON), the stop control process will not be executed for the left reel. Furthermore, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that makes up the stop switch 13 will light up, indicating that it is disabled.

This means that, for example, if the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state, and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left reel will not be stopped by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, preventing players from suffering disadvantages such as missing out on minor winning combinations that require careful timing. It also makes it possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting operations in a different order from the correct order when an internal lottery result (the so-called "push order role") is won, in which the order in which the buttons are pressed stops to produce a symbol combination advantageous to the player.

Also, in a situation where the reels are in a stoppable state and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the left stop switch 13a is pressed and power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will light up, indicating that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during gameplay, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and the left stop switch 13a is pressed between then exceeding the threshold and the power being automatically turned on, and the power is then automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel will stop after the power is turned on. This means that the game can continue (the corresponding reel will stop) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's effort and improving the game tempo. Furthermore, by configuring the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that was pressed after power was turned on to stop even if the reel was accelerating, it is possible to stop it closer to the timing that the player originally intended. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power was turned on, none of the reels will stop.

<Control for Responding to Power Outage During Slip Control of Assumed Slot Machine PS1>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, if the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel rotates from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it reaches the stop position. If the power is cut off during this slip control, the slip control cannot be executed, and the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is performed based on the determined stop position. Therefore, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, if it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, medals will be paid out based on the small win.

For this reason, in a game in which a small win is won through the internal lottery process, power-off processing is executed during slip control when operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small win can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small win does not stop on an active line after power is restored, the winning determination processing after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small win has stopped, and medals are paid out according to the symbol combination that stopped.

This is for the following reason. While this has the effect of preventing situations where a player is unable to receive a medal payout even when they perform a stop operation at the timing when they should receive a medal payout, it also creates the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small winning combination is won through internal lottery processing, power-off processing is executed during slip control (from the time the stop switch 13 is operated until the end of slip control) when operation is received at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination can be stopped. After power is restored, the reels are rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reels are rotated to the stop position and then controlled to stop at the stop position, after which the medals are paid out.

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position again after power is restored, allowing the player to visually see which symbol combination has stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cutoff process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during the re-spin process after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stopping position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stopping position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stopping position, it may display a stop prohibition signal that will prevent the reel from stopping during play. Therefore, a process is required to determine whether or not a stop is prohibited, but the reel is designed to move to the planned position to reduce the processing load during the re-spin process.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and when the power is restored and the re-spin processing is performed, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing that differ from the normal processing may also be executed. For example, possible modes include a shorter acceleration time, a longer acceleration time, a slower constant speed spinning speed, or a faster constant speed spinning speed. By changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal mode in this way, the player can be made aware that the spinning is different from the normal mode.

Also, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the stop operation is accepted as in normal rotation processing, and slip control is initiated. Once the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (a four-phase excitation signal is output in the case of a four-phase stepping motor), stopping the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slip control and the re-spin process is underway after power is restored, one possible method would be to let the player know that the re-spin is in progress by displaying "Re-spinning" on the LCD screen, outputting a voice message saying "Re-spinning," or displaying an error message on the error indicator. This would allow the player to recognize that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. This flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is executed and the machine stops, so that re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

Furthermore, if a power cutoff process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after power is restored, or an error may occur after power is restored and the error is released using a reset switch before the re-rotation process is performed. Either mode is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, if power-off processing is performed during slip control, and during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), acceleration processing is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include holding the reel by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized during the initialization process when the power is turned on, and begins updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the first index is detected after power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter begins again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, the reel can be stopped to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure, even if the position where it stops due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when power is turned on until it stops, but this is not determined to be a rotation failure.

Note that while the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is when the power is turned on, this is not limiting. The rotation failure detection counter may also be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel enters a constant speed state.

In this way, power-off processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during the re-rotation processing after power is restored. This prevents the stop position from shifting due to step-out or the like even during re-rotation, making it possible to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, because rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out or the like occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power-off process is executed during slip control and an error (a recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after power is restored, an error notification is issued after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time include medal retention errors, medal backflow errors, medal passage time errors, hopper retention errors, hopper empty errors, abnormality detection errors, door open errors, and harness disconnection errors. In addition to error codes displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, error notifications can also be issued via an LCD screen, a speaker S, or by lighting up the top or side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a predetermined color (e.g., a highly visible, eye-catching color such as red or blue). Error notifications can be issued using only one error notification, or a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by issuing an error notification after the re-spin process has finished, it becomes easier for players and amusement facility personnel to recognize whether the notification is about a re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is issued during a re-spin, the notification is terminated after the re-spin has finished and switched to an error notification. Note that no error notifications are issued during a re-spin, and no notifications related to a re-spin that are not error notifications are issued.

The error modes during the re-spin process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, hopper accumulation errors may be detected but medal accumulation errors may not be detected). The error notification mode may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified on the number of coins acquired display 27, and when the re-spin process is completed and the reels stop, the error is notified on the LCD or speaker S, or the error is notified on the number of coins acquired display 27, LCD or speaker S after an error is detected.

Next, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and during the re-spin processing after power is restored, the lamp on the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

When the power is turned on, the reels will rotate not only when power is restored after a power outage during slip control, but also when power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reels can be stopped, and the illumination status of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is valid. Therefore, when the reels rotate when power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel restart process is in progress or normal reel rotation by checking the illumination status of the lamp on the stop switch 13.

Another possible situation in which the reels may spin when the power is turned on is when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. There are two types of freezes in which the reels spin: a pseudo-game in which temporary stopping is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and a reel effect in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 is in the active state. Therefore, when the reels start to spin after the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are in the process of re-spinning or are spinning normally by checking the light on the stop switch 13.

During reel performance, the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp is disabled, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp is disabled. Therefore, when the reels are rotating after power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress based on the illumination mode of the stop switch 13 lamp. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or error display. Note that even if the illumination mode of the stop switch lamp is disabled during reel performance, if the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the illumination mode of the lamps of the other main system switches is enabled. Therefore, by checking the illumination mode of the lamps of the other main system switches, it is possible to determine whether reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress.

Furthermore, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, the reels will not spin when power is restored, so it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress by the way the reels are spinning.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during the restart processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the scheduled stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be rotation until the index is detected.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in unstable situations where multiple power outages may occur.

Here, the timing at which power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing or after the index is detected during the re-rotation processing.

<Pattern 1>
If power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the timing for executing power-off processing again during re-rotation processing after power is restored is before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing, one possible mode is to rotate the motor until the index is detected during the second re-rotation processing after power is restored, and then rotate it to the planned stop position and stop it.

In this case, the index is not detected during the first re-spin process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-spin process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and performs another rotation to detect the index, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (as long as the sensor detects the index, and this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to consider a mode in which the rotation is rotated to the planned stopping position based on the reference pattern position of the index detected before the power was cut off after the power is restored and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, thereby shortening the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-spin process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (until the output of four-phase excitation), even if the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position when the power-off process is executed, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the index will not be detected again after power is restored and the re-spin process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference symbol position.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same restart process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, which allows for faster programming without complicating the process.

<Pattern 2-2>
Furthermore, if power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the timing for executing power-off processing again during the re-rotation processing after power is restored is after an index is detected during the re-rotation processing, it is possible to detect the index again after power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into account the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and power restoration, the reel will continue to rotate until the index is detected again, allowing it to rotate more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the time the index is detected during the first re-rotation process and the time the symbol rotates to the planned stop position and the brake is applied (until four-phase excitation is output), then even if the symbol has not yet rotated to the stop acceptance position when the power-off process is executed, or has rotated to the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process will be executed to detect the index again after power is restored, and the symbol will move to the planned stop position and stop there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same restart process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, which allows for faster programming without complicating the process.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slippage control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power-off process is executed during slippage control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the initial power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power supply is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the circumstances under which the power-off process was executed.

<Control of Presentation Mode Using Presentation Switch of Assumed Slot Machine PS1>
An example of a performance using a performance switch (sometimes referred to as a push button performance) will be explained using Figure 12. Figure 12 shows the process of operating the performance switch, starting with the operation of the start switch 12, followed by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c, to produce a performance that causes the performance switch to be operated. Also, the "PUSH" mark in Figure 12 represents the performance switch (however, the "PUSH" mark at the top of the middle and bottom diagrams in Figure 12 is displayed on the LCD).

In the upper left diagram of Figure 12, the LCD screen displays the effect "Win at rock-paper-scissors!!" which is executed when the start switch 12 to start the game is operated (more specifically, when a start switch acceptance command or a reel rotation start command is received from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the top-middle diagram of Figure 12, the LCD screen displays the "Ta-da!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a to stop the left reel (more specifically, the receipt of a left stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the upper right diagram of Figure 12, the LCD screen displays the "Keeeee!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the center stop switch 13b to stop the center reel (more specifically, the receipt of a center stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the diagram at the bottom left of Figure 12, the LCD screen displays the "Pop!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c to stop the right reel (more specifically, the receipt of a right stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 12, an image of a switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the effect switch image, operation prompt image, or operation prompt effect) that imitates the effect switch that is executed when all reels have stopped (more specifically, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control means 100) is displayed on the LCD. Also, the "Pop!" effect that appears when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is displayed dimly (with reduced brightness). At this time, operation of the effect switch is valid, so the effect switch is lit. When displaying an image dimly, in addition to reducing the brightness, it is also possible to reduce the brightness or to overlay a gray translucent display on the image. In any case, displaying an image dimly can be said to reduce visibility.

Next, in the image on the bottom right of Figure 12, an image that reads "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the operation response image or operation response effect) is displayed on the LCD screen when the effect switch is operated (more specifically, when an input signal related to the effect switch is input to the input port). At this time, the operation of the effect switch is invalid, so the effect switch is unlit.

As shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 12, when a special effect switch image is displayed on the LCD screen to encourage the player to operate the special effect switch, the special effect switch image is made larger than the actual size of the switch. By displaying it in this manner, the special effect switch can be effectively displayed on the LCD screen where the player is paying close attention, making it possible to intuitively encourage the player to operate the special effect switch.

The effect switch image also displays an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an illumination mode image) that shows the illumination mode of the effect switch. When the effect switch is active, the effect switch lamp is illuminated (does not blink), and the illumination mode image is displayed as a blinking mode in which the lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a predetermined interval. With this configuration, the effect switch image repeatedly becomes brighter and darker, making the effect switch image stand out and effectively encouraging the user to operate the effect switch.

In addition, when the effect switch is enabled, the effect switch lamp is lit in a flashing pattern that repeatedly turns on and off at a specific cycle, and the lighting mode image may be expressed in a flashing pattern that repeatedly turns on and off at a predetermined cycle. In this case, the lighting mode image can be made to stand out by making the predetermined cycle of the lighting mode image shorter than the specific cycle of the effect switch lamp. Note that in this case, operation (pressing) of the effect switch is enabled even when the effect switch lamp is off, and based on the operation of the effect switch at this timing, the effect is switched, such as switching from a dim "Pop!" display (the state in the lower center diagram of Figure 12) to a "Victory!" display (the state in the lower right diagram of Figure 12).

In addition, even when equipped with an eco mode (when eco mode is set, the brightness of the upper and side effect lamps is lowered or turned off, the brightness of the lower panel is lowered or turned off, and the brightness of the LCD display is lowered or turned off compared to when eco mode is not set), the brightness of the effect switch when it is turned on to execute a push button effect in eco mode is the same as the brightness of the effect switch when it is turned on to execute a push button effect when not in eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively encourage players to operate (press) the effect switch.

Even if the error notification is made by lighting or flashing the upper or side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a predetermined color (highly visible, conspicuous color such as red or blue), it is advisable to make the brightness of the upper or side performance lamps and performance switch lamps the same when in eco mode as when not in eco mode.

In addition, when an image showing the lighting state is displayed as an off state, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered, but the brightness is not lowered until it turns black, giving the appearance of a slightly lit state. On the other hand, when the effect switch lamp is off, it is not lit. By differentiating the expression of the off state of the effect switch lamp and the lighting state image in this way, it is possible to make the lighting state image stand out. Also, because the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch itself, the difference in brightness with the surrounding area is reduced by not lowering the brightness of the lighting state image of the effect switch image until it turns black. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the effect switch image stand out while reducing fatigue during play.

Furthermore, when a special effect switch image is displayed before the immediately preceding image, as shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 12, the brightness of the immediately preceding image is lowered, but the brightness of the immediately preceding image is set lower than the lowest brightness of the lighting state image of the special effect switch image. By configuring it in this way, even when the brightness of the special effect switch image is at its lowest, it is brighter than the surrounding images, making it possible to make the special effect switch image stand out.

The middle and bottom diagrams in Figure 12 will be further explained using Figure 13. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. The change is expressed using the effect switch image to show the transition between the initial position and the pressed position of the effect switch.

The leftmost image in Figure 13 shows the effect switch image in its initial position, the second image from the left shows the effect switch image in its pressed position, the third image from the left shows the effect switch image in its initial position, and the fourth image from the left shows the effect switch image in its pressed position. In this way, by repeatedly showing the effect switch image in its initial position and in its pressed position, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to press the effect switch.

The initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image is configured to be longer than the predetermined cycle representing the lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. This configuration makes it possible to make the effect switch image stand out and to avoid evoking the idea of repeatedly pressing the effect switch. Many gaming machines currently on the market change effects continuously by repeatedly pressing the effect switch, and if the change in the effect switch image changes too quickly, it may be mistaken for a rapid-fire effect, reducing the enjoyment of the game. For this reason, by making the cycle of changing between the initial position and pressed position longer than the lighting mode cycle, it is possible to intuitively convey that the effect switch is being pressed while not being pressed repeatedly.

In addition, when an effect is displayed in which the effect switch is to be pressed repeatedly, by making the cycle in which the effect switch changes between the initial position and the pressed position shorter than the cycle in which the effect switch is lit, it is possible to intuitively convey to the player that the effect switch is to be pressed repeatedly. However, this is not limited to this, and an effect that indicates repeated pressing may also be created by not changing the position of the effect switch image, but by making the cycle in which the light-up state image changes shorter than the cycle when the effect switch is operated once and the effect switch ends.

Alternatively, the effect switch image may not change periodically between the initial position and the pressed position. In this case, the display area of the LCD can be made smaller, and instead text instructing the player to press the effect switch, such as "Press the PUSH button," can be displayed.

When a special effect switch image for operating the special effect switch is displayed on the LCD and the special effect switch is operated, the special effect switch image is erased without any accompanying effects. In other words, when a special effect switch image is displayed and the special effect switch is operated, the special effect switch image is immediately erased and the effect based on the pressing of the special effect switch is immediately executed. In this case, the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the operation of the special effect switch is accepted, or the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period of time after the operation of the special effect switch is accepted.

This configuration makes it possible to pique the player's interest in the outcome of pressing the effect switch, while making it possible to make the information about whether or not the effect switch was pressed less noticeable.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while a special effect switch image for operating a special effect switch is displayed on the LCD screen, the special effect switch image continues to be displayed, and when the special effect switch is operated, the special effect switch image is erased without any effects and the effect based on the pressing of the special effect switch is immediately executed. In this case, as described above, the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the special effect switch operation is accepted, or the special effect switch image may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period after the special effect switch operation is accepted.

In this way, by executing effects based on pressing the effect switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened.

When the front panel PS2 is open, the lighting pattern of the effect switch when a switch image for operating the effect switch is displayed on the LCD screen is configured to be different from the lighting pattern of the effect switch when the front panel PS2 is closed. For example, the effect switch may be lit when the front panel PS2 is closed and flashing or off when the front panel PS2 is open, or the flashing period may be faster in the closed state than in the open state, or the light may be different in color for the open and closed states. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is open, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position overlapping at least a portion of the effect switch image, as shown in FIG. 17 (note that, to improve the visibility of the effect switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position where these images do not overlap each other). Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is open, a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open (for example, "The door is open") may be output, and in this case, the sound effects associated with the display of the effect switch image or the sound effects associated with the effects based on the pressing of the effect switch may not be output. This allows accurate notification that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even when a sound indicating that the front panel PS2 is open is output, the sound effects associated with the display of the effect switch image or the sound effects associated with the effects based on the pressing of the effect switch may be output. This allows accurate notification that the front panel PS2 is open without impeding the progress of the game.

Furthermore, if the front panel PS2 is opened while a special effect switch image for operating the special effect switch is displayed on the LCD, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in place of the special effect switch image, disabling pressing of the special effect switch, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased and the special effect switch image may be displayed again. Furthermore, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed superimposed on the special effect switch image, making the special effect switch image invisible, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased, making the special effect switch image visible again. In this case, too, by changing the lighting state of the special effect switch before and after the front panel PS2 is opened, as described above, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open.

In addition, when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will be awarded to the player when the effect switch is operated (success effect), the effect switch image is erased without any effects, but when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will not be awarded to the player when the effect switch is operated (failure effect), the effect switch image may be erased with effects. Possible effects for a failure effect include an explosion of the effect switch image or maintaining the brightness of the effect switch image at its darkest state (a brightness that does not change periodically).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that a failure effect was displayed as a result of operating the effect switch, fostering a sense of satisfaction in the player and preventing a decline in interest in subsequent games.

In addition, if a special effect switch image is displayed when all reels have stopped, when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated, an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 will be displayed instead of the image that would be displayed when the special effect switch was operated. Furthermore, when an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 is displayed, the special effect switch image is erased. In this case, the special effect switch image is erased without any effects.

This configuration makes it possible to execute appropriate effects in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effects executed based on the operation of the start switch 12. Players who skip effect switch images by operating the start switch 12 are likely aware in advance of a low level of expectation, or are not interested in the effects that use effect switches, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by erasing the images without any effects.

In addition, when a switch image for effects is displayed and a switch image for effects is operated to display a success effect, the time from when the switch image for effects is operated to when the switch image for effects is erased is longer than the time from when the stop switch 13 is operated to when the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct button press sequence is operated to display a success effect when a button press sequence navigation image is displayed and the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct button press sequence is operated to when the switch image for effects is erased.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the time until a reaction effect is executed when various switches are operated, and different levels of excitement can be provided by varying the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. For example, a push order navigation image in which a player loses their profit directly if they press the buttons in the wrong order can be more interesting for the player if the next information is displayed immediately, and by allowing a short delay between the operation of the effect switch and the effect, players can anticipate whether a success effect or a failure effect will be displayed.

If the effect switch also serves as a switch for displaying the menu screen, the effect switch lamp is configured to light up after a certain period of time (e.g., T1) has passed after all reels have stopped. The lighting state of the effect switch lamp at this time differs from the lighting state of the effect switch lamp when an effect is executed by operating the effect switch after all reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting state of the effect switch lamp can indicate whether a menu screen will be displayed or whether a success or failure effect will be displayed when the effect switch is operated.

Furthermore, when a performance switch image is displayed as shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 12 after all the reels have stopped, even after T1 has passed, which is the time when the menu screen can be displayed after all the reels have stopped, the lighting mode of the performance switch lamp does not change to the lighting mode when the menu screen is displayed, but rather to the lighting mode corresponding to the performance switch image. Then, when operation of the performance switch is accepted after T1 has passed since all the reels have stopped, the performance switch image is erased, a success or failure performance is executed, and the performance switch lamp remains off. Then, even when T1 has passed since operation of the performance switch was accepted, the performance switch lamp remains off, and the menu screen is not displayed even when the performance switch is operated. Furthermore, even after T2 has passed since all the reels have stopped, which is the time when the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen is not displayed, the volume is reduced, and the performance switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch, or whether the game continues until the end of the next game (the end of a game in which the effect switch image is not displayed), the menu screen can be displayed after T1 has elapsed since all the reels have stopped, and the demo screen can be displayed after T2 has elapsed since all the reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, when a game in which a special effect switch image is displayed, the player does not need to worry about whether the menu screen or a success or failure effect will be displayed by operating the special effect switch, preventing a decline in interest in the game. It is also possible to configure the system so that the menu screen cannot be displayed even when the settlement process is executed. In this case, it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation until a so-called revival effect is executed, in which a failure effect is displayed in the game but a success effect is displayed in the next game.

Furthermore, when the effect switch lamp is lit in a manner that allows the menu screen to be displayed, the effect switch image is not displayed on the LCD. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can only be confirmed by the lighting state of the effect switch lamp.

By configuring it in this way, the notification of the menu screen display status, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, can be executed only by the lighting state of the effect switch lamp. Therefore, compared to if the effect switch image were displayed on the LCD, it is possible to reduce the possibility of creating anticipation for operating the effect switch. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the menu screen being displayed even though the player operated the effect switch with anticipation.

In addition, on demo screens that allow players to easily recognize that no game is in progress, the effect switch images may be displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch images displayed in push button effects. In this case, the player is less likely to confuse them with push button effects, and it is possible to effectively display the menu screen to the player. This is based on the fact that the menu screen is most often displayed when starting play, and at this time, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed since no game is being played.

The display position of the effect switch image is such that during a push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, and during a demo screen, it is displayed at the edge of the LCD screen (for example, as shown in Figure 18, in a less noticeable position such as the bottom of the LCD screen or the bottom left of the LCD screen). Also, as mentioned above, the effect switch image during the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the effect switch image during a push button effect. In other words, the effect switch image during the demo screen and the effect switch image during a push button effect differ in at least one of their display area and size. Furthermore, it is preferable to display the effect switch image during a push button effect and the effect switch image during the demo screen in different ways (for example, the effect switch image during a push effect is displayed in a flashing mode, repeatedly turning on and off at a predetermined interval, while the effect switch image during the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode). This allows the player to intuitively distinguish between situations in which the effect switch is desired to be pressed as part of an effect and situations in which it is okay to press the effect switch.

In addition, the effect switch image in the demo screen may be configured to display a caption such as "Press PUSH to display menu," as shown in Figure 19.

The push button effect is executed after all the reels have stopped, but it can also be executed after the start switch 12 is accepted. If the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or the effect switch image may remain displayed even after all the reels have stopped. If the effect switch image remains displayed after all the reels have stopped, the validity period for the effect switch operation is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, a success or failure effect is executed. Note that the effect switch image will be erased even if the effect switch has not been operated because the time required to transition to the demo screen has passed, the settlement process has been executed, the bet process has been executed, or the next game has started.

In addition, whether or not an operation-responsive effect is executed when the effect switch is operated is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on the receipt of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, decrementing the counter value at predetermined intervals using timer interrupt processing, etc., and enabling operation of the effect switch when the counter value reaches 0 (an operation-responsive effect is executed when the effect switch is operated). At this time, the effect switch image is also drawn after a period equivalent to the predetermined timer value has elapsed since the receipt of the predetermined command, but due to delays in communication between the image control board that executes the drawing process and the effect control board, the effect switch may be enabled before the effect switch image is displayed. In this way, the system is configured so that a response effect can be executed even if the effect switch is operated before the effect switch image is displayed.

<<Precautions applicable to display devices>>
Next, we will explain the prerequisite gaming machine applicable to the prerequisite gaming machine. The prerequisite slot machine PS1 (the prerequisite pachinko gaming machine P's prerequisite gaming machine P's performance display device P80) can display a first performance type (e.g., step-up performance type) capable of displaying multiple display modes in stages, and a second performance type (e.g., dialogue performance type) that can suggest the possibility of an advantageous state by displaying a second display mode (e.g., red dialogue) different from the first display mode (e.g., white dialogue) at a predetermined timing (e.g., at the start of the performance, one second after the start of the performance, etc.). In a first performance state (also referred to as a normal performance state) in which the probability of a bonus or automatic time (AT) is low, at least the first and second performance types can be executed. However, in a second performance state (e.g., continuous performance or premonition performance) in which the probability of a bonus or automatic time (AT) is high, the first performance type is not executed, and the second performance type can be executed. The configurations described below can be combined as appropriate as long as there are no inhibiting factors.

[First performance type]
The first type of presentation includes a notice that is displayed multiple times in stages. For example, it includes so-called step-up notices. Specific suggestion patterns include a notice that can suggest a predetermined expectation level (e.g., expectation level of a small win, a premonition entry, an AT entry, a bonus win, etc.) in the order of Step 1 (white) < Step 2 (blue) < Step 3 (yellow) < Step 4 (green) < Step 5 (red). This includes notices that can be displayed multiple times in one game, such as Step 1 (white) → Step 2 (blue) → Step 3 (yellow). It also includes cases where a notice pattern is displayed in stages in multiple games, such as Step 1 (white) → Step 2 (blue) → Step 3 (yellow). In other words, because the notice of the first type of presentation is displayed in stages, it takes a relatively long time for the player to recognize the final display pattern.

[Second performance type]
The second presentation type includes a presentation in which, in one game, the display begins in a post-change mode (second display mode) different from the normal mode (first display mode) from the start of the preview display, or a presentation that can change from the first display mode to the second display mode only once in one game. It also includes a presentation in which a movable part moves or a preview image is displayed by operating a sub-input button (so-called button preview). That is, it includes so-called dialogue previews, so-called title previews, so-called button previews, and the display of character names and technique names in battle presentations. Specific suggestion modes include white < green < red, which can suggest a predetermined expectation level (e.g., the expectation level of a small win, a premonition entry, an AT entry, a bonus win, etc.). More specifically, dialogue is displayed in green or red at the start of the preview (they are displayed in green or red from the beginning in the game and do not change), and character names and technique names in battle presentations change from white to red (they change from white to red in the game). In other words, the time required for the player to recognize the final display mode in the second presentation type, in which there is no change in color or only a change in the color of the text, is shorter than in the first presentation type, in which the preview pattern changes in stages.

[First rendering state]
The first effect state is an effect state in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is low, and is an effect state (normal effect state) in which the effect has not developed into a so-called continuous effect or a so-called precursor effect.

[Second performance state]
The second effect state is an effect state in which the possibility of winning a bonus or AT is higher than in the first effect state, and includes so-called continuous effects and premonitions.

The first presentation state is a state in which winning a bonus or AT is unlikely, and the player is mainly hoping for a transition to a series of presentations or premonitions. In other words, if the preview displayed on the display device 32 is bland, the player will become bored and will not continue playing. For this reason, in the first presentation state, multiple stages of display are required to transition to a series of presentations or premonitions. In other words, even if the first presentation type, which takes a long time to preview, is executed, the player will not find it particularly annoying.

On the other hand, in the second presentation state, the main purpose of the game is to show on the display device 32 consecutive presentations and signs that suggest a higher probability of winning a bonus or AT than in the first presentation state, and it is therefore best to avoid relatively time-consuming announcements that interrupt the display of consecutive presentations or signs. Furthermore, when an announcement is made in the second presentation state where a bonus or AT win is likely to occur, the player will strongly desire to be notified that they have won the bonus or AT. In other words, as an announcement that can be made in the second presentation state, the first presentation type, which takes a relatively long time for the player to grasp the content of the announcement (expectation level, etc.), is not appropriate, and the second presentation type, which takes a relatively short time for the player to grasp the content of the announcement (expectation level, etc.), is more appropriate.

(Step-up notice in the first performance state)
Next, we will explain the step-up notice, which is a notice of the first effect type that can be executed in the first effect state, using Figure 14. Note that t1 to t7 will be explained below along the time course, but it should be noted that these are t1 to t7 in Figure 14 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever 12 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "start lever") is operated. Next, at t2, Step Up 1 (character A) begins to be displayed. At this point, the player can tell that the Step Up notice has begun to be displayed. However, they cannot know whether a chance will increase after this, that is, whether Step Up 2 or later will be displayed.

Next, at t3, Step Up 2 (character B) begins to be displayed. At this point, the player can see that the Step Up notice has increased the chances. However, they cannot yet know to what stage the chances will ultimately increase.

Next, at t4, Step Up 3 (character C) begins to be displayed. Even here, it is still not clear to what stage the chances will ultimately be raised.

Next, at t5, the step-up announcement ends with step-up 3. At this point, the player can understand the final display format of the step-up announcement.

Then, the first stop button is operated at t6, the second stop button is operated at t7, the third stop button is operated at t8, and the game ends at t9.

In this way, with the step-up preview, which is the first presentation type in the first presentation state, it takes a period from t2 to t5 to grasp the final display mode of the step-up preview. Furthermore, the period during which the display mode is in the chance-up mode ends before the first stop button is operated.

The period from the start of play when the lever is pressed until the start of the step-up notice (period T1 from t1 to t2 in Figure 14, approximately 1 second) may be longer than the period required for the step-up notice to increase the chance by one step (period T2 from t2 to t3 in Figure 14, approximately 0.5 seconds), and the period from the start of play when the lever is pressed until the step-up notice starts (period T1, approximately 1 second) may be shorter than the period required for the step-up notice to increase the chance by one step (period T2, approximately 1.2 seconds). Figure 14 schematically shows the latter example.

(Dialogue preview in the first performance state)
Next, we will explain the dialogue preview, which is a preview of the second type of presentation that can be executed in the first presentation state, using Figure 15. Note that t1 to t8 will be explained below along the time course, but it should be noted that these are t1 to t8 in Figure 15 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever is operated. Next, at t2, the line preview begins with the green text "It's your chance." From this point on, the player can understand that the line preview is a chance up display mode and the final display mode of the line preview. Since it takes some time to actually understand that it is a chance up display mode, the period T2 from t2 to t3 in Figure 15 can be said to be the period required to understand the final display mode of the line preview.

Then, the first stop button is operated at t4, the second stop button is operated at t5, the third stop button is operated at t6, and the game ends at t7.

Next, when a bet operation for the next game is performed at t8, the dialogue preview display ends.

As such, for the dialogue preview, which is the second effect type in the first effect state, it takes a period T2 from t2 to t3 in Figure 15 to grasp the final display mode of the dialogue preview. Furthermore, once the third stop button is operated to end play, there is no longer any meaning in suggesting an increased chance for that game, but the display is configured to continue showing the increased chance mode until a bet operation is performed for the next game. This allows the increased chance mode for the previous game to be ended during the bet process, which initializes the effects of the previous game, and eliminates the need to erase the increased chance mode during the game end process after the third stop, thereby reducing the burden on control processing.

In addition, the line preview may start with the white text "It's your chance" (first display mode) at t2, and then change to the red text "It's your chance" (second display mode) at any time between t3 and just before t8 (the first display mode may change to the second display mode during the game). In this case, the period from lever-on to the start of the line preview (period T3 from t1 to t2 in Figure 15) is shorter than the period required for the line preview to change from the first display mode to the second display mode (period TA from t3 to just before any of t4 through t8 in Figure 15).

(Line preview in a second performance state)
Next, a dialogue preview, which is a preview of a second type of performance that can be executed in a certain continuous performance (a certain second performance state), will be explained using Figure 16. Note that t1 to t14 will be explained below along the time course, but it should be noted that these are t1 to t14 in Figure 16 and are independent of the same symbols in other drawings.

First, at t1, the start lever is operated, starting the first game of the continuous performance. Next, at t2, the line preview begins with the green word "Hot." From this point on, the player can understand that the line preview is a chance up display mode and the final display mode of the line preview. Since it takes some time to actually understand that it is a chance up display mode, in the line preview for the second performance state, the period T2 from t2 to t3 in Figure 16 can be said to be the period required to understand the final display mode.

Then, the first stop button is operated at t4, the second stop button at t5, and the third stop button at t6, and the game ends at t7 (i.e., the payout process is completed and the next game can begin).

Next, at t8, when a bet operation is performed on the next game (the second game in the series), the dialogue preview display ends.

As such, for the dialogue preview, which is the second effect type in the second effect state, it takes a period from t2 to t3 to determine the final display mode of the dialogue preview. Furthermore, once the third stop button is operated to end play, there is no longer any meaning in suggesting an increased chance for that game, but the display of the increased chance mode is configured to continue until a bet operation is performed for the next game. This allows the increased chance mode for the previous game to be ended during the bet process, which initializes the effects of the previous game, and eliminates the need to erase the increased chance mode during the game end process after the third stop, thereby reducing the burden on control processing.

In the second game of a continuous performance, no dialogue preview is displayed after operating the start lever.

Next, the first stop button is operated at t9, the second stop button is operated at t10, and the third stop button is operated at t11, and at t12 the dialogue preview begins with the word "Hot" in green.

Next, at t13, the game ends. Next, at t14, when a bet operation for the next game is performed, the dialogue preview display ends.

In this way, the timing of displaying the second effect type is set to be different between the first and second games of the consecutive effects, but it may also be set to be displayed at the same timing.

Next, we will list configurations that can be applied to the gaming machine. Each of the configurations listed below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the configurations listed below. It should also be noted that the configurations listed below can be combined as appropriate, as long as there is no contradiction in combining them. (Configuration 1)
In a first performance state, both the first performance type and the second performance type can be executed, and in a second performance state, the first performance type is not executed and the second performance type can be executed.

By configuring it in this way, during consecutive performances, only notifications that allow players to instantly determine whether their chances are increasing are generated, allowing appropriate notifications to be issued that are suited to the performance situation, allowing players to concentrate on the consecutive performances.

Furthermore, there may be multiple types of announcements that can be executed in a certain second presentation state, or there may be only one type.

For example, in a certain sequence, a title preview and a dialogue preview may be executed.

Even if multiple types of second effects are executed, the player can quickly understand the content of each preview, so it does not feel bothersome. For example, a character name may be displayed (with color indicating the level of expectation) at the start of a certain series of effects (battle effects), and a dialogue preview may be executed in the middle of a certain series of effects.

Furthermore, by making it possible for only specific notifications (for example, one type of notification) to occur in a certain series of effects, the series of effects and the notifications that will occur become clear, and even if a player focuses on both the series of effects and the notifications, they can easily grasp the indications of a bonus or AT win.

(Configuration 1-1)
Furthermore, there are multiple types of second notices that can be executed in a certain second performance state,
It is configured so that multiple types of second notices can be executed in one second performance state,
Only one type of second notice can be executed in one game.

Specifically, it is configured so that multiple types of second previews (e.g., dialogue preview, title preview) can be executed in one continuous performance, and furthermore, it is configured so that one type of second preview can be executed in one play (e.g., title preview in the first play, dialogue preview in the second play).

In this way, during a certain continuous presentation (a certain second presentation state), only one type of preview is executed per play, which prevents the preview display from becoming complicated and making it difficult to grasp the expected value.

(Configuration 1-2)
Furthermore, if there are multiple types of notifications that can be executed in a certain second presentation state, the system may be configured to include notifications that do not require the player to operate a sub-button and button notifications that require the player to operate a button. Note that the second presentation state is a state in which a bonus or AT win is closer (a state in which it is more likely) than the first presentation state, so the player is more likely to operate the sub-button. Therefore, in the second presentation state, the rate at which button notifications that require the player to operate a sub-button occur can be made higher than that of notifications that do not require the player to operate a sub-button.

(Configuration 1-3)
The configuration may be such that the first type of performance is not executed in all second performance states, and only the second type of performance is executed.

By configuring it in this way, only the second performance, whose preview content can be grasped in a short time, is executed in all second performance states, so overall the previews executed in the second performance states do not feel annoying.

When a line preview is provided as the second presentation type described above, the line preview can be configured as follows when the second presentation state is a continuous battle presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character face off. 1. Only the lines of the ally character can be in the second display mode. In this case, it is easy to understand that the chances have increased because it is only necessary to pay attention to the lines of the ally character. 2. Only the lines of the enemy character can be in the second display mode. In this case, it is easy to understand that the chances have increased because it is only necessary to pay attention to the lines of the enemy character. 3. The lines of both the ally character and the enemy character can be in the second display mode. In this case, there are more opportunities for the chances to be displayed, which can create a greater sense of anticipation in the player.

(Configuration 2)
The number of characters used in one preview of the first performance type that can be executed in the first performance state and one preview of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state are configured to be different.

For example, if one preview of the first performance type in the first performance state is a step-up preview, and one preview of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state is a dialogue preview, the number of characters used for each is configured to be different.

In the step-up preview, which is preview No. 1 of the first performance type in the first performance state shown in Figure 14, five types of characters are used: Character A (Step 1), Character B (Step 2), Character C (Step 3), Character D (Step 4), and Character (Step 5).

In the dialogue preview, which is one preview of the second performance type in a certain second performance state (e.g., continuous battle performance) shown in Figure 15, three types of characters, Character A, Character B, and Character F, can be used.

In this way, by increasing the number of characters in the first preview of the first effect in the first presentation state, there is more preview variation to prevent players from getting bored, and by limiting the number of characters in the first preview of the second effect in a certain second presentation state to characters related to a certain second presentation state (e.g., a continuous battle presentation currently being executed), it is easier for players to understand the flow of the second presentation state.

In addition, because the first presentation state is the state in which players spend most of their time playing, the frequency of step-up announcements, which are announcements of the first presentation in the first presentation state, is higher than that of dialogue announcements, which are announcements of the second presentation in a certain second presentation state. Therefore, the more frequently an announcement occurs, the more characters are used, providing a greater variety of announcements.

The number of characters is
A step-up notice, which is a notice of one of the first effects in the first effect state, may be less than a line notice, which is a notice of one of the second effects in a second effect state.
A step-up preview, which is a preview of the first performance in the first performance state, may be equal to a dialogue preview, which is a preview of the second performance in a second performance state.

(Configuration 3)
The number of characters used in one preview of the second performance type that can be executed in the first performance state is configured to be different from the number of characters used in one preview of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state.

For example, if the first preview of the second performance type in the first performance state is a dialogue preview, and the first preview of the second performance type that can be executed in the second performance state is also a dialogue preview, the number of characters used for each is configured to be different.

In the dialogue preview, which is the first preview of the second presentation type in the first presentation state shown in Figure 15, five types of characters are used: Character A, Character B, Character C, Character D, and Character E.

In a certain second performance state (e.g., continuous battle performance), three types of characters, Character A, Character B, and Character F, are used in the dialogue preview, which is the first preview of the second performance type.

In this way, by increasing the number of characters in the first preview of the second presentation in the first presentation state, there is more variation in the preview to prevent players from getting bored, and by limiting the preview of the second presentation in a certain second presentation state to characters related to that certain second presentation state (e.g., a continuous battle presentation currently being executed), it is easier for players to understand the flow of the second presentation state.

Furthermore, because the first presentation state is the state in which players spend most of their time playing, the frequency of line previews, which are previews of the first second presentation in the first presentation state, is higher than that of line previews, which are previews of the first second presentation in a certain second presentation state. Therefore, the more frequently previews occur, the more characters are used, providing a greater variety of previews.

The number of characters is
A line preview that is a preview of one of the first effects in a first effect state may be less than a line preview that is a preview of one of the second effects in a second effect state, or
A line preview that is a preview of one of the first effects in a first effect state may be equal to a line preview that is a preview of one of the second effects in a second effect state.

In addition, the number of characters used in the step-up preview, which is the first preview of the first performance in the first performance state, the dialogue preview, which is the first preview of the first performance in the first performance state, and the dialogue preview, which is the first preview of the second performance in a certain second performance state may have the following correspondence relationship.
1. Step-up preview, which is a preview of the first performance in the first performance state > dialogue preview, which is a preview of the first performance in the first performance state > dialogue preview, which is a preview of the first performance in a certain second performance state 2. Dialogue preview, which is a preview of the first performance in the first performance state > Step-up preview, which is a preview of the first performance in the first performance state > dialogue preview, which is a preview of the first performance in a certain second performance state

In either of the above cases, the version with the higher frequency of previews will have a larger number of characters.

(Configuration 4)
The same character is used for the character used to preview one of the first performance types that can be executed in a first performance state and for the character used to preview one of the second performance types that can be executed in a second performance state.

The character used in both the dialogue preview, which is the first preview of the first performance in the first performance state, and the dialogue preview, which is the first preview of the second performance in a second performance state, is the main character.

In this way, developers design the game to display many main characters to make the story easier to understand, and players can more easily understand the main characters and their relationships based on how frequently the characters appear.

For this reason, main characters are characters that are displayed for long periods of time (for example, continuous effects are more likely to continue), are displayed frequently, and are highly anticipated.

However, since high display frequency and high expectations are contradictory, it is appropriate to configure the step-up previews and dialogue previews in the first presentation state, which have a high preview frequency, to set the frequency of the main characters to Step 1, etc., so that they appear more frequently, and to configure the second presentation state to use them as characters with high expectations.

Other characters may be main characters but rare characters with short display times, low display frequency, and high expectations. For example, displaying such characters in the dialogue previews for the first presentation state or the second presentation state suggests a high expectation of winning a bonus or AT.

This configuration increases the opportunities for the main characters to be displayed, and also makes it easier for players to understand the expected outcome for each character.

Note that the character used to preview one of the first presentation types that can be executed in a first presentation state and the character used to preview one of the second presentation types that can be executed in a second presentation state do not have to be a main character. For example, it may be a rare character (high expectation) that is not a main character.

(Configuration 5)
The voice of the character is output in one preview (e.g., step-up preview) of the first performance types that can be executed in the first performance state,
The system is configured so that the character's voice can also be output in a preview (e.g., a dialogue preview) of one of the second presentation types that can be executed in the first presentation state.

(Configuration 5-1)
On the other hand,
In one of the previews (e.g., dialogue preview) of the second performance types that can be executed in the second performance state, the character's voice is not output.

By configuring it in this way, in the first presentation state, the character's voice is output, making it easier to focus attention on the character's lines, while in the second presentation state, background music for consecutive presentations, etc. is output, creating a sense of anticipation that a consecutive presentation is in progress, so it is possible to avoid drawing too much attention to the character's voice.

(Configuration 5 modified example)
The system is configured so that the voice of the character cannot be output in one preview (e.g., step-up preview) of the first performance types that can be executed in the first performance state,
The system is configured so that the character's voice cannot be output even in a preview (e.g., a dialogue preview) of one of the second performance types that can be executed in the first performance state.

In this way, by configuring the first presentation state so that the character's voice is not output, for example, if a step-up preview or dialogue preview is configured to be executed in overlap with other previews, the step-up preview or dialogue preview will not drown out the voice (sound effects) from the other previews.

(Configuration 6)
A preview of one of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state is configured not to overlap with the volume adjustment display,
In a certain second presentation state, the volume can be adjusted under any circumstances, whether the game is stopped or in progress, and even when the volume adjustment display is displayed, the brightness of the presentation display showing the certain second presentation state does not decrease.

Specifically, if the device is configured so that the player can adjust the volume or light intensity by operating the sub-buttons, directional buttons, etc., when the volume or light intensity is adjusted, a volume adjustment display showing the currently set volume level or a light adjustment display showing the currently set light level will be displayed on the display device 32.

In other words, the volume can be adjusted even in the second presentation state, and when a dialogue preview, which is the second presentation type, is displayed in a certain second presentation state (certain continuous presentation), it is displayed so as not to overlap with the volume adjustment display.

This allows players to clearly see both the dialogue preview and the volume adjustment display.

Furthermore, in a certain second presentation state (certain continuous presentation), volume adjustment is possible both when gameplay is stopped (reels are stopped) and during gameplay (reels are spinning). However, even when the volume adjustment display is displayed, the brightness of the presentation display (background image) in the certain second presentation state (certain continuous presentation) does not decrease, so the image (movie) of the certain continuous presentation remains easy to see.

(Configuration 6 Modification 1)
A preview of one of the second effect types that can be executed in a certain second effect state is configured to overlap with the volume adjustment display,
In a certain second presentation state, the volume can be adjusted both when the game is stopped and when the game is in progress, and even when the volume adjustment display is displayed, the brightness of the display screen in the certain second presentation state does not decrease.

In other words, the volume can be adjusted even in the second presentation state, and when a dialogue preview, which is the second presentation type, is displayed in a certain second presentation state (certain continuous presentation), it is displayed so as to overlap with the volume adjustment display.

However, in a certain second presentation state (certain continuous presentation), volume adjustment is possible both when gameplay is stopped (reels are stopped) and during gameplay (reels are spinning). Even when the volume adjustment display is displayed, the brightness of the display screen (background image) in the certain second presentation state (certain continuous presentation) does not decrease, so the image (movie) of the certain continuous presentation remains easy to see.

In addition, whether the dialogue preview is displayed when the volume adjustment display is displayed, or the dialogue preview is displayed when the volume adjustment display is displayed, the volume adjustment display will be displayed in front of the dialogue preview.

(Configuration 6-1)
Volume or light adjustment is possible both while the game is stopped and while the game is in progress.
The display position of the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display does not change whether the volume adjustment or light intensity adjustment operation is performed while the game is stopped or during the game.

In normal game mode, volume or light intensity adjustment is possible whether gameplay is stopped or ongoing, and the display position of the volume or light intensity adjustment display on the display device 32 may be configured not to change.

In addition, during bonuses and ATs, volume or light intensity adjustments may be possible both when play is stopped and during play, just as in normal gameplay, and the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display may remain unchanged.

Furthermore, the volume adjustment display or light intensity adjustment display may be different during normal gaming and during bonus or AT.

(Configuration 7)
A third effect (effect by operating the sub-input button) can be achieved by operating the operating member by the player.
In the third performance that can be executed in the first performance state (for example, the normal performance state), when the operating member is operated, the performance is executed in a predetermined execution mode among a plurality of execution modes that indicate a predetermined expectation level (for example, a small winning expectation level, a premonition entry expectation level), at a high rate.
In the third presentation that can be executed in the second presentation state (for example, continuous presentation), when the operating member is operated, there is a high probability that a notification will be given as to whether or not a special game (for example, bonus, AT) will occur.

In other words, in button effects during normal effects, patterns indicating the expected probability of entering a winning combination or premonition in that game are more likely to be executed, and patterns indicating a win in a bonus or AT are less likely to be executed. On the other hand, in button effects during continuous effects, patterns indicating a win in a bonus or AT are more likely to be executed, and patterns indicating a win in a winning combination or premonition in that game are less likely to be executed.

In this way, the proportion of content suggested by the button effects can be configured to differ depending on the game situation (whether it is the first or second presentation state). This allows the content suggested by the button effects to be tailored to the game situation.

(Configuration 7 modified example)
A third effect (effect by operating the sub-input button) can be achieved by operating the operating member by the player.
In the third presentation that can be executed in the second presentation state (for example, continuous presentation), when the operating member is operated, the rate at which a notification is given as to whether or not a special game (for example, bonus, AT) will occur is higher than the rate at which a presentation is executed in a predetermined execution mode out of multiple execution modes that indicate a predetermined expectation level (for example, small win expectation level, premonition entry expectation level).

In other words, when a button is pressed during a continuous effect, the probability of announcing whether or not a special game (e.g., bonus, AT) will occur is high, and the probability of an effect being performed in a predetermined execution mode out of multiple execution modes indicating a predetermined expectation level (e.g., small win expectation level, premonition entry expectation level) may be low.

This allows the button effects to be tailored to suit the game situation.

(Configuration 8)
The game machine has at least a first gaming state (unfavorable state) and a second gaming state (favorable state),
The second game state is configured so that the second presentation state cannot occur.

Specifically, during the AT (second gaming state), a notification is made that a special game (bonus) will occur instead of a continuous performance (second performance state). Note that the first gaming state is a non-advantageous state and may be a normal gaming state or a non-advantageous section, while the second gaming state is an advantageous state and may be an AT state or an advantageous section.

Since it is desirable to win as many balls as possible in the shortest possible time during the advantageous state (AT), by configuring the advantageous state (AT) without continuous effects, it is possible to immediately execute the bonus.

(Configuration 9)
a second display device (e.g., a second liquid crystal display device) different from the first display device (e.g., a first liquid crystal display device);
A volume adjustment display is displayed on the second display device,
In the second performance state (continuous performance) and while the reels are stopped, the volume can be adjusted,
The system is configured such that the volume cannot be adjusted while the second performance state (continuous performance) is in progress and the reels are rotating.

In other words, by providing a display device separate from the display device 32 on which the majority of the effects are displayed, and displaying the volume adjustment display on the second display device, the volume adjustment display does not overlap with the effects displayed on the display device 32, and the volume adjustment display does not reduce the visibility of the effects displayed on the display device 32.

The second display device (a display device separate from display device 32) may be a liquid crystal display device equipped with a touch panel, and volume may be adjusted by operating the touch panel. Furthermore, not only volume adjustment but also light intensity adjustment may be possible.

(Configuration 10)
The system includes a first performance state (a state in which no continuous performances or the like occur on a normal stage), a second performance state (for example, continuous performances), and a third performance state (for example, a premonition),
It is configured to become a third performance state that can be executed over multiple variations after the first performance state, and then become a second performance state,
In the first performance state, a first performance type and a second performance type can be executed,
In the second performance state, only the second performance type can be executed,
moreover,
In the third performance state, both the first performance type and the second performance type can be executed.

In other words, the first effect type (e.g., step-up preview) and second effect type (e.g., dialogue preview) can be executed not only in the first effect state but also in the third effect state (e.g., premonition state).

Note that the presentation content of the first and second presentation types that can be executed in the first presentation state may be different from the presentation content of the first and second presentation types that can be executed in the third presentation state.

Since premonitions are often not yet effects that notify whether or not a transition to an advantageous state (bonus or AT) is possible, by making it possible to execute both the first and second effect types, as in the normal state, it is possible to increase the variety of effects and not lose the sense of anticipation during the premonitions.

(Configuration 11)
When the second type of effect is executed in the first type of effect, the difference between the rate at which the third type of effect occurs within a predetermined period when the second display mode is not displayed and the rate at which the third type of effect occurs within a predetermined period when the second display mode is displayed, and
When the second effect type is executed in the second effect state, the difference between the rate at which an advantageous state is achieved within a specific period when the second display mode is not displayed and the rate at which an advantageous state is achieved within a specific period when the second display mode is displayed is:
When the second performance type is executed in the second performance state, the difference between the rate at which an advantageous state is achieved within the specific period when the second display mode is not displayed and the rate at which an advantageous state is achieved within the specific period when the second display mode is displayed is configured to be larger.

In other words,
When a line preview (second performance type) is executed during normal performance (first performance state), the difference between the rate at which a premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) without a chance increase (when the second display mode is not displayed) and the rate at which a premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) with a chance increase (when the second display mode is displayed) is:
When a line preview (second performance type) is executed during a continuous performance (second performance state), the probability is configured to be smaller than the difference between the probability of getting a bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) without a chance up (when the second display mode is not displayed) and the probability of getting a bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) with a chance up (when the second display mode is displayed).

(Configuration 11-1)
moreover,
When the first effect type is executed in the first effect state, the difference between the rate at which the third effect state occurs within a predetermined period when the second display mode is not displayed and the rate at which the third effect state occurs within a predetermined period when the second display mode is displayed is:
When the second type of performance is executed in the first performance state, the difference is configured to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which the third performance state occurs within a predetermined period when the second display mode is not displayed and the rate at which the third performance state occurs within a predetermined period when the second display mode is displayed.

In other words,
When a step-up notice (first performance type) is executed during normal performance (first performance state), the difference between the rate at which a premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) without a one-step chance increase (when the second display mode is not displayed) and the rate at which a premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) after a one-step chance increase (when the second display mode is displayed) is:
When the line announcement (second performance type) is executed during normal performance (first performance state), the rate at which the premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) without a chance increase (when the second display mode is not displayed) is smaller than the difference between the rate at which the premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) with a chance increase (when the second display mode is displayed),
When a line preview (second performance type) is executed during normal performance (first performance state), the difference between the rate at which a premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) without a chance increase (when the second display mode is not displayed) and the rate at which a premonition (third performance state) occurs within 32G (within a predetermined period) with a chance increase (when the second display mode is displayed) is:
When a line preview (second performance type) is executed during a continuous performance (second performance state), the probability is configured to be smaller than the difference between the probability of getting a bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) without a chance up (when the second display mode is not displayed) and the probability of getting a bonus, AT, etc. (advantageous state) within 4G (within a specific period) with a chance up (when the second display mode is displayed).

To be more specific, if the expectation level for the step-up announcement is 1 level < 2 levels < 3 levels < 4 levels < 5 levels, and the expectation level for the dialogue announcement is white < green < red < rainbow, <During normal presentation> Step-up announcement, 1 level, probability of becoming a premonition announcement within 32G: 1% Step-up announcement, 2 levels, probability of becoming a premonition announcement within 32G: 2% ⇒ difference: 1% Dialogue announcement, white, probability of becoming a premonition announcement within 32G: 1% Dialogue announcement, green, probability of becoming a premonition announcement within 32G: 5% ⇒ difference: 4% <During continuous presentation> Dialogue announcement, white, probability of becoming a bonus within 4G: 5% Dialogue announcement, green, probability of becoming a bonus within 4G: 10% ⇒ difference: 5%.

In this way, even if the display mode of the effect increases the chances by only one level, by configuring the rate of increase in expectation to differ depending on the effect state, players can enjoy the sense of anticipation of increasing their chances by one level even more.

(Configuration 11 modified example)
If the expectation level of the step-up notice is 1st stage < 2nd stage < 3rd stage < 4th stage < 5th stage, and the expectation level of the dialogue notice is white < green < red < rainbow, and the difference between the second lowest expectation level and the third lowest expectation level is shown as follows: <During normal performance> Step-up notice, 1st stage, probability of becoming a premonition within 32G: 1% Step-up notice, 2nd stage, probability of becoming a premonition within 32G: 2% Step-up notice, 3rd stage, probability of becoming a premonition within 32G: 10% ⇒ S It can also be configured as follows: Difference between U2 and SU3: 8% Dialogue preview, white, probability of becoming a premonition effect within 32G: 1% Dialogue preview, green, probability of becoming a premonition effect within 32G: 5% Dialogue preview, red, probability of becoming a premonition effect within 32G: 15% ⇒ Difference between green and red: 10% <During continuous effects> Dialogue preview, white, probability of becoming a bonus within 4G: 5% Dialogue preview, green, probability of becoming a bonus within 4G: 10% Dialogue preview, red, probability of becoming a bonus within 4G: 22% ⇒ Difference between green and red: 12%.

(Configuration 12)
When one of the second performance types is announced in the second performance state (continuous performance),
Once a certain notice has been displayed in the second display mode, the notice is configured not to subsequently be displayed in the first display mode.

In other words, if a dialogue preview is displayed in red text during a continuous performance, the dialogue preview will remain in red text during that continuous performance, without becoming white text.

For example, if red text is displayed during the first play of a consecutive performance, but white text is displayed during the second play of the consecutive performance, the player may not know whether their expectation is high or low. Therefore, by uniformly indicating the expectation level of the dialogue previews during the first consecutive performance, it is possible to prevent players from becoming confused about the expectation level.

(Configuration 12 modified example)
When one of the second performance types is announced in the second performance state (continuous performance),
Even if a certain notice is in the second display mode, the notice is configured so that it can subsequently be in the first display mode.

In other words, even if the dialogue preview is displayed in red text during a continuous performance, it may be displayed in white text during that continuous performance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create interest in whether or not the second display mode (e.g., Chance Up: red text) is displayed for each game.

Furthermore, if the continuous effects are configured so that the second display mode (e.g., Chance Up: red text) is only displayed at a specific timing (e.g., the first play of the continuous effects), the player can focus on the advance notice only at the specific timing, and can concentrate on the content of the continuous effects during other plays.

(Configuration 13)
The display of one preview of the first performance type (e.g., step-up preview) and one preview of the second performance type (e.g., dialogue preview) that can be executed in the first performance state is not canceled by operating a specified stop button (e.g., second stop button).

In other words, step-up previews and dialogue previews that begin to be displayed when the start lever or first stop button is operated will continue to be displayed without being canceled when the second stop button is operated.

(Configuration 14)
When the third stop button is operated, the display of the first performance type 1 notice or the second performance type 1 notice that can be executed in the first performance state is canceled by operating the start lever or the first stop button, and the display by operating the third stop button is started.
When the game is in standby mode, the standby screen is displayed.
The display caused by operating the third stop button is configured to be erased when a new bet operation or start lever operation (start of the next game) is performed, or when the screen shifts to a standby screen.

(Configuration 15)
When a notice of the second performance type 1 is displayed in the second performance state (continuous performance),
Even when the third stop button is pressed, the notice of the first event will not be erased.
When the game enters standby mode, the standby screen is displayed.
The display of the one notice is configured to be erased when a new bet operation or start lever operation (start of the next game) is performed, or when the screen shifts to a standby screen.

In this way, when a dialogue preview is displayed during a continuous performance, the third stop button is operated, and the dialogue preview itself continues to be displayed without being erased, even if it is displayed to the end. On the other hand, the dialogue preview display is configured to be erased when a new bet operation or start lever operation is performed, or when the screen transitions to the standby screen. The continuous performance display is also erased.

(Configuration 16)
A first notice display start timing when a game is started in the first performance state and a notice display of one of the first performance types is started;
A game is started in the first performance state, and a second notice display start timing is set when a notice of one of the second performance types is displayed.
They are configured to be approximately the same (e.g., within 1 second).

In other words, during normal performance (first performance state), the step-up preview (one of the first performance types) begins approximately one second after the start lever is operated, and the dialogue preview (one of the second performance types) also begins approximately one second after the start lever is operated.

Note that the timing at which the first preview display starts and the timing at which the second preview display starts do not have to be approximately the same, and they may be different. The first preview display may start earlier, or the second preview display may start earlier.

Note that it is not necessary for both the step-up notice (one of the first presentation types) and the dialogue notice (one of the second presentation types) to be displayed in a single game.

(Configuration 17)
A first notice display start timing when a game is started in the first performance state and a notice of one of the first performance types or a notice of one of the second performance types is displayed;
A second notice display start timing when a game is started in the second performance state and a notice display of one of the second performance types is started;
They are configured to be approximately the same (e.g., within 1 second).

In other words, during normal performance (first performance state), a step-up preview (one of the first performance types) or a line preview (one of the second performance types) will begin approximately one second after the start lever is operated, and even during continuous performance (second performance state), a line preview (one of the second performance types) will begin approximately one second after the start lever is operated.

Note that the timing at which the first preview display starts and the timing at which the second preview display starts do not have to be approximately the same, and they may be different. The first preview display start timing may be configured to be earlier, or the second preview display start timing may be configured to be earlier.

(Configuration 18)
The game has a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (AT),
In the second gaming state,
In the first performance state, the first performance type and the second performance type may occur,
In the second performance state, only the second performance type can occur.

In other words, during AT (second game state), when continuous effects etc. are not occurring (first effect state), step-up notices etc. (first effect type) and dialogue notices etc. (second effect type) can be executed, but during continuous effects (second effect state), step-up notices etc. (first effect type) are not executed, but dialogue notices etc. (second effect type) can be executed.

(Configuration 18-1)
The game has a first gaming state (normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (AT),
In either the first gaming state or the second gaming state,
In the first performance state, the first performance type and the second performance type may occur,
In the second performance state, only the second performance type can occur.

In other words, whether in the normal game state (first game state) or during AT (second game state), when continuous effects etc. are not occurring (first effect state), step-up notices etc. (first effect type) and dialogue notices etc. (second effect type) can be executed, but during continuous effects (second effect state), step-up notices etc. (first effect type) are not executed, but dialogue notices etc. (second effect type) can be executed.

(Configuration 19)
A third effect (for example, a button effect) is provided that allows the player to operate an operating member,
There are cases where the third effect is not executed and the second effect state (for example, continuous effect) is entered, and cases where the third effect is executed and the second effect state is entered,
When the third performance is executed and the second performance state is entered, the rate at which one preview (line preview) of the second performance type is displayed in the second display mode (for example, green characters, red characters) is higher in the second performance state than when the third performance is not executed and the second performance state is entered.

In other words, the dialogue previews are configured to be displayed in green or red more frequently during consecutive effects when there is a button effect that the player can operate, compared to when there is a button effect that allows the player to operate the button and the consecutive effects transition occurs without the button effect.

By configuring it in this way, attention will be paid to whether or not there is a button effect before progressing to the second effect state (continuous effect).

(Configuration 20)
When a predetermined error (e.g., a door open error) occurs, an error message indicating the occurrence of the error is displayed on a display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device),
The error display is configured so that it cannot overlap with one of the first performance types (e.g., step-up notice).

The error display may overlap with one of the first presentation types (e.g., a step-up announcement).

Furthermore, the error display may overlap with one preview (e.g., a line preview) of the second type of effect that can be executed in the first performance state (a state in which continuous performances, etc. are not occurring on the normal stage), but may be configured not to overlap with one preview (e.g., a line preview) of the second type of effect that can be executed in the second performance state (during continuous performances).

(Configuration 21)
It is configured so that sound is output in one preview (for example, a dialogue preview) of the second performance type,
When a predetermined error (e.g., a door open error) occurs, an error sound is output to indicate the occurrence of the error.
While the error sound is being output, the audio of the second performance type 1 preview (e.g., a dialogue preview) is not output or is output at a volume of 0.

(Configuration 21 modified example)
It is configured so that sound is output in one preview of the first performance type (for example, a step-up preview),
When a predetermined error (for example, a door open error) occurs, an error sound is output to indicate the occurrence of the error.
While the error sound is being output, the audio of the first performance type one preview (e.g., step-up preview) is not output or is output at a volume of 0.

In this way, when the error sound and warning sound overlap, the system is designed to make it easier for players and hall staff to hear the error sound.

(Configuration 22)
The type of display mode of a preview with a first performance type that can be executed in the first performance state is configured to be different from the type of display mode of a preview with a second performance type that can be executed in the third performance state.

Specifically, the display style of step-up announcements (announcements with the first type of presentation) that can be executed when no continuous presentations or the like are occurring on the normal stage (first presentation state) can be displayed in four patterns, in order of decreasing expectation: blue < yellow < green < red. However, the display style of small item announcements (announcements with the second type of presentation) that can be executed during a premonition (third presentation state) and in which the color of small items can change can be displayed in seven patterns, in order of decreasing expectation: white < blue < yellow < green < orange < red < purple.

In addition, for small announcements (announcements with the second type of effect) that can be executed when continuous effects, etc. are not occurring on the normal stage (first effect state), four patterns of blue < yellow < green < red may be provided, similar to the display style of step-up announcements (announcements with the first type of effect) that can be executed when continuous effects, etc. are not occurring on the normal stage (first effect state).

In this way, by providing different display patterns depending on the presentation state, it is easier to maintain the player's interest during opportunities during premonitions, etc.

<Specifications 1 of the gaming machine for the assumed slot machine PS1>
The assumed gaming machine specification 1 (hereinafter referred to as specification 1) of the slot machine PS1 has a reel arrangement as shown in Fig. 20. The first reel in Fig. 20 corresponds to the left reel 8a, the second reel corresponds to the center reel 8b, and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 8c. As shown in Fig. 20, the symbols depicted on the reels of specification 1 are ten types: "Red Seven,""Bar,""MoonA,""MoonB,""Replay,""Cherry,""Camel,""BlankA,""BlankB," and "Blank C."

The display window for Specification 1 allows for nine symbols to be seen, arranged 3x3, with the active line being the top row on the left reel 8a, the middle row on the middle reel 8b, and the middle row on the right reel 8c, forming one curved line.

Figures 21 to 24 show the combinations of symbols; when the specified number is 3, this is the specified number when CB is not activated, and when the specified number is 2, this is the specified number when CB is activated. In the "Winning Symbol/Activating Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" columns of Figures 21 to 24, "Type 2 BB" refers to MB, "Replay" refers to replay, and "Winning" refers to small winning combinations.

Figure 25 is a list of bonus-related condition devices. For example, the condition device "Type 2 BB-A Condition Device" with bonus condition device number "1" is composed of the component "Type 2 BB01." "Type 2 BB01" corresponds to the "Type 2 BB01 Activation Symbol" in the "Winning Symbol, Activation Symbol, and Pattern Symbol Name" in Figure 21, and more specifically corresponds to six symbol combinations: "Moon A-Replay-Red Seven," "Moon A-Replay-Bar," "Moon A-Replay-Camel," "Moon B-Replay-Red Seven," "Moon B-Replay-Bar," and "Moon B-Replay-Camel."

Figures 26 to 28 are tables listing the conditional devices related to winning or replay. The "Winning Replay" item lists the conditional device number, the "Conditional Device" item lists the conditional device name, the "Nickname" item lists the nickname of the conditional device, the "Components" item lists the symbol combinations that make up the conditional device, and the "Control-related" item lists the stop operation order for each game state and the symbol combinations that can win.

For example, the condition device "Replay-A Condition Device" with condition device number "1" is composed of the components "Replay 01, 05-06," with "Replay 01" corresponding to the "Replay 01 Activating Symbol" in the "Winning Symbol, Activating Symbol, and Pattern Symbol Name" in Figure 21, and more specifically, the two corresponding symbol combinations, "Moon A-Replay-Replay" and "Moon B-Replay-Replay." Furthermore, "Replay 05" corresponds to the "Replay 05 Activating Symbol" in the "Winning Symbol, Activating Symbol, and Pattern Symbol Name" in Figure 21, and more specifically, the single symbol combination, "Replay-Red Seven-Red Seven." Additionally, "Replay 06" corresponds to the "Replay 06 Activation Symbol" in the "Winning Symbols, Activation Symbols, and Pattern Symbol Names" in Figure 21, and more specifically corresponds to three symbol combinations: "Replay-Bar-Red Seven," "Replay-Blank A-Red Seven," and "Replay-Blank B-Red Seven." Furthermore, it states that when a stop operation is first performed on any reel other than the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c, Replay 01 will be displayed as stopped, and when the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is first operated as stopped, either Replay 01, Replay 05, or Replay 06 will be displayed as stopped, depending on the stop acceptance position.

For example, the condition device "Winning-A9 Condition Device" with condition device number "15" is composed of the components "Winning 03-04, 07-08, 11-12, 15-16, 19, 56," and "Winning 03" corresponds to the "Winning 03 Winning Symbol" in the "Winning Symbol/Operating Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" of Figure 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon A-Camel Replay" and "Moon B-Camel Replay." Furthermore, "Winning 04" corresponds to the "Winning 04 Winning Symbol" in the "Winning Symbol/Operating Symbol/Pattern Symbol Name" of Figure 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon A-Red Seven-Moon A" and "Moon A-Bar-Moon A." Furthermore, "WINNER 04" corresponds to the "WINNER 04 winning symbol" in the "WINNER 04 winning symbol, OPERATION 04 symbol, and PATTERN 04 symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon A - Red Seven - Moon A" and "Moon A - Bar - Moon A" correspond to it. Furthermore, "WINNER 07" corresponds to the "WINNER 07 winning symbol" in the "WINNER 04 winning symbol, OPERATION 04 symbol, and PATTERN 04 symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon A - Blank A - Moon B" and "Moon A - Blank B - Moon B" correspond to it. Furthermore, "WINNER 08" corresponds to the "WINNER 08 winning symbol" in the "WINNER 04 winning symbol, OPERATION 04 symbol, and PATTERN 04 symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon B - Red Seven - Moon A" and "Moon B - Bar - Moon A" correspond to it. Furthermore, "winning 11" corresponds to the "winning 11 winning symbol" in the "winning symbol, operating symbol, and pattern symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon B-Blank A-Moon B" and "Moon B-Blank B-Moon B" correspond to it. Furthermore, "winning 12" corresponds to the "winning 12 winning symbol" in the "winning symbol, operating symbol, and pattern symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon A-Red Seven-Blank C" and "Moon A-Bar-Blank C" correspond to it. Furthermore, "winning 15" corresponds to the "winning 15 winning symbol" in the "winning symbol, operating symbol, and pattern symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon A-Blank A-Blank A" and "Moon A-Blank B-Blank A" correspond to it. Furthermore, "winning 16" corresponds to the "winning 16 winning symbol" in the "winning symbol, operating symbol, and pattern symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon B-Red Seven-Blank C" and "Moon B-Bar-Blank C" correspond to it. Furthermore, "winning 19" corresponds to the "winning 19 winning symbol" in the "winning symbol, operating symbol, and pattern symbol name" in Fig. 22, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Moon B-Blank A-Blank A" and "Moon B-Blank B-Blank A" correspond to it. Furthermore, "winning 56" corresponds to the "winning 56 winning symbol" in the "winning symbol, operating symbol, and pattern symbol name" in Fig. 20, and more specifically, the two symbol combinations "Red Seven-Replay-Replay" and "Cherry-Replay-Replay" correspond to it. Furthermore, it is described that when the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated to stop first, the left stop switch 13a corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated to stop second, and the middle stop switch 13b corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated to stop third, the winning number 03 will be displayed as a stopped number; when the right stop switch 13c corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated to stop first, the middle stop switch 13b corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated to stop second, and the left stop switch 13a corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated to stop third, the winning number 56 will be displayed as a stopped number; and when the stop switches are operated in any other order, there is a 1/2 chance that the winning number 04, 07, 08 or 11 will be displayed as a stopped number depending on the stop acceptance position, and there is a 1/2 chance that a small winning combination will be missed. In other words, if the stop acceptance position of each reel is random (when playing in a style known as random play or free play), there is a 50% chance that a symbol combination corresponding to one of the winning symbols 04, 07, 08, or 11 will be displayed depending on the stop acceptance position corresponding to the timing of the third press of the stop switch, resulting in a small win, and there is a 50% chance that a symbol combination corresponding to any of the components of the "winning - A9 condition device" will not be displayed, resulting in a missed small win.

Figures 29 to 31 show internal lottery data in non-RT mode. "R1" to "R6" in the figures correspond to "Set Value 1" to "Set Value 6," respectively. For example, in Figure 29, the position corresponding to Type 2 BB-A in R1 has the number "3240." This is the number of Type 2 BB-A placed in R1. Since the total number of placed numbers is 65,536, the probability of winning Type 2 BB-A in R1 is 3,240/65,536. Furthermore, because Figures 29 to 31 show internal lottery data divided by condition device, adding up the numbers placed from "Type 2 BB-A" to "Winning Q" does not equal 65,536. This is because "Type 2 BB-A" to "Type 2 BB-I" overlap with other condition devices. The total number of places from "Replay-A" to "Winning Q" is "64788", and the total number of "Losing" places (not shown) is "748", which comes to "65536".

Figure 32 shows the start and end conditions for RT. For example, after RWM initialization, the system transitions to the "non-RT" state, and in the "non-RT" state, it transitions to RT1 when the "Type 2 BB-A Condition Device" through "Type 2 BB-E Condition Device" are activated. In other words, if any of Type 2 BB-A, Type 2 BB-B, Type 2 BB-C, Type 2 BB-D, or Type 2 BB-E is won during non-RT, the system transitions to RT1.

When the Type 2 BB-A to Type 2 BB-F operating symbols are displayed, Type 2 BB-A to Type 2 BB-F will end if more than 11 coins are paid out, and the machine will transition to a non-RT state. Also, when the Type 2 BB-G operating symbols are displayed, Type 2 BB-G will end if more than 7 coins are paid out, and the machine will transition to a non-RT state. Also, when the Type 2 BB-H or Type 2 BB-I operating symbols are displayed, Type 2 BB-H or Type 2 BB-I will end if more than 1 coin is paid out, and the machine will transition to a non-RT state. Also, Type 2 BB-A to Type 2 BB-I are PB=1 roles, and can be displayed as stopped regardless of the stop timing.

In Specification 1, as shown in Figure 29, the number of Type 2 BB winning positions during non-RT was 36,620, and the average number of games played during non-RT was about 2 games. Furthermore, of the Type 2 BBs, the number of Type 2 BB-A to -E winning positions that transition to RT1 was 17,820, indicating a high probability of staying in RT1.

Figures 33 to 32 show the internal lottery data in RT1 mode. Explanations of each item are omitted as they are the same as those in Figures 29 to 31.

The transition of the main game state for Specification 1 is explained below with reference to Figure 36.

After the RWM is initialized, the game will transition to main game state number = 0. Main game state = 0 corresponds to the normal zone, and if the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous zone is won, the game will transition to either main game state number = 1, main game state number = 2, main game state number = 3, or main game state number = 4.

In specification 1, main gaming state number = 1 is a premonition state that creates a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the state will transition to AC, an AT state that notifies the player of an advantageous operation mode when the push order bell is hit, SAC, an AT state different from AC, or BB (a so-called sub-bonus), an AT state different from AC and SAC. When main gaming state number = 1, the state will transition to a predetermined destination (either main gaming state = 0, main gaming state number = 2, main gaming state number = 3, or main gaming state number = 5).

Main game state number = 2 is the game state corresponding to AC. In AC, when the push order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are selected, the game state notifies the player of the advantageous push order. AC is managed by the number of games, and the AC game counter is set to 30 as the initial number of games. It is then decremented with each game, and when the AC game counter value reaches 0, the game state transitions to either main game state = 1, main game state number = 3, or main game state number = 5, depending on the results of the game state lottery during AC. Note that during AC, the AC game counter value may increase (so-called game number addition) depending on the results of the internal lottery.

Main game state number = 3 is the game state corresponding to SAC. In SAC, like AC, when the push order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are selected, the game state notifies the player of the push order that is favorable to them. SAC is managed by the number of games played, and the value selected in the AC game counter set lottery is set in the AC game counter as the initial number of games played. This is then decremented with each play, and if the AC game counter value reaches 0, the game transitions to either main game state = 1, main game state number = 2, or main game state number = 5, depending on the results of the game state lottery during SAC. Note that during SAC, the AC game counter value may increase (so-called game number increase) depending on the results of the internal lottery. Additionally, in AC game counter set lotteries, there is a high probability that an expected value of 30 or more will be won, so SAC can be said to be in a more advantageous position than AC.

Main game state number 4 corresponds to BB (the so-called sub-bonus). In BB, like AC and SAC, if the push-order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are selected, the player is notified of the most favorable push order. BB is managed by the number of coins paid out, and the BB coin counter is initially set to 100. As a result of play, the number of coins paid out is subtracted for each win. If the BB coin counter value reaches 0, the game transitions to either main game state number 0, main game state number 2, or main game state number 3, depending on the results of the game state lottery during BB. During BB, the BB coin counter value may increase (a so-called coin count increase) depending on the results of the internal lottery.

Main game state number = 5 is the game state corresponding to the ending. In the ending, like AC, SAC, and BB, if the push order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are selected, the game state notifies the player of the advantageous push order. The ending occurs when the MY counter is 2200 or the advantageous zone clear counter is 50, and continues until the MY counter is 2400 or greater, or the advantageous zone clear counter reaches 0. When the MY counter is 2400 or greater, or the advantageous zone clear counter reaches 0, the game state transitions to main game state = 0.

Main game state number = 6 is the game state corresponding to the confirmation screen. On the confirmation screen, when the push order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are selected, the game state may or may not notify the player of the push order that is advantageous to the player. This means that when the judgment flag is 0 on the confirmation screen, if the player wins A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, or F1-F12, the player will be notified of the advantageous press order; when the judgment flag is 1 on the confirmation screen, the player will not be notified of the advantageous press order even if the player wins A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, or F1-F12. Also, because BB begins after the confirmation screen ends, the BB flag is set to 1 on the confirmation screen.

When any of Replay-A through Replay-F is selected, the confirmation screen displays "Aim for the Red Seven from the Right" on the LCD and "7" on the instruction monitor, indicating that the first stop should be the Red Seven symbol on the right reel 8c (number 4 on the third reel in Figure 20), the second stop should be the Red Seven symbol on the center reel 8b (number 4 on the second reel in Figure 20), and the third stop should be the Red Seven symbol on the left reel 8a (number 4 on the first reel in Figure 20). If any of Replay-A through Replay-F is selected and the operation is performed as instructed, the Replay 05 activation symbol (number 45 in Figure 21) will be displayed on the pay line, and the Red Seven symbol will be displayed in a straight line in the middle row. If the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed, the judgment flag is set to 0, the BB flag is set to 0, and the main game state number is set to 4. Furthermore, the judgment flag is initially set to 0, and even if one of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen and the stop operation is performed as instructed to stop and display the Replay 05 activation symbol, the judgment flag will still be set to 0, so the judgment flag will not become 1 when the stop operation is performed as instructed.

Also, when one of Replay-A to -F is selected on the confirmation screen, the LCD will display "Aim for the red seven from the right" and the instruction monitor will display "7." If the player does not perform the stop operation as instructed (if the player does not perform the stop operation in the instructed order, or if the player performs the stop operation in the instructed order but does not aim for the red seven symbol), the Replay 05 activation symbol will not be displayed as stopped, and the judgment flag will be set to 1.

If the judgment flag is set to 1 (if the player does not perform the stop operation as instructed), the main game state number will remain at 6 (confirmation screen) and will not transition to main game state number 4 (BB). Therefore, main game state number 6 (confirmation screen) will be maintained until one of Replay-A to -F is won again and the Replay 05 activation symbol is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, even if one of Replay-A to -F is won for the second or subsequent times on the confirmation screen, the LCD will still display "Aim for the red seven from the right," and the instruction monitor will display "7."

By configuring it in this way, BB can be initiated according to the player's eye-pressing skill, making it possible to provide gameplay that allows players to aim for the BB symbol after winning the BB.

Furthermore, while the judgment flag is set to 1, even if the push order bell group A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, or F1-F12 is won, no advantageous operation mode will be announced, meaning the player will only have a 1/6 chance of obtaining a higher minor winning combination. Therefore, when comparing the case where the judgment flag is set to 1 on the confirmation screen with the case where the judgment flag is set to 0 on the confirmation screen, it can be said that the case where the judgment flag is set to 1 on the confirmation screen is more disadvantageous to the player. Note that the push order navigation rate when the push order bell group is won only needs to be less than 100%; it does not need to be 0%. For example, the push order navigation rate may be set so that the payout rate is 100% (maintaining the status quo).

By configuring it in this way, when Replay-A to Replay-F is selected on the confirmation screen, the player's skill can be used to determine future advantages or disadvantages, making it possible to increase the excitement of playing by pressing the buttons with precision.

Furthermore, when comparing the game state (main game state number = 4 (BB)) after the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen with the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the Replay 05 activation symbol is not displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen, the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the Replay 05 activation symbol is not displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen is can be said to be a disadvantageous state to the player because it does not notify the player of advantageous operation modes even if the push order bell groups A1 to A12, B1 to B12, C1 to C12, D1 to D12, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12 are won. Please note that the push order navigation rate when winning the push order bell group only needs to be less than 100%, so it does not have to be 0%.

By configuring it in this way, when Replay-A to Replay-F is selected on the confirmation screen, the player's skill can be used to determine future advantages or disadvantages, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game by using eye-pressing techniques.

In addition, while the judgment flag stores a value of 1, if the push order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are won, an advantageous operation mode is notified. However, the lottery level of a predetermined lottery (a lottery advantageous to the player, such as a push order navigation rate lottery, set stock lottery, loop rate lottery, or number of games added lottery) that can be executed during the BB that starts after Replay-A-F is won again and the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed stopped may be set to the lowest level, thereby minimizing the degree of advantage during the BB. The lottery level refers to the different probabilities of obtaining a result advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is executed, and the lowest level refers to the lowest probability of obtaining a result advantageous to the player when a predetermined lottery is executed. Additionally, while the judgment flag stores a value of 0, if the push-order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are selected, an advantageous operation mode is announced, and the lottery level of the predetermined lottery that can be executed during the BB that begins after Replay-A-F is selected and the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed stopped is not favored (the lottery level is not intentionally set to the lowest level). For this reason, when comparing the case where the judgment flag stores a value of 1 on the confirmation screen with the case where the judgment flag stores a value of 0 on the confirmation screen, it can be said that the case where the judgment flag stores a value of 1 on the confirmation screen is more disadvantageous to the player.

In this case, it is also possible that advantageous operation modes are not announced even if the push order bell groups A1-A12, B1-B12, C1-C12, D1-D12, E1-E12, and F1-F12 are won. Furthermore, if advantageous operation modes are announced when the push order bell group is won when the judgment flag is set to 0 on the confirmation screen, and then advantageous operation modes are announced when the push order bell group is won even when the judgment flag is set to 1, there is a possibility that a player may intentionally postpone the confirmation screen to obtain the push order bell. Therefore, it is also possible to announce advantageous operation modes when the push order bell group is won regardless of the judgment flag for the first 10 games from the start of the confirmation screen, but not announce advantageous operation modes when the push order bell group is won regardless of the judgment flag from 11 games onwards from the start of the confirmation screen. As a guideline for these 10 games, the probability of winning at least one of Replay-A to F is set at approximately 80%, but this can be set at any length as long as it is not too long.

By configuring it in this way, when Replay-A to Replay-F is selected on the confirmation screen, the player's skill can be used to determine future advantages or disadvantages, making it possible to increase the excitement of playing by pressing the buttons with precision.

Furthermore, when comparing the game state (main game state number = 4 (BB)) after the replay 05 activation symbol is displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen with the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the replay 05 activation symbol is not displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen, the game state (main game state number = 6 (confirmation screen)) after the replay 05 activation symbol is not displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won for the first time on the confirmation screen may have the lottery level of a predetermined lottery (a lottery advantageous to the player, such as a push order navigation rate lottery, a set stock lottery, a loop rate lottery, or a game number addition lottery) that can be executed during BB, which starts after Replay-A to -F is won again and the replay 05 activation symbol is displayed stopped, set to the lowest level, thereby making the degree of advantage during BB the lowest. In this case, the gaming state after the Replay 05 activation symbol is not displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is first selected on the confirmation screen is considered to be more disadvantageous to the player than the gaming state after the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is first selected on the confirmation screen. Note that even in this case, when the push order bell group is selected, the player may or may not be notified of an advantageous operation mode. Furthermore, even when an advantageous operation mode is notified, the notification may be configured to end after about 10 games.

By configuring it in this way, when Replay-A to Replay-F is selected on the confirmation screen, the player's skill can be used to determine future advantages or disadvantages, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game by using eye-pressing techniques.

Furthermore, none of Replay-A to -F triggers a transition to RT, and the lottery results (winning results) cannot be carried over to the next play or later. The RT state itself does not transition even when the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed as stopped (in other words, the RT state is maintained even when the Replay 05 activation symbol is displayed as stopped, so the activation probability (winning probability) for replay and the activation probability for winning prizes such as A1 to A12 do not change). Furthermore, the conditional device that displays red sevens in a straight line is not limited to replays; it can also be a conditional device related to winning. In this case, a conditional device with PB=1 is appropriate, as it displays symbol combinations related to other winning prizes even if red sevens are not lined up. Furthermore, when a conditional device related to winning displays red sevens in a straight line, the payout number should be as small as possible; one coin is suitable. This is because unless the number of red sevens placed on the conditional device that lines up in a straight line is set to a number that makes it realistically easy to win, it will be impossible to line up red sevens on the confirmation screen, and if the payout number is set too high (for example, 15 coins), unnecessary payouts will occur even when you do not want to line up red sevens in a straight line, limiting the flexibility of the balls you can dispense.

This configuration allows advantages and disadvantages to be created based on the player's skill without using a bonus condition device or a condition device that triggers a transition to RT, thereby enhancing the gameplay experience of using eye-pressing without changing the game state. In particular, in specifications that allow play within a bonus, gameplay using a bonus condition device or a condition device that triggers a transition to RT cannot be achieved, so it is possible to provide new gameplay experience through eye-pressing.

In addition, the Replay 05 activation symbol, which can be displayed when any of Replay-A to -F is won, can be displayed by stopping the right reel first (by operating the reels in the order right-center-left, or right-left-center), but the operation mode for stopping the right reel first is the operation order that does not result in the lowest base during normal play out of the six operation orders: left-center-right, left-right-center, center-left, center-left, center-right-left, center-right-left, and right-center-left.

Here, the base during normal play is the expected payout number for a specified number of 3 (number of inserts: 3). According to Figures 26-28 and 33-35, the expected payout number for a specified number of 3 for an operation sequence of left, center, and right in RT1 with setting 1 is, for example, 0 for the expected number of coins for 2-type BB-A (number of coins paid out when the activated symbol is displayed) and 0 for the number of inserts; the expected number of coins for Replay-A is 3 (the payout number for replays is calculated as 3 because the specified number is 3) and 864 for the number of inserts; the expected number of coins for Win-A1 is 12 (because left, center, and right are the correct operation sequence) and 900 for the number of inserts; the expected number of coins for Win-A1 is 0 (because left, center, and right are the correct operation sequence) and 900 for the number of inserts; the expected number of coins for Loser-A1 is 0 and 452 for the number of inserts; the expected value is 0. Using this calculation, the expected value of each condition device is calculated, and the sum of the expected values of all condition devices is 1.66857. If this sum of expected values is divided by the specified number of 3, it is derived that the expected number of payouts for the specified number of 3 in the left, middle, and right operation order is 0.55619 (however, the expected value is calculated based on winning - G obtaining 2 coins and winning - M obtaining 1 coin).

In addition, the expected number of payouts for a specified number of 3 in a left-right-middle operation sequence, a middle-left-right operation sequence, or a middle-right-left operation sequence in RT1 of setting 1 is the same as the expected number of payouts for a specified number of 3 in a left-middle-right operation sequence in RT1 of setting 1, which is 0.55619.

In addition, the expected value of the payout number for a specified number of 3 for the right, left, middle operation sequence in RT1 of setting 1 is, for example, the expected number of coins for 2-type BB-A (payout number when the operating pattern is displayed) is 0 and the number of places is 0, so the expected value is 0; the expected number of coins for replay-A is 3 (the payout number for replay is calculated as 3 because the specified number is 3) and the number of places is 864, so the expected value is 0.03955; the expected number of coins for winning-A1 is 0.5 (because left, middle, right is an incorrect press order and 1 coin is obtained at 1/2 chance) and the number of places is 900, so the expected value is 0.00686; the expected number of coins for winning-A11 is 1 (because 1 coin is obtained for right, middle, left) and the number of places is 900, so the expected value is 0.01373; the expected number of losing coins is 0 and the number of places is 452, so the expected value is 0. Using this calculation, the expected value of each condition device is calculated, and the sum of the expected values of all condition devices is 1.69375. If this sum of expected values is divided by the specified number of 3, the expected number of payouts for the left, middle, and right operation order with the specified number of 3 is 0.56458 (however, the expected value is calculated based on winning - G obtaining 2 coins and winning - M obtaining 1 coin).

In addition, the expected number of payouts for a specified number of 3 in the right-center-left operation sequence in RT1 of setting 1 is the same as the expected number of payouts for a specified number of 3 in the right-center-left operation sequence in RT1 of setting 1, which is 0.56458.

In this way, the base rate under normal circumstances for the operation sequence that stops the right reel first (right-left-center, right-center-left) is higher than the base rate under normal circumstances for other operation sequences (left-center-right, left-right-center, center-left-right, center-right-left). Furthermore, by lowering the expected probability of winning the AT with an operation sequence that stops the right reel first compared to other operation sequences, the overall payout rate is lower than with other operation sequences. While the base rate under normal circumstances for the operation sequence that stops the right reel first is higher than with other operation sequences, it is ultimately an unfavorable operation sequence, making it difficult for players to operate the operation sequence that stops the right reel first under normal circumstances. In other words, the operation sequence that stops the right reel first is a penalty press order, and players are made aware of this in advance to discourage them from operating it. This configuration reduces the likelihood that a player will operate the right reel in the order that stops it first, making it less likely that the Replay 05 activation symbol will be displayed even if Replay-A to -F is won during normal play, and prevents excessive expectations from being created in the player due to the unintended alignment of Red Seven symbols.

<Description of Test Signal Output According to the Present Invention>
The gaming machine of the present invention executes an internal lottery process upon receiving operation of the start switch 12 for gaming machine testing, and executes a process for outputting a test signal before executing the reel rotation start process.

The gaming machine executes processing to output a first test signal (also called an IF2 test signal) that instructs the player on the optimal playing style, and a second test signal (also called an IF3 test signal) that instructs the player on the playing style that will result in the lowest base hit under normal circumstances.

The process for outputting the IF2 test signal involves setting the data (operation order, stop acceptance positions for the left reel 8a, stop acceptance positions for the center reel 8b, and stop acceptance positions for the right reel 8c) to be output from table data stored in ROM according to the results of the internal lottery process. For example, if the prize-G condition device shown in Figure 28 wins, the probability of obtaining a small prize remains the same regardless of the push order. However, if the "blank C" and "red seven" on the right reel 8c are not pressed correctly, only one coin will be paid out instead of two. Therefore, the instructions for the IF2 test signal are to press the buttons in a random order, stop acceptance on the left reel 8a at number 3, stop acceptance on the center reel 8b at number 10, and stop acceptance on the right reel 8c at number 2. Operating the device according to these instructions will result in the symbol combination "replay" - "cherry" - "red seven" (see Figure 24) for prize 63 being displayed, allowing the player to receive a two-coin payout.

The table data stored in the ROM includes, for example, "00H", which is the push order information stored at ROM address "2C60H", "03H", which is the stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a stored at ROM address "2C61H", "0AH", which is the stop acceptance position for the center reel 8b stored at ROM address "2C62H", and "02H", which is the stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c stored at ROM address "2C63H". Each piece of information is obtained from the table data as part of the process for outputting the IF2 test signal.

For example, if the Win-A1 condition device in Figure 26 wins in AT mode (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small win rate remains the same regardless of the stop acceptance position, but if the buttons are not pressed in the order of left, center, and right, the player will not receive a 12-coin payout and will instead receive a 1-coin payout or no payout at all. Therefore, the IF2 test signal instructs the player to press the buttons in the order of left, center, and right, randomly position the left reel 8a, randomly position the center reel 8b, and randomly position the right reel 8c. If the player follows these instructions, the Win-A1 condition device in Figure 26 will stop and display the Win-A1 combination of "Moon A" - "Camel" - "Replay" or "Moon B" - "Camel" - "Replay" (see Figure 22), making it possible to receive a 12-coin payout. Note that if the Win-A1 condition device wins in non-AT mode, the IF2 test signal is output with both the press order and the stop acceptance position randomly.

The table data stored in the ROM includes, for example, "01H", which is the push order information stored at ROM address "2C64H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a stored at ROM address "2C65H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the center reel 8b stored at ROM address "2C66H", and "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c stored at ROM address "2C67H". Each piece of information is obtained from the table data as part of the process for outputting the IF2 test signal. Note that "7FH" is data stored when the stop acceptance position does not matter, and can be any value greater than the number of symbols (14H).

Next, in order to output the IF3 test signal, the data to be output (operation order, stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a, stop acceptance position for the middle reel 8b, and stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c) is set from the table data stored in ROM according to the results of the internal lottery process. For example, in the above-mentioned Specification 1, the operation order other than the operation order that stops the right reel 8c first has the lowest base under normal circumstances, so the instructions given as the IF3 test signal are to press the buttons in the order left-center-right, with the stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a being random, the stop acceptance position for the middle reel 8b being random, and the stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c being random. When these instructions are followed, the buttons are stopped in the order that has the lowest base under normal circumstances, and because the stop acceptance positions are random, when a conditional device requiring careful pressing is won, there will be cases where a small win is obtained with a high chance, a small win is obtained with a low chance, or the small win is missed.

The table data stored in the ROM includes, for example, "01H", which is the push order information stored at ROM address "2D60H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a stored at ROM address "2D61H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the center reel 8b stored at ROM address "2D62H", and "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c stored at ROM address "2D63H". Each piece of information is obtained from the table data as part of the process for outputting the IF3 test signal.

For example, if the Win-A1 condition device in Figure 26 wins in AT mode (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small win rate remains the same regardless of the stop acceptance position, but if the buttons are not pressed in the order of left, center, and right, the player will not receive a 12-coin payout and will instead receive a 1-coin payout or no payout at all. Therefore, the IF3 test signal instructs the player to press the buttons in the order of left, center, and right, randomly position the left reel 8a, randomly position the center reel 8b, and randomly position the right reel 8c. If the player operates according to these instructions, the Win-A1 condition device in Figure 26 will stop and display the Win-A1 combination of "Moon A" - "Camel" - "Replay" or "Moon B" - "Camel" - "Replay" (see Figure 22), making it possible to receive a 12-coin payout. Note that if the Win-A1 condition device wins in non-AT mode, the IF3 test signal is output with the buttons pressed in the order of left, center, and right, and randomly position the stop acceptance.

The table data stored in the ROM includes, for example, "01H", which is the push order information stored at ROM address "2D64H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a stored at ROM address "2D65H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the center reel 8b stored at ROM address "2D66H", and "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c stored at ROM address "2D67H". Each piece of information is obtained from the table data as part of the process for outputting the IF3 test signal. Note that "7FH" is data stored when the stop acceptance position does not matter, and can be any value greater than the number of symbols (14H).

Also, for example, if the replay-A1 condition device in Figure 26 wins when the main game state number is 6 (confirmation screen) (when the instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor), the small win rate remains the same regardless of the stop acceptance position, but the "Red Seven" symbol combination will not line up in a straight line unless the buttons are pressed in the order right, left, and center. Therefore, the IF3 test signal instructs the buttons to be pressed in the order right, left, and center, with the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a random, the stop acceptance position of the center reel 8b random, and the stop acceptance position of the right reel 8c random. If these instructions are followed, the symbol combination of "Replay" - "Red Seven" - "Red Seven" for Replay 05 (see Figure 21) may stop and be displayed, making it possible to line up the "Red Seven" symbol combination. Note that if the replay-A1 condition device wins in a non-AT state, the buttons are pressed in the order left, center, and right, and the stop acceptance position is random, and the IF3 test signal is output.

The table data stored in the ROM includes, for example, "06H", which is the push order information stored at ROM address "2E64H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the left reel 8a stored at ROM address "2E5H", "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the center reel 8b stored at ROM address "2E66H", and "7FH", which is the stop acceptance position for the right reel 8c stored at ROM address "2E67H". Each piece of information is obtained from the table data as part of the process for outputting the IF3 test signal. Note that "7FH" is data stored when the stop acceptance position does not matter, and can be any value greater than or equal to the number of symbols (14H or greater in the case of 20 symbols).

After each data is set, processing is performed to output an IF2 test signal in the order of operation, the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a, the stop acceptance position of the center reel 8b, and the stop acceptance position of the right reel 8c, and then processing is performed to output an IF3 test signal in the order of operation, the stop acceptance position of the left reel 8a, the stop acceptance position of the center reel 8b, and the stop acceptance position of the right reel 8c.

This configuration makes it possible to accurately transmit IF2 test signals and IF3 test signals to the test IF board.

<Explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects applicable to the assumed slot machine PS1>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the insertion effect applicable to the slot machine PS1 will be described.

The effects applicable to the slot machine PS1 described below are intended to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that the settlement or insertion was not performed properly by simultaneously outputting both the winning effect associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on the winning of minor roles such as push order roles, the settlement effect associated with the settlement process, and the insertion effect associated with the bet operation, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The following describes the configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to the assumed slot machine PS1.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as explained in the slot machine PS1, but details of the processing omitted in the explanation of the slot machine PS1 will be explained below.

<Processing when gaming medals are inserted>
If game medals are ready to be inserted, when game medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet is set (also called a bet) for the number of inserted medals, or if the upper limit is set, the number of inserted medals is added to the credits. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals available for betting is stored in the credits, a bet is set in response to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, "inserting game medals" is equivalent to game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing through the medal selector 34 normally.
In addition, if game medals have been set for betting or have been saved in credits and before the game begins (after the required number of medals to be bet has been set and before the start lever has been operated), settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch.
Furthermore, when a gaming medal is inserted, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means), and when the bet switch is operated, transmits a reserve insertion command according to the number of medals set for betting to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor combination has been won. Paying out game medals here means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached their upper limit, or paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached their upper limit. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting a game medal payout sound and executing a backlight effect (also referred to as a BL effect). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when a replay wins).When there is a loss or when a replay wins, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Settlement processing>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process of paying out (settlement) game medals to the player from the hopper 44 in a number corresponding to the set bet number and the accumulated credits is executed. When the settlement process is started, the main control means sends a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and the settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects are executed based on the lottery results of the winning combination (internal lottery results), push order navigation effects are executed during the AT, and throw-in effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This effect is executed when a gaming medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command transmitted from the main control means. The main control means sets the reserve insertion command as either a reserve insertion command (1 medal), a reserve insertion command (2 medals), or a reserve insertion command (3 medals) depending on the number of medals set to be bet, and transmits the set reserve insertion command to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (e.g., a "da" sound is output), notifying the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound A is output three times, notifying the player that three medals have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted gaming medal is set to be bet, insertion sound A is output once, and if it is stored, insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been stored is output once (e.g., a "ji" sound is output), notifying the player that a bet or storage has been made.
When a reserve deposit command (3 coins) is received, the deposit sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output instead of the deposit sound A being output three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet is set and when the coins are stored (for example, the deposit sound A may be output in all states). Also, a different sound (deposit sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command, and a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out and a back lamp effect are executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two distinct payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the game medal payout process: payout sound A and payout sound B. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output during normal play (non-AT) when a push order role is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. If the correct order is not followed, an incorrect symbol combination may be stopped and an unfavorable payout may occur; in such cases, no payout sound is output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, repeatedly outputs a specific sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeatedly outputs the specific sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. By outputting the payout sound A for a predetermined payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which a payout is actually being made) that is longer than the period during which a payout is actually being made (the period during which a payout process is being made), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which a payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and as a result, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it will be easier to execute the effect without being canceled midway.

Payout sound B starts when a payout start command is received, repeatedly outputs a predetermined sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeatedly outputs the predetermined sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received, and then ends. That is, payout sound B outputs a sound for a specific payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the second specific time to the actual payout period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed, and this specific payout sound period is longer than the predetermined payout sound period of payout sound A. Thus, by outputting payout sound B for a longer period than payout sound A, it is possible to make the player perceive that more game medals have been awarded. Furthermore, by outputting payout sound B, which is different from payout sound A, during the AT, it is possible to more easily recognize that a player is in a favorable state that is different from normal.
Although the payout sound is output for a predetermined time or a specific time after the payout end command is received, when the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for a period of time that is the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits or paying out game medals) plus a predetermined time or a specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, although the payout sound A during normal play and the payout sound B during AT are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
There are two different back lamp effects: back lamp effect A and back lamp effect B. Back lamp effect A is a back lamp effect that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the correct symbol combination stops as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. Back lamp effect B is a back lamp effect that is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination stops as a result of operating the buttons in the correct order, resulting in a favorable payout. If the correct button order is not followed, an incorrect symbol combination may stop, in which case the back lamp effect is not executed. Back lamp effect A begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the back lamp in a specific pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp repeatedly turns on and off in a specific pattern for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) before ending. By executing the back lamp effect A for a predetermined back lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being made) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for a predetermined effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the back lamp effect A is being made, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being made over a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

Back lamp effect B begins when a payout start command is received, and repeatedly turns on and off the back lamp in a predetermined pattern until a payout end command is received. Once the payout end command is received, the back lamp repeatedly turns on and off in a predetermined pattern for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) before ending. In other words, back lamp effect B repeatedly turns on and off for a specific back lamp effect period (the period during which actual payouts are made plus the second specific time) that is longer than the period during which actual payouts are made, and this specific back lamp effect period is longer than the predetermined back lamp effect period. In this way, by executing back lamp effect B for a longer period than back lamp effect A, it can be perceived as if more game medals have been awarded. Furthermore, by executing back lamp effect B, which is different from back lamp effect A, during AT, it can be made easier to recognize that an unusually advantageous state is being achieved.

While the backlight effect was executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first or second specific time had elapsed, if a payout start command was received, the backlight effect could be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer: credit addition or medal payout) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. While the backlight effect is different during normal play and during AT, the same backlight effect could also be executed. While the backlight is repeatedly turned on and off in a fixed pattern, a series of on-off and off patterns could be specified and output from the start to the end of the backlight effect. The "predetermined backlight effect period" of backlight effect A and the "predetermined payout sound period" of payout sound A are both the time during which actual payouts are being performed plus the first specific time, and are therefore the same period. However, these "predetermined backlight effect period" and "predetermined payout sound period" may be different periods. The same applies to the relationship between the "specific back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect B and the "specific dispensing sound period" of dispensing sound B. In short, the "predetermined dispensing sound period" and "specific dispensing sound period" of dispensing sounds A and B, and the "predetermined back lamp effect period" and "specific back lamp effect period" of back lamp effect A and B are each longer than the period during which actual dispensing occurs, and as long as the relationship is "predetermined dispensing sound period" < "specific dispensing sound period" and "predetermined back lamp effect period" < "specific back lamp effect period," these periods can be set appropriately.

<Settlement performance>
This effect is executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on a settlement start command and a settlement end command. It outputs a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out, and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed is output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and repeatedly outputs a sound different from the payout sound (e.g., a "do" sound) until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the sound ends with the output of a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, such as "Settlement has been completed," over a third specified period (e.g., 5 seconds). In other words, the settlement effect outputs a sound over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period obtained by adding the third specified time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the settlement process is being performed).

The various effects executed depending on the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to Figures 37 to 41. Figure 37 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 38 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 39 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process is completed. Figure 40 is a time chart when no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Figure 41 is a time chart when gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that for convenience of explanation, Figures 37 to 41 use ON and OFF to indicate the status of the corresponding process or effect, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is indicated in parentheses. Specifically, for payout process/settling process/BL effect/settling effect, ON indicates a running state, OFF indicates a not-running state, and when it changes from OFF to ON, the process etc. starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it ends. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that an output is being made, and OFF indicates that an output is not being made. For the MAX BET lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is not lit. For the MAX BET switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted.

<If you do not insert the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 37 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure, the same applies below) and a backlight effect A (referred to as a BL effect in the figure, the same applies below) based on the received payout start command. At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A and the backlight effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time). After the payout process ends at time t1, the main control means performs processing such as updating the RT status (game end check processing) and turns on the blocker to enable the insertion of gaming medals. At time t2, the main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the status that allows the insertion of gaming medals. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the period T1 has elapsed since time t1, the sub-control means terminates the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the predetermined payout sound period and the predetermined effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of payout sound A and the back lamp effect A from time t1 onwards, while turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When inserting a bet using the MAX BET switch after the payout process has been completed>
As shown in Figure 38, up until time t2, the situation is the same as when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at time t3, the MAX BET switch is operated. When the MAX BET switch is operated, the main control means turns off the MAX BET lamp, the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A, and outputs a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure; the same applies below) three times as a payout effect from time t3 to time t4 (during the T2 period). Even when various situations are combined, such as when payout sound A is output while payout sound A is output, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, as well as that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at time t3, the output of payout sound A continues, but by ending back lamp effect A, the player is made to recognize by sound that a payout has been made, and is also made to recognize by sight that a bet has been set. Note that although Fig. 38 has been explained using the MAX BET switch for insertion operation, the insertion sound is also output when inserting a coin using the 1 BET switch or inserting a medal.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the dispensing process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 39, up to time t2, the process is the same as when the MAX BET switch is inserted after the payout process is completed, and at time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the MAX BET switch. At time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and turns off (turns off) the MAX BET lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A and back lamp effect A at time t3 without waiting for the passage of period T1. Thereafter, based on the settlement start command, it starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect. At time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement completion command, the sub-control means replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed, and continues for period T3 (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by ending the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be made to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is being carried out.

<If you do not insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 40 , at time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the received settlement start command. Here, the backlight effect is not executed (output) during settlement, allowing the payout process and the settlement process to be visually distinct processes. At time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the settlement completion command, the sub-control means replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that settlement has been completed for a period T3. After the settlement process is completed at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to enable the insertion of gaming medals. At time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that gaming medals can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T13, the T3 period has elapsed since time t9, so the sub-control means stops outputting the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement effect is being executed from time t10 onwards, but it is still possible to insert medals.

<If you insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in Figure 41, up until time t10, the situation is the same as when no gaming medals are inserted after the settlement process has been completed, and at time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the medal insertion command, the sub-control means outputs insertion sound A once as an insertion effect, and continues to output this sound from time t11 to time t12. Even when various situations are combined, such as when a sound indicating that settlement has been completed is output while insertion sound A is also output from time t11 onwards, smooth control is possible. This allows the player to recognize that the settlement process has been completed, as well as that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 37 to 41 have been described using an example in which the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is back lamp effect A, but in these Figures 37 to 41, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figures 37 and 38 should be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effects as those described above are achieved.

<Change of form>
We have explained a configuration in which the same sound is repeatedly output while the dispensing process or settlement process is being carried out until it is completed, but in addition to the commands mentioned above, the main control means may send a command to the sub-control means each time a coin is dispensed, indicating that one coin has been dispensed, or a command that can identify the number of coins remaining to be dispensed, and the sub-control means may output a dispensing sound or settlement sound each time one coin is dispensed based on receiving these commands sent from the main control means.
Furthermore, although the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, it may be the same as the payout sound. By using the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity. If the sounds are the same, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of a backlight effect, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being carried out properly, even if the settlement process is carried out immediately after the payout process.
The settlement sound may be the same as the error sound, which also reduces the amount of sound data, thereby reducing the data capacity.
Also, during the AT, payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "Get" or "Yesssss" indicating the correct button press sequence may be output from the start of the payout process to the time when the payout process ends and the second specific time (2 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct button press sequence, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct button press sequence, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out.
In addition, although the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may also transmit information to the sub-control means as to whether the MAX bed switch is in an operable state, thereby turning the lamp on and off in the sub-control means.

Furthermore, although it has been explained that a throw-in sound is output as part of the throw-in effect, in addition to outputting the throw-in sound, an image indicating the throw-in may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the throw-in has been made.
In addition, although the winning effect is described as being a payout sound output and a back lamp effect, an image indicating that a prize has been won (for example, displaying "GET") may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the player that a prize has been won. In this case, when the throw-in effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 as the winning effect or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp as the throw-in effect may not be executed.
In addition, although the settlement effect includes the output of a settlement sound and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, an image indicating that the settlement process is in progress (for example, a message indicating that settlement is in progress) may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify that the settlement is in progress. In this case, when the coin insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated as the settlement effect, or the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp as the coin insertion effect may not be executed.
Also, although a payout is performed for the push order role, it may also be performed for other minor roles (such as a watermelon role, a bell role that does not require a push order, or a cherry role). For other minor roles, a payout sound different from the push order role or a backlight effect different from the push order role is output, making it easy to recognize that a role different from the push order role has been won.
Furthermore, the time and length of the period in the slot machine PS1 are merely examples and can be changed in various ways.

<Explanation of Errors and Winning Effects Related to the Hopper 44 Applicable to the Assumed Slot Machine PS1>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 applicable to the slot machine PS1 and winning effects will be described.

The effects applicable to the slot machine PS1 described below are intended to allow the player to recognize the results of the game or the effects before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning effect occurs upon the start of a payout process or an effect occurs after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to hopper 44 errors and winning effects applicable to the assumed slot machine PS1.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the explanation of the underlying slot machine PS1 and the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects applicable to the underlying slot machine PS1, but details of the processing omitted in the description of the underlying slot machine PS1 will be explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor winning combination (the symbol combination that has stopped and been displayed) when the winning determination process determines that a minor winning combination has been achieved. Paying out game medals here means adding credits if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, and paying out game medals from the hopper 44 if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit. To pay out game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal (ON state) to the hopper motor, and then rotates the turntable to eject game medals one by one. When the payout sensor detects a game medal for a predetermined period of time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it determines that one game medal has been paid out. Furthermore, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether by adding credits or by paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as displaying the number of medals won and the cumulative number. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay). When there is a loss or when there is a win in a replay, information on the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Errors related to hopper 44>
A hopper accumulation error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected as errors related to the hopper 44. A hopper accumulation error is an error that occurs when it is determined that a payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when game medals are paid out, a hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the hopper is empty of game medals, and an abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44.
When the main control means detects an error and issues an error notification, it sends an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and when the error is resolved, it sends an error recovery command. Based on the error notification start command, the sub-control means displays error information corresponding to the type of error detected (an error screen) on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, it ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred.
In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper accumulation error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor, which rotates the turntable to dispense the game medals, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect a game medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals have become clogged, and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor and the game medal dispensing operation to rotate the turntable is performed, if no game medals are detected by the dispensing sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Abnormality detection error>
When the payout sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the machine is not in a state where a game medal should be paid out, it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is displayed when no game is being played (when waiting for the insertion of a game medal or when waiting for the start lever to be operated).

<Secondary control means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role lottery (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during AT, winning effects can be executed, result screens can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, etc.

<Winning performance>
This effect is executed when game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals will be paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals acquired by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance>
The win display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during the AT, and as a result of operating the buttons in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is made. The win display effect may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the number of game medals to be paid out, or as "GET 12" so that it is specifically specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If a push order role is won during the AT and the buttons are not operated in the correct push order, an incorrect symbol combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be made (such as the payout of one medal, which is a payout of fewer game medals than the correct symbol combination), but in that case the win display effect is not executed.
The winning display effect begins when a payout start command is received and runs for a predetermined winning display effect period (1 second), which is shorter than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (the period during which payout processing is being performed). Therefore, it runs even if all of the game medals that are actually to be paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the winning display effect from being canceled when the next game begins or being confused with the result of the next game if it were to run after all of the game medals have been paid out. Furthermore, by running the winning display effect even if all of the game medals have not been paid out, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that they will receive a payout) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is an effect that is executed when the cumulative number of game medals won by a player during an AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a specified number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of medals won is counted from the start of an AT during one AT, and when it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed 500 due to the payout of game medals, the cumulative display effect is executed (started). Thereafter, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. The cumulative display effect is displayed in the form of "GET 500 medals" or the like depending on the specified number.
The cumulative display effect is initiated when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout. It is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which actual payouts are being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). Like the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the number of game medals actually paid out to the player does not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent variations in the timing of the cumulative display effect if it is executed when the specified number is actually exceeded, which could result in the effect being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game. Furthermore, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number has not been exceeded, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
It should be noted that although the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be satisfied in one game, in this example, in a game where the cumulative display effect can be executed, in principle, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, cases where the acquisition display effect is executed in a manner different from the principle will be described later.

<Results screen display>
The result screen displayed in this example is the screen displayed when the AT ends, and displays the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games indicating the duration of the AT, and so on. When the result screen is displayed, a warning display (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the command to stop all reels is received), the result screen begins to be displayed and continues to be displayed until the next game begins. Note that while the result screen is displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed; even if any of the specified numbers is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order combination is won and the correct push order is performed, the correct symbol combination stops, a favorable payout is made, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, the cumulative display effect is executed if it is not the final game. However, if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, and the acquisition display effect is executed without the cumulative display effect. This is because the result screen displays the total number of game medals won during the AT, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Result announcement performance>
The result notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is an effect executed in the final game of a series of consecutive effects. Specifically, it is an effect for notifying the player whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional bonus such as the number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chances of additional bonuses. As an example, whether an advantageous result has been obtained is notified based on the outcome of a battle effect or the like. If an advantageous result is obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result is not obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, a lever operation is triggered to display a screen in which an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, and after all reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the ally character and the enemy character compete, and after a certain amount of time has passed and the effect branches, an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed. The timing for branching the effects occurs 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image indicating success or victory or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed, which occurs 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This allows the result notification effect to end before a hopper empty error occurs (is detected) and an error screen is displayed, allowing the player to confirm whether or not they have achieved a favorable result regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that the all-reel stop command and the payout start command are sent at approximately the same time, so the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be explained below with reference to Figures 42 to 47. Figure 42 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Figure 43 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Figure 44 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Figure 45 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Figure 46 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Figure 47 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs).
42 to 44, ON and OFF are used for ease of explanation, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is written in parentheses. Specifically, ON for the payout process indicates a running state, OFF indicates a not-run state, and changing from OFF to ON means that the process has started, and changing from ON to OFF means that it has ended. ON for payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON for the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON for the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (the effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the effect has ended and the display has stopped on the screen announcing the result). ON for error (empty hopper) and error (hopper stuck) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. The error display ON indicates that an error has occurred and an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means, while OFF indicates that neither an error code nor an error screen is displayed.

Figures 45 to 47 show cases where the acquisition display effect is executed. When the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

The previously explained winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects can be combined, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 37 to 39 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 42. Time t5 in Figures 37 and 38 is later than time t1 in Figure 42 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment is successful>
As shown in FIG. 42 , the main control means initiates the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means initiates the winning display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. One second later, at time t14, the sub-control means terminates the winning display effect or the cumulative display effect. Then, at time t1, the main control means terminates the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The payout process takes approximately 1.5 seconds if executed normally (in this example, 12 medals are successfully paid out). The required time varies slightly depending on the number of medals paid out and whether the payout process only adds credits or includes the payout of medals from the hopper. The winning display effect begins when the payout process begins and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that medals will be acquired and that the cumulative number of medals won will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. Because the result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, it is already in progress when the payout process begins. At time t15, the result notification effect branches off, and the display from this point onwards differs between displaying an image indicating success or victory and displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When normal dispensing is not performed (hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 43 , the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the win display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t10, the payout process is executed, but because there are no game medals in the hopper 44, no game medals are paid out and the spinning wheel continues to rotate. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At other times t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 42 , the win display effect or the cumulative display effect ends at time t14, the effect branching occurs at time t15, and the result announcement effect ends at time t16. The period for executing the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect and the period for ending the result notification effect are set shorter than the period from the start of payout processing until a hopper empty error occurs, so that it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect, the cumulative display effect and the result notification effect before the hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed.
Note that Figure 43 shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out.

<When delivery is not performed normally (when a hopper congestion error occurs)>
As shown in Figure 44, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of game medals is not executed because the discharge outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect game medals for more than 201 ms from the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that game medals are clogged, terminates the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect that was being executed, as well as the result notification effect that was also being executed, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the timing when the payout process starts, and is executed before the payout process starts and a hopper congestion error occurs, so it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed.
Note that Figure 44 shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs after not a single medal has been paid out since the start of the payout process; if a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect are executed will be longer.

Although it was stated above that the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect will not be displayed if the effect itself is canceled, the effect itself can be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect, making the effect invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared while an effect is being executed, the effect being executed will become visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, clearing the error requires operating the reset switch, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Since it usually takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result announcement effect before the error can be cleared, even if a hopper congestion error occurs and the hopper congestion error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect will not be restored while they are being executed, but will be restored on the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payment is successful>
Figure 45 shows an example of a display screen when a payout has been made normally. Figure 45 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals won, and a battle effect (result announcement effect) is being executed. The number of games remaining is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and it is displayed as 10G (games)). The total number of game medals won in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Ally characters (characters indicated by round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters indicated by star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure 45(a) shows the screen when all reels have stopped during the battle effect (when the command to stop all reels is received); from this point onwards, the effect progresses to announce the results. Figure 45(b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 42, when the payout process has begun. One medal is paid out, increasing the total number of medals from 230 to 231, and the "GET 12" display moves from the right side of the screen towards the centre as an acquisition display effect, indicating that 12 medals will be paid out. In the centre of the screen, a competition between ally and enemy characters has begun. Figure 45(c) shows the time when three medals have been paid out; the "GET 12" display appears in large letters in the centre of the screen as an acquisition display effect, indicating that 12 medals will be paid out. The competition between ally and enemy characters continues.

Figure 42 (d) shows the timing when eight medals have been paid out, and the large "Get 12 medals" display in the center of the screen moves toward the left side of the screen as the acquisition display effect ends. Figure 42 (e) shows the timing at time t15 in Figure 42, when the payout of medals has ended and the effect branching occurs. Because the payout of medals has ended, the total number of medals displayed is 242. In the center of the screen, the competition between the ally character and enemy character continues. Figure 42 (f) shows the timing after the effect branching occurs, and the process of displaying an image indicating success is displayed. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and enemy character, making it clear that the result is a success. Figure 42 (g) shows the timing at time t16 in Figure 42, when the battle effect ends. The word "Success" is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen, clearly indicating that the effect was a success. Although the image displayed in Figure 42 (g) ends as an effect, it will continue to be displayed until the next game begins. Figure 42 (h) shows the timing after the branching effect, showing the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged as he competes with his ally character, making it clear that he has failed. Figure 42 (i) shows the timing at time t16 in Figure 42, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, clearly indicating that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure 42 (i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next play begins.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper empty error occurs)>
Figure 46 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). Figures (a) through (i) show the same flow of the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification display as Figure 45. However, because no game medals have been paid out since the payout process began, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. Figure 46 (j) shows the timing at time t17 in Figure 43, when no game medals are detected for 3.5 seconds after the payout process began, causing the main control means to set a hopper empty error and the sub-control means to display an error screen indicating the hopper empty error. The same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper retention error)>
Figure 47 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper jam error occurs). Figures 47(a) through 47(c) show the same flow of the acquisition display, cumulative display, and result notification display as Figure 45. However, because no game medals have been paid out since the payout process began, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. Figure 47(k) shows the timing at time t18 in Figure 44, when a hopper jam error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper jam error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect jamming for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that game medals have jammed and sets a hopper jam error. After setting the hopper jam error, the main control means sends a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jam error to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the command indicating the occurrence of a hopper jam error, the sub-control means displays a screen indicating the hopper jam error on the display device 32.

<Change of form>
The period for which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are displayed is set to 1 second, which is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) required for a normal payout process, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period (3.5 seconds) required for detecting a hopper empty error. By setting the period longer than the period required for a payout process, the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily viewed by the player.
In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect is executed in the above description, if the conditions for executing both effects are met, the accumulation display effect may be executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. The acquisition display effect ends one second after the start of the payout process, and the accumulation display effect is executed for one second thereafter, so the player can recognize the content of the accumulation display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the winning display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) that executes an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops.

The winning display effect may have multiple variations when a favorable payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed. Specifically, the color and font of the message "GET 12 coins" may be varied depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be varied depending on whether the state is favorable for winning an AT bonus, or during a precursory event for a consecutive bonus or a transition to a bonus-specialized zone. By varying the mode of the winning display effect, the player is notified that gaming medals will be acquired and can be made to anticipate that a favorable situation may occur in the next game or later. Furthermore, the color and font of the message "GET 12 coins" may be varied depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided each time the winning display effect is executed.
Furthermore, the cumulative display effect may have a display mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, in addition to for each specified number. Specifically, when the setting value is set to "2,""4," or "6," if the cumulative number of gaming medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. This may be displayed always when the number exceeds 246, or may be displayed only when a lottery is held and the player wins. By suggesting the setting through the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only can the player be notified of the cumulative number, but information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can also be provided. Only when the setting value is set to "6,""GET666" may be displayed when the cumulative number of gaming medals exceeds 666 for the first time. Furthermore, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. for each specified number may be provided, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or its status may be suggested depending on the displayed display mode.

The acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and are executed without executing the cumulative display effect only when the result screen is displayed, even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds the specified number. However, there may be other situations in which the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect are not executed. Specifically, in a so-called pseudo-bonus situation, the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed. Also, in a pseudo-bonus situation executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Furthermore, the acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed during the preparation period before the AT starts, on the AT start screen, during consecutive effects executed during the AT, or during signs of consecutive effects. The acquisition display effect and cumulative display effect do not need to be executed in an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous zone. By providing for cases in which they are executed or not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the effect state managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

While the execution of the cumulative display effect was previously determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, it may also be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the MY counter value is determined by sending a command indicating the MY counter value from the main control means to the sub-control means after checking the end of the game and when the lever is operated. The MY counter value after checking the end of the game indicates the value after the payout process, and the MY counter value when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. When a payout start command is received as a result of the game, the number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the MY counter value when the lever is operated, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds a specified number. By displaying a value based on the MY counter value as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired before the advantageous period ends.
Although the result announcement effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of a series of effects, it may be an effect executed in one game instead of a series of effects. Also, it is not limited to a battle effect in which a friendly character competes against an enemy character, but may be another effect that associates the result of the effect with an advantageous result for the player, such as whether or not the player wins first prize in a lottery or whether or not the player wins in a maze lottery.

Although the result announcement effect is explained as displaying the result at the effect branching timing as time passes after all reels have stopped, the result may also be displayed by operating an effect button. Specifically, at the effect branching timing (time t15), an image of a switch simulating an effect switch (also referred to as an operation prompt image or operation prompt effect) is displayed, and when the player operates the effect switch, an image indicating success or failure is displayed. By displaying the operation prompt image at the effect branching timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the operation prompt image will be displayed before the error screen is displayed.
Furthermore, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a push button effect may be executed to change the stage of the effect or to announce the number of additional games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped but before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, and the player can operate it to change the stage of the effect or announce the number of additional games. It is possible to recognize that the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed (the push button effect is executed) before the hopper empty error occurs (the error screen is displayed). Furthermore, before the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, an image of the switch simulating the effect switch may be displayed or teased, and it is possible to recognize that the image of the switch simulating the effect switch is displayed as a result of the teasing before the error screen is displayed.

In addition to the result announcement effect and the PUSH button effect, effects such as comment effects may be executed when the stop switch of the final reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, this effect is executed when the push order role is won, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be described.
An interrupt mode is set in the initial setting for the operation of the gaming machine shown in Fig. 5. This setting of the interrupt mode involves making various settings (settings of the main control internal register) to enable timer interrupt processing.
First, the main internal main control registers for enabling timer interrupt processing will be described.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is possible to set the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC (described later). Specifically, it is possible to set the "number" by which the system clock (SCK) is divided and supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143 = approximately 111.8881 KHz becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC.
The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set the number of clocks input from the PTC prescaler setting register before timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz and the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143" and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125," an interrupt flag is set when a clock of approximately 111.8881 kHz (a clock with a cycle of approximately 8.9375 μs) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (described later). When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the interrupt wait monitor register can output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when the interrupt is enabled (when the IFF1 register (described later) is set to "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed.
In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", timer interrupt processing can be executed at a period of 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = approximately 1.117 ms (milliseconds).
Furthermore, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, decremented by one) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after the value is set in the PTC counter setting register.
The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control internal registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area, and when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip is received, a predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1." In this way, when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1," it is referred to as storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "0," it is referred to as clearing the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register that indicates that an interrupt request signal has occurred.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes capable of outputting an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, it becomes capable of outputting an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when interrupts are enabled (when the IFF1 register, described below, is set to "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed. When timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this can be before, simultaneously with, or after the timer interrupt processing is executed), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, if the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, described later, is "0"), an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, but timer interrupt processing is not executed. Thus, if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed because the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register, described later, is "0"), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is retained (not cleared). Also, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt request notification signal continues to be output to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupt is enabled (the IFF1 register described later is "1"), and when the timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this may be immediately before the timer interrupt processing is executed, at the same time as the timer interrupt processing is executed, or immediately after the timer interrupt processing is executed), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared.
The initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register does not store any information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated).

Next, we will explain the interrupt registers that manage the interrupt disabled and enabled states.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register that is included in the main control chip (for example, the main control CPU).
The interrupt register manages the interrupt-related states (also referred to as interrupt states), that is, the "interrupt disabled state (also referred to as the interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period)" and the "interrupt enabled state (also referred to as the interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period)." Specifically, the interrupt registers include the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register, and the value of the IFF1 register is used to manage the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state. Therefore, a description of the IFF2 register will be omitted. Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, timer interrupt processing can be executed.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, timer interrupt processing is not executed.
In other words, the interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0", and the interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that disables interrupts (for example, the "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that permits an interrupt (for example, an "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when the timer interrupt process is executed (either immediately before the timer interrupt process is executed, simultaneously with the timer interrupt process is executed, or immediately after the timer interrupt process is executed).
In other words, the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing refers to the state from the execution of an instruction to prohibit interrupts to the execution of an instruction to allow interrupts, and the interrupt prohibition state accompanying the execution of timer interrupt processing refers to the state from the execution of timer interrupt processing to the execution of an instruction to allow interrupts.
The initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0." Therefore, the state from when the power is turned on until the instruction that allows interrupts is executed can also be said to be an interrupt disabled state.
On the other hand, the interrupt enabled state refers to a state in which the interrupt is not disabled.

Now, let's return to the explanation of setting the interrupt mode in the initial settings for the gaming machine's operation in Figure 5. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, a value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

In this way, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register when the interrupt mode is set, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated cyclically from "125" to "1" as follows: "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ... Note that after the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings for the gaming machine's operation in Figure 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to continue to be updated even when other programs (processes/instructions) are being executed. The timing when the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as the 8-bit counter PTC value timing out.

After the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow interrupts has been issued. Here, the command to allow interrupts is preferably issued after the RAM check process has determined whether the checksums of all RAM are normal (after the power-off recovery data in Figure 5 is normal or recoverable). For example, the command to allow interrupts could be executed by "Start interrupt processing" in Figure 8, or by "Turn on the setting value display LED that displays the saved setting value data" in Figure 10.

In this way, if the 8-bit counter is configured to start updating before the RAM check process (determining whether the RAM before power loss is the same as the RAM after power is restored), the 8-bit counter can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register) than if the 8-bit counter update is started after the RAM check process, so timer interrupt processing can be executed without delay when a command is issued to allow an interrupt to be executed after a RAM abnormality is determined.

In the slot machine PS1 used as the premise, "143" was stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when the interrupt mode was set, but the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register does not have to be executed. Specifically, it is also possible to set the interrupt period by taking advantage of the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, if the system clock is configured to be 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250," so the timer interrupt processing period can be appropriately determined by storing any value in the PTC counter setting register. Below are examples of timer interrupt processing periods according to the values stored in the PTC counter setting register.
a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds).
a) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 2 ms (milliseconds).
c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 1 ms (millisecond).

In this way, even if the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing a value in the PTC counter setting register. In other words, if you want to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is initially updated based on the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register. If a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register is then stored, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC will be updated based on the frequency corresponding to the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. In such a case, the update period of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC will become inconsistent, leading to failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, failure of the main control chip can be prevented by storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be explained using a simple program example.
48A shows a program for the game progress main processing. The "DI" command is a command for prohibiting maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt prohibiting command). The "EI" command is a command for permitting maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt permitting command).
Additionally, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary commands (programs).

In FIG. 48A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
When the subsequent instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", "..." are executed, the IFF1 register remains at "0".
Thereafter, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1" and the interrupt is enabled.
In other words, the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction is an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt process is not executable immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is the instruction one step ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed.
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt process can be executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (even if the interrupt process does not start immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.
With this configuration, even if the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts is executed, the interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed, so that the instruction following the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts can be executed reliably. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction for executing a program at a return address) such as a "RET" instruction may be used as the instruction following the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts, and even if there is an instruction that permits interrupts, the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction is executed, so that the instruction following the instruction "EI" that permits interrupts can be executed reliably.

In addition, examples of commands to prohibit interrupts and commands to allow interrupts in the game progress main process include:
a) When sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing the command to a memory area in RAM, and then a command to allow interrupts is executed. b) When turning the blocker ON (medal acceptance permitted state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information to turn the blocker ON to a memory area in RAM and a process of writing information to turn the medal insertion permitted lamp on to a memory area in RAM, and then a command to allow interrupts is executed. c) When turning the blocker OFF (medal acceptance refused state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information to turn the blocker OFF to a memory area in RAM and a process of writing information to turn the medal insertion permitted lamp off to a memory area in RAM, and then a command to allow interrupts is executed.
In addition, when providing an instruction to prohibit an interrupt and an instruction to permit an interrupt, the instructions are not limited to the above-mentioned a) to c), and an instruction to prohibit an interrupt and an instruction to permit an interrupt may be provided as appropriate.

Such an interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is provided to prevent, for example, RAM data from being changed or a process involving a malfunction based on RAM data from being executed due to the execution of a timer interrupt process while a process consisting of multiple commands (command A, command B, ..., command Z) is being executed.
In addition, the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is set to the interrupt prohibition state by an instruction that prohibits interrupts (for example, a DI instruction), and set to the interrupt permitting state by an instruction that permits interrupts (for example, an EI instruction), but interrupts may be prohibited by an instruction other than the above-mentioned DI instruction, and interrupts may be permitted by an instruction other than the above-mentioned EI instruction.

(B) in Figure 48 shows an interrupt processing program. As with (A) in Figure 48, the "EI" instruction is an instruction (referred to as an instruction to enable interrupts) to enable maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing), and "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", and "..." are optional instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) to end timer interrupt processing, and corresponds to, for example, "RETURN" in Figure 7.

When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the IFF1 register becomes "0". This makes it possible to prevent the next timer interrupt processing from being executed during timer interrupt processing. Note that the "DI" instruction is not required when starting timer interrupt processing.
Furthermore, when the timer interrupt processing ends, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt processing, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction sets the IFF1 register to "1." Note that this "EI" instruction corresponds to "save the interrupt enable flag ON" in FIG. 7.
The IFF1 register also becomes "1" in the "RETI" instruction that follows the "EI" instruction.
In other words, the period from the start of the timer interrupt process to the "EI" command is an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt process is not executable immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is the instruction immediately preceding the "EI" instruction, is executed.
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt processing is configured to become executable after the "RETI" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the start of timer interrupt processing to the "EI" instruction and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (even if the interrupt processing does not start immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.
In this way, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the timer interrupt process can be executed, and if the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the game progress main process can be executed. Therefore, even if the "EI" command that permits an interrupt is executed, the interrupt process is not executed until the next command, "RETI," is executed, thereby preventing the next timer interrupt process from being executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, using (1) in Figure 49, we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored as a value in the PTC counter setting register, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC, and then when an update cycle arrives, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated by 1, such as "m-1", ..., "2", "1", "m", "m-1", "m-2", ... In this way, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC cycles between "m" and "1".

At timing t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m." In other words, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t2. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

The value of the 8-bit counter PTC can also be updated when the 8-bit counter PTC update period arrives, even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. This configuration allows the 8-bit counter PTC to be updated regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, making it possible to execute timer interrupt processing at a fixed interval.

Next, using Figure 49 (2), we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when an interrupt is disabled during the game progress main processing.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, a command to allow interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts allowed).
Since information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t3, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction of the game progress main process based on the instruction that allows the game progress main process to interrupt. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, this can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t4. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

As in Figure 49 (1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the 8-bit counter PTC update period arrives, even while timer interrupt processing is being executed. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for timer interrupt processing, making it possible to execute timer interrupt processing at a fixed period.

In addition, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the 8-bit counter PTC update period arrives, even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state, allowing timer interrupt processing to be executed at regular intervals.

Next, using <Example (1) Showing the Execution Timing of Timer Interrupt Processing> in Figure 50, we will explain the interrupt period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out while interrupts are disabled in the game progress main processing. The normal period of timer interrupt processing (the period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out to the next time the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is defined as "T". Measurement of "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) begins after a value is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, a command to allow interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts allowed).
Since information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t3, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction of the game progress main process based on the instruction that allows the game progress main process to interrupt. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, this can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t4. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t6. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t8. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the period from timing t2 to timing t5 is T. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, if timing t2 is "n×T (n is a natural number)," timing t5 can be expressed as "(n+1)×T." Furthermore, timing t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T."
Furthermore, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing after 'n×T' and before '(n+1)×T'."

First, let's look at the timer interrupt processing executed at timing t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at timing t3 was originally supposed to be executed at timing t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, if timing t2 had not been a time when interrupts were prohibited in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing would have been executed at timing t2. In other words, because timing t2 was a time when interrupts were prohibited in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing was executed at timing t3, when interrupts were subsequently permitted.

Next, let us focus on the timer interrupt process executed at time t5. The timer interrupt process executed at time t5 is executed before "T" has elapsed since time t3. In other words, measurement of the interrupt period "T" has not started from time t3. The timer interrupt process executed at time t5 is configured to be executed when T has elapsed since time t2. In other words, it is configured to be executed based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC, which continues to update the count even when the timer interrupt process is not executed (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register).
In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt process executed at timing t7 is configured to be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register).
In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if a timer interrupt process cannot be executed at the original timer interrupt process period (n x T) due to an interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process, the timer interrupt process after that timer interrupt process can be restored to a state where the timer interrupt process can be executed when the original timer interrupt process period arrives (x x T (where "x" is a natural number)). This can reduce the impact on timer measurements executed within the timer interrupt process (longer timer measurement timing), for example.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times when the IFF1 register is set to 0, using <Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing> in Figure 50.

<Example (2) Showing the Execution Timing of Timer Interrupt Processing> shows what happens when the main game progress processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while interrupts are disabled in the main game progress processing. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal intervals.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt disabled state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, because the interrupt wait monitor register still stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated again. The 8-bit counter continues to update after that.

At timing t4, a command to permit interrupts is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts prohibited) to "1" (interrupts permitted).
Since information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at timing t4, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction in the game progress main process based on the instruction that allows the game progress main process to interrupt. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, this can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t5, the timer interrupt processing ends and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. Specifically, by executing an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), terminates the timer interrupt processing.

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
Thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). This is because the IFF1 register is "1." When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts disabled).

Timer interrupt processing ends at timing t7. Specifically, execution of an instruction within the timer interrupt processing that enables interrupts changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction), ends the timer interrupt processing.

As such, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between timing t1 and timing t4, the interrupt wait monitor register will only store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated once. Note that Figure 50 shows an example in which the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice while the interrupts are disabled. However, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out three or four times while the interrupts are disabled, the interrupt wait monitor register will only store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated once. After the interrupt disable state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times while the interrupts are disabled, the number of timeouts is not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" times ("n" is 2 or more) while in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is configured not to be executed "n" times consecutively (repeatedly) after the state changes from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt processing from being repeated multiple times in succession after the interrupt permission state is changed to the interrupt permission state, and the game progress main processing from being unable to be executed during that time.

Note that in <Example (2) showing the execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in Figure 50, this shows a case where the game progress main processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-disabled state. Similarly, even if the timer interrupt processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while the timer interrupt processing is in an interrupt-disabled state, and the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" (where "n" is 2 or more) while the timer interrupt processing is in an interrupt-disabled state, the timer interrupt processing is configured so that it is not executed "n" consecutive times (repeatedly) (it is executed only once) after the state changes from the interrupt-disabled state to the interrupt-enabled state.

<Program design processing time>
A program is a program consisting of multiple instructions. In this case, the designed processing time from the start of a program to its end can be calculated from the types of instructions from the instruction related to the start of the program (e.g., instruction A) to the instruction related to the end of the program (e.g., instruction Z).

First, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one instruction and the system clock frequency. Specifically, the time required to execute one instruction can be calculated by multiplying the system clock frequency by the number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
Below, the time required to execute one instruction will be explained using a specific instruction when a 16 MHZ system clock is used.
(A) DI
Instruction: Instruction to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(a) EI
Instruction content: Instruction to allow interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(C) DEC (HL)
Instruction: Decrement the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register by 1. Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute the instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when the same system clock frequency is used, the time required to execute one instruction may differ depending on the type of instruction. Also, even when different instructions are executed, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are only a part of the multiple instructions, and there are many other instructions besides the above.
The system clock frequency when the game progress main process is executed is the same as the system clock frequency when the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" command in the game progress main process is the same as the time required to execute the "EI" command in the timer interrupt process.

In other words, the designed processing time of a program can be calculated from the total number of states of multiple instructions from the start of the program to the end of the program. Specifically, it can be calculated by multiplying 1/system clock frequency by total number of states. In other words, since the system clock frequency is uniform within a single gaming machine, a program with a larger total number of states will have a longer designed processing time than a program with a smaller total number of states.

<Designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The design processing time of the timer interrupt processing is the time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing (for example, until the RETI command is executed). However, because the commands to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RWM and the progress of the game, even when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there will be some variation in the processing time of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, because the commands executed in the timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when one timer interrupt processing is executed will differ. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, the average time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing is defined as the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing. The design processing time of the timer interrupt processing is sometimes referred to as the time related to the timer interrupt processing.

<Maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The maximum design time for timer interrupt processing is the same as the design processing time for timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from when the timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends. Also, as mentioned above, even when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there will be some variation in the processing time for timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is defined as the time required to execute the instruction with the largest total number of states from when a single timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends. Note that the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is sometimes also referred to as the maximum time related to timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is the time from the instruction prohibiting interrupts (e.g., a DI instruction) to the instruction permitting interrupts (e.g., an EI instruction) (also referred to as the processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing) (excluding the state from when the power is turned on to the execution of the instruction permitting interrupts). However, because the instructions executed differ depending on the information stored in RAM and the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even when the game progress main processing is executed normally. Therefore, the processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing varies to some extent. In other words, because the instructions executed in the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing are not necessarily the same, the total number of states when the interrupt prohibition state is executed in the game progress main processing differs. Therefore, the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is defined as the average time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing when the game progress main processing is executed normally.

Furthermore, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is defined as the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing. Note that the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes referred to as the time associated with the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Maximum design processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing, the time required to execute the command with the largest total number of states from the start of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibited state is set as the maximum design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

Furthermore, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is designated as the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited section in the game progress main processing. Note that the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes also referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the designed processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time for the interrupt-prohibited state in the main game progress processing is "S'", it is preferable to configure it so that T >S' is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt periods while the interrupt prohibition state is being executed in the game progress main processing. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed becomes less) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum processing time in the design of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt processing (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time for the interrupt-prohibited state in the game progress main processing is "S", it is preferable that T > S.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of multiple timer interrupt periods while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is being executed, compared to when T>S'(S' is the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing). In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed becomes fewer) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between timer interrupt period and timer interrupt processing time>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is "t'", it is preferable that T/2 >t'. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, when the timer interrupt processing period arrives, the timer interrupt processing is executed, and then the game progress main processing can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the next timer interrupt processing period arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main processing can be executed from being too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum processing time in the timer interrupt process design>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process is "t", it is preferable that T/2 > t. In other words, it is preferable to configure the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, compared to when T/2>t'(t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing), it is possible to execute the timer interrupt processing when the timer interrupt processing period arrives, and then execute the game progress main processing for a period longer than T/2 until the next timer interrupt processing period arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main processing can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<< Pachinko gaming machines >>
Next, we will explain a pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied, as described below. Note that the step numbers, symbols, terms, etc. in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to this example are different from the step numbers, symbols, terms, etc. in the embodiment of the slot machine according to this example, and it should be noted that even if the same step numbers, symbols, terms, etc. are used, they are not the same (processing, functions, components, etc.). In other words, the slot machine and the pachinko gaming machine will be explained using independent step numbers, symbols, terms, etc.

(Prerequisite technology)
The pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "base technology") that is the premise of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. As a representative example of a pachinko gaming machine relating to the base technology, a pachinko gaming machine is shown in Figures 51 and 53, and the game board provided in this pachinko gaming machine is shown in Figure 54. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to these figures. Note that in the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in Figure 52 will be referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction, respectively.

[Pachinko machine configuration]
First, we will explain the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine P. As shown in Figures 51 and 52, the pachinko gaming machine P has a rectangular outer shape, and is fixed in the gaming facility. A front frame P2, which is rectangular and sized to fit the opening of the outer frame P1, is attached to the front of the opening of the outer frame P1 by upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) arranged on the left front edge of each frame, allowing it to be opened and closed sideways and to be attached and detached.

The game board P5 and glass frame P3 are removably set in the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 is rectangular and is attached and held in place on the front side of the front frame P2 using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) so that it can be opened and closed sideways and detachably attached. The game board P5 is removably set in the front side of the front frame P2, and is configured so that a player can see the game area P501 on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3, which is held closed. Furthermore, by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 located on the right edge of the front of the pachinko gaming machine P and rotating the front frame P2 and glass frame P3 either left or right, the outer frame P1 and front frame P2 are unlocked, or the front frame P2 and glass frame P3 are unlocked, depending on the direction of rotation. As a specific example, inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking unit P30 and turning it clockwise unlocks the outer frame P1 and front frame P2, and inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking unit P30 and turning it counterclockwise unlocks the front frame P2 and glass frame P3.

The lower part of the glass frame P3 is provided with upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls. The glass frame P3 also has a performance lamp P350 that lights up depending on the game's development, and a speaker P370 that can output sound effects and other sounds depending on the game's development. A performance operation means P380 for performing specified performance operations is attached to the center of the lower part of the glass frame P3. The performance operation means P380 possessed by this pachinko game machine shown as the prerequisite technology includes a push-in input button P381 and a tilt-in operation lever P382. The button P381 can be operated by the player at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame-movable device P360) provided on the glass frame, and allows operation input when the operation means itself is displaced to a protruding state (input-permitted state) (multiple operations are possible with one performance operation means).

A handle P204 is provided at the bottom right of the front frame P2 for operating the game ball launch and adjusting the launch strength. The bottom of the front frame P2 is also equipped with a launcher unit P240, which (not shown) includes a ball feed mechanism P241 that sends out game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, a launcher P242 with a launch mechanism (a hitting hammer driven by a rotary solenoid) that shoots game balls sent out from this ball feed mechanism toward the play area P501, and a launch control board P243 that synchronously controls the operation of the ball feed mechanism P241 and the launcher P242.

As shown in Figure 54, the game board P5 (game board unit) is constructed using a base material formed into a rectangular flat plate using transparent synthetic resin or wood. Note that Figure 51 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, as seen from the front side, and Figure 54 shows an oblique view of the game board unit P5. Figure 54 illustrates the state in which the performance device P560 (also called a "movable performance device," "performance movable body," "performance movable device," "performance movable object," etc.) provided on the game board unit is in operation. The front surface of the game board P5 is provided with an arc-shaped outer rail P502 arranged from the lower left to the upper right, an arc-shaped inner rail P503 arranged from near the bottom center of the game board to the inside of the outer rail P502 from the lower left to the upper left, and a rail ornament P504 arranged between the end of the outer rail P502 at the upper right and the bottom of the board surface and formed in a curved shape that opens toward the left, and a substantially circular game area P501 is defined and formed inside the outer rail P502, the inner rail P503, and the rail ornament P504. This game area P501 is based on a center role P540 (described later) arranged approximately in the center, and has a left area P501L (left-hitting area) that is the area to the left of the center role P540, and a right area P501R (right-hitting area) that is the area to the right of the center role P540. Additionally, the outer rail and inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game balls launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, various ball entry devices (referred to as "entry devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a first start entry port P711 (first start entry port), a second start entry port P721 (second start entry port), a general entry port P731, a general operation port P741 (a general operation gate device), and a large entry port P751 (attacker) are arranged, along with numerous game nails P510 and windmills P511 (not shown). Note that there may be one large entry port, or multiple large entry ports may be configured. Furthermore, in this specification, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is referred to as "entering" or "winning (especially when a prize ball is generated)" in relation to ball entry devices that are configured so that the game ball is discharged after entering the ball entry device, or balls that enter the ball entry device and then flow down through the game area P501 (gate type), and when a game ball flows down into a downstream game area, such as a gate type ball entry port, it is sometimes described as "passing through." Furthermore, the ball entry device may be referred to as the ball entry port, and the winning device as the winning port.

In addition, at the bottom right of the game area P501, there are a number of main control display devices P50, including a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52, and a normal symbol display device P53, all of which are controlled by the main control board (described below). A center device P540 is located approximately in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is visible through the opening of this center device P540. Above this center device P540, there is a performance device P560 (movable device) that performs performance operations according to the game's development. At the bottom end of the game area P501, there is an outlet P790 through which game balls that flow down without entering the winning holes of the various ball entry devices can pass. Game balls that enter the winning ports of various winning devices or that flow into the outlet P790 flow down to the rear side of the game board P5 through through holes (not shown) that penetrate the game board P5 from front to back, are collected in a recovery flow path (used ball passage) below the front frame P2, and are discharged from the game machine after passing through an outlet ball sensor P792 (fired ball count sensor) located below the front frame to detect the total number of game balls that have been fired.

The first start winning device P710 is provided as a start winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning port P711 into which a gaming ball can enter. The entry of a gaming ball into the first start winning port P711 triggers the acquisition of a random number used in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the lottery for the first special symbol is held based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning port P711, either immediately after the ball enters or after a holding period has elapsed.

The second start winning device P720 is provided as a start winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start winning device P720 is provided with a second start winning port P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a normal electric device P770, which is a movable body that switches to a state that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second start winning port P721 if the game ball is won in the normal symbol lottery described below. The entry of a game ball into the second start winning port P721 triggers a random number used in the lottery for the second special symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning port P721, either immediately after the ball enters or after a holding period has elapsed. The second start winning device P721 changes between an open state, in which the game ball can or easily enters the second start winning port P721, and a closed state, in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the second start winning port P721, due to the action of the normal electric device P770. In other words, the second start winning device P720 is designed to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning port unless it is displaced into the open state, and when it is displaced into the open state by a predetermined trigger (a trigger when the normal pattern lottery is won), described below, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter. Note that various structures of the normal electric device P770 are known, and some are not designed to change the ease of ball entry by opening the movable body P771. Therefore, the "open state" and "closed state" may be referred to as the "easy ball entry state (easy ball entry mode)" and the "difficult ball entry state (difficult ball entry mode)," respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left-side general winning device P730L located in the left-hand hitting area P501L and a right-side general winning device P730R located in the right-hand hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this underlying technology, the left-side general winning device P730L is configured as a single unit consisting of three general winning ports P731La-P731Lc, while the right-side general winning device P730R is configured as part of the big winning device P750 described below. Entry of a game ball into the general winning port P731 triggers the payout of a prize ball, just like with other winning devices. Note that the number and location of the general winning ports P731 in the underlying pachinko gaming machine are merely examples, and they may be configured to be located only in the right-hand hitting area P501R, for example.

The normal symbol activation gate device P740 (normal symbol activation port) is provided as a starting ball entry port for normal symbol games. This normal symbol activation gate device P740 is provided with an activation gate P741 through which game balls can pass, and is configured so that entering game balls can flow further downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of a game ball through the activation gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the second start winning device P720, i.e., whether or not to activate the normal electric device P770. As a variant, it is also possible to configure the aforementioned general winning port P731 to be equipped with the function that triggers the normal symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the function of executing the normal symbol lottery, it is also possible to provide a function for generating prize balls as a single winning device (normal symbol activation winning port).

The big prize device P750 is configured with a big prize opening P751 (special electric device P755) that opens and closes when the result of the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery results in a big prize or small prize, and is sometimes referred to as an "attacker (device)." The big prize device P750 changes between an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the big prize opening P751 (for example, a state in which the special electric device P755 is activated), and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the big prize opening P751 (for example, a state in which the special electric device P755 is not activated). In a big prize game, multiple rounds of play (unit games) are played involving the opening and closing of the big prize opening P751. Furthermore, even when the special electric device P755 is activated, a series of activation patterns (also called "opening patterns") may cause the movable body P756 that constitutes the large prize opening P751 to close, making it difficult for a ball to enter.

Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big prize device P750 may also be provided with a specific area P760 (called a "V zone" or "V area," or, depending on the function, a "probability fluctuation function activation area" or "continuation area") through which the gaming ball can pass. Examples of functions related to this "specific area" include (a) activating a probability fluctuation function (described below) after a jackpot game in response to passing through a specific area during a jackpot game; (b) activating a device continuous activation device (a flag for continuously activating special electric devices) in response to passing through a specific area during a small jackpot game, thereby granting the right to play a jackpot game; and (c) determining whether or not a subsequent round will be executed based on whether or not a specific area was passed during a specific round during a jackpot game. Additionally, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided in the "specific area," and the flow path may be divided by the action of the opening/closing member P761, so that the game ball passes through the specific area P760 or other non-specific areas. Furthermore, during a jackpot game or a small jackpot game, there may be periods during which passage of the game ball through the specific area P761 is valid and periods during which it is invalid.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the large prize device P750 is located in the right-hand area P501R (right-hit area) of the gaming area P501. Therefore, in a large prize game or a small prize game, when firing a gaming ball toward the gaming area P501, it is easier to get the ball to enter the large prize opening P751 by aiming at the right-hand area P501R, or performing a so-called right-hit.

Next, we will explain the basic structure of the rear side of the assumed pachinko gaming machine P. Attached to the rear side of the front frame is a back set unit P4 with a central window that connects the front and rear sides for attaching the gaming board unit P5. The back set unit P4 is equipped with a storage tank P401 that stores a large number of gaming balls supplied from the gaming facility, a gutter member P402 that allows the gaming balls to flow down from the storage tank P401, a prize ball payout unit P410 that pays out the gaming balls guided by the gutter member, and a rear passage member P403 that allows the gaming balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342. Additionally, a ball removal mechanism (a ball removal operation lever P405 and a valve member P406 that forms a flow path that removes gaming balls from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever) is provided on the ball flow path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340.

Attached to the back side of the game board P5 are a main control board P40 that provides overall control over the game progress of the pachinko gaming machine P, a presentation control board P41 that controls all presentations in accordance with the game progress as controlled by the main control board P40, and an image control board P42 that controls image displays in accordance with the game development. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this underlying technology, the presentation control board P41 and image control board P42 are assembled together with the presentation display device P80 (liquid crystal display device) to form a presentation display unit. On the other hand, attached to the back side of the back set unit P4 are a payout control board P43 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply board P44 (not shown) that receives power from the gaming facility and supplies it to various control boards and electrical and electronic components. To prevent unauthorized modifications, these control boards are housed in an assembled transparent resin board case with a crimped and sealed structure, and are installed in a predetermined position on the back of the game board P5 or the back of the back set unit P4. These control boards and the electrical and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), allowing the pachinko gaming machine P to progress with games and execute presentations.

[Function block]
FIG. 55 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine.

A pachinko gaming machine is configured with functions divided among a power supply board P44 that generates power used within the machine based on AC power supplied from outside the machine, a main control board P40 (main control CPU) that controls the basic game operations and game progress, a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) that acts as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls and the launch of game balls, and a presentation control board P41 that controls presentation operations and processing. Note that the arrows shown in the diagram are divided by function, with solid arrows indicating the upper transmission and reception relationships and dashed arrows indicating the electrical connection relationships.

By operating the power switch P47 provided on the power supply board P44, the power supply board P44 generates and supplies the power required to operate the main control board P40, presentation control board P41, payout control board P43, and the various gaming devices electrically connected to them, as will be described in more detail below. As the power-on operation of the power switch P47 triggers the processing of information related to the gaming machine's settings, the power switch is protected by an open/close cover to prevent unauthorized operation.

The main control board P40 is connected to various detection switches related to the progress of games, such as the first start winning slot P711 (special chart 1 start slot switch P712), the second start winning slot P721 (special chart 2 start slot switch P722), the large winning slot P751 (large winning slot switch P752), the regular chart operation slot P741 (regular chart operation slot switch P742), and other detection switches such as the general winning slot P731 (left side general winning slot, right side general winning slot) and the outlet slot P790, as well as switches and sensors used to manage various games and monitor for fraud, such as the setting key switch P49, vibration detection sensor P72, and magnet sensor P73. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines the control content related to the progress of the game, and outputs information related to the drive mode to gaming devices such as the special electric device drive means P70, which is made up of solenoids etc. and is driven to widen the large prize opening P751 when a big win or small win occurs, and the normal electric device drive means P71, which is driven to put the normal electric device P770 into a state where it is easy for the ball to enter when the normal pattern lottery is won.

Sensors and other devices connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board, and notify the main control board P40 of the occurrence or non-occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection. They also receive information output from terminals called output ports, such as launch permission signals for the special electric role drive means P70, normal electric role drive means P71, and other launch devices P242, and control the respective devices.

The main control board P40 is also connected to the main control display device P50, which displays various information such as special pattern display devices P51 and P52 that display the changing first and second special patterns, a round indicator light P54 that indicates the type of big win or small win (number of rounds), and a status indicator light P55 that indicates the game status, as well as a performance display device P59 that displays the performance of the gaming machine (for example, the base value during normal play, i.e., the ratio of the number of winning balls to the total number of shots). There are many other ways to calculate the "base value," such as excluding winnings from the start winning slot P711, etc.; however, these will be explained separately where necessary for the present invention, and details will be omitted in the description of the underlying pachinko gaming machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices external to the gaming machine via an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, etc., and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of these. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to other control boards within the gaming machine, the presentation control board P41 and the payout control board P43.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control status of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40, and also controls the launch of game balls by the launcher unit P240 in response to operation of the handle P204 by the player. The payout device P410, for example, has a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one as the payout motor P411 rotates. The launcher (launcher unit) P240 is configured to move game balls remaining in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to a launchable position using the ball feed unit P241, and then launch the game balls by striking them with a striking hammer. The payout control board P43 is also equipped with a RAM clear switch P48, which is primarily used to initialize the gaming machine and clear errors that occur during play. Operation information for the RAM clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used to connect the payout control board P43 and the main control board P40.

The performance control board P41 is electrically connected to the performance display device P80, the driving source and position detection sensors (e.g., drive motors, initial position detection sensors, performance position detection sensors) of the performance movable props P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), the performance input device unit P380 (e.g., the performance button P381, performance lever P382, cross key P383, etc., which are the performance operation means P81), and the performance lamp P82 (also referred to as "decorative lamp,""board lamp (P550)," or "frame lamp (P350)"), and transmits and receives various control signals between them. The performance control board P42 and the performance display device P80 may also be connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) that controls the display of the performance display device P80 (e.g., a device that displays images such as a liquid crystal display device). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine based on this premise, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41, but it may also be configured to control the speaker P83 by providing a separate audio control board equipped with an IC or the like for audio control.

Data is sent and received between the main control board P40 and the presentation control board P41 in one direction, from the main control board P40 to the presentation control board P41. Because the one-way data transmission from the main control board P40 to the presentation control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration contained in the presentation control board P41 to the configuration contained in the main control board P40, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the presentation control board P41 cannot reference information generated by the main control board P40 unless that information is transmitted. Note that in the pachinko gaming machine P assumed here, data is sent and received bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as with the data transmission between the main control board P40 and the presentation control board P41, data may also be sent and received in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic gameplay]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko gaming machine P as the prerequisite technology configured as described above will be explained for each game state. The "game state" can be broadly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which it is easier to acquire game balls compared to the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the aim is to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state." Within the normal game state, there are multiple game states that vary in the degree of advantage to the player in acquiring the right to transition to the special game state. Among the multiple normal game states, a state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) is referred to as a "specific game state." The "special game state" refers to the so-called "big hit game" and "small hit game," in which the special electric device driving means P70 is driven by the main control board P40, causing the big prize opening P751 to open, making it easier to obtain game balls.

[Normal gameplay state (low probability/low base state)]
First, the game method and game progress in the normal game state will be explained. Note that the normal game state described here is an explanation of the "normal game state (low probability/low base state)" (see FIG. 56) excluding the specific game state, and describes the game state in a situation where a player generally starts playing. The game method and game progress in the specific game state, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" will be described later.

In the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), the game is played as follows: first, the player operates the handle P204 to launch the game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the assumed pachinko game machine P, in the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), the player operates the handle P204 so that the game ball is launched toward the left-hand area P501L (left-hit area) of the game area.

When a player launches a game ball into the left area P501L of the play area, the launched game ball flows down the play area P501 and is displaced by game pins P510 (also called "obstacle pins" or "nails") and windmills P511 (not shown). The ball either enters (wins) the first start winning slot P711, located approximately in the lower center of the play area P501 of the game board, also known as the "navel," or the general winning slot P731L of the left-side general winning device. Alternatively, the ball may not enter either slot and enter the outlet slot P790 as a played game ball. When the ball enters the first start winning slot P711 or the general winning slot P731, the main control board P40 outputs information (control commands) to the payout control board P43 to issue the number of prize balls specified for each slot, and the player receives new game balls through the payout of prize balls.

Here, a special 1 start port switch P712 is located inside the first start entry port P711, and when a player fires a game ball into the left area P501L in the game area, and the ball enters the first start entry port P711, game ball detection information from the special 1 start port switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives game ball detection information from the special symbol 1 start gate switch P712, it pays out a predetermined number of game balls and also obtains a random number value for conducting a lottery related to the control of the first special symbol. Random number values can be obtained by obtaining a random number generated by a random number generation circuit on an electrical circuit based on game ball detection (hard latch), or by having the control device of the main control board P40 execute a process to obtain a random number value from the previous random number generation circuit when it confirms game ball detection information through software processing, or by obtaining a random number value that has been updated by software (soft latch). Different methods may be used depending on the random number value obtained, or they may be used in combination. Note that if a ball enters a general prize gate, no random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and only prize balls are paid out.

The lottery for controlling the first special symbol is the "special symbol lottery," which includes the "win/lose lottery," "winning symbol lottery," and "variable pattern lottery." The "win/lose lottery" is a process that uses an acquired random number value to determine whether the lottery result is a "jackpot" or a "lose" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may also include a "minor win"). The "winning symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as the "pattern lottery") is a process that determines the display pattern of the stopped display symbols that indicate the win/lose lottery result on the special symbol display device P51 (P52) in the main control display device P50. For one lottery result (jackpot, minor win), one symbol can be determined from multiple stopped display symbols, and the execution mode of the special game for a "jackpot" or "minor win" can be changed depending on the stopped display pattern determined here. The "variation pattern lottery" is a process that determines when the special symbol display device P51 (P52) will display the stop display pattern indicating the result of the win/lose lottery, and determines the time (referred to as the "variation display time" or "variation pattern") during which the variable display indicating that the special symbol lottery has been executed is displayed on the special symbol display device P51 (P52). Different random numbers are typically used for the "win/lose lottery," "win symbol lottery," and "variation pattern lottery," and are referred to as the "win/lose lottery random number," "pattern random number," and "variation pattern random number," respectively. The lottery for controlling the second special symbol, which is conducted based on the detection of a game ball on the special symbol 2 start switch P722, is also a similar "special symbol lottery." The "special symbol lottery" will be explained later.

Returning to the explanation of the game method in the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), in the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), the player fires a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area, causing the game ball to enter the first start winning slot P711, causing a lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol lottery), and a special symbol stop display symbol indicating a "big win" ("small win") is displayed on the special symbol display device, thereby playing a game with the aim of obtaining the right to play a special game.

As mentioned above, during the process in which a player receives a special symbol lottery, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the time determined by the variable pattern lottery. However, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is equipped with a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to the right to execute a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries if a new ball enters the start winning slot (first start winning slot P711, second start winning slot P721) during the period in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The underlying pachinko gaming machine P is equipped with a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to the right to execute a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries if a new ball enters the start winning slot P711. The hold function for the special symbol lottery based on a win in the first start winning slot P711 can hold up to four special symbol lotteries. The hold function can be set for each special symbol, and the pachinko gaming machine P of this underlying technology is also equipped with a hold function for the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol, which can hold random numbers used for up to four special symbol lotteries, separate from the hold function for the first special symbol.

In this way, in the normal game mode (low probability/low base state), the player fires the game ball into the left area P501L of the game area to execute a special pattern lottery for the first special pattern. Then, if the player wins the special pattern lottery and the result is a special game mode such as a "big win" or "small win," and the special pattern display device displays that the player has earned the right to transition to the special game mode, the game mode of the pachinko game machine P transitions to the special game mode.

[Special game state]
Next, we will explain the game method and game progress in the special game state. In the special game state, there are a "big win (game)" and a "small win (game)", but in both cases the special electric device P755 is activated, that is, a drive signal is output from the main control board P40 to the special electric device drive means P70, and the large prize opening P751 becomes a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter. The main difference between them is that the "big win" is based on the operation of the device continuous operation device that activates the special electric device P755 multiple times in succession, while the "small win" ends with a single operation of the special electric device. Another difference is that when the special electric device operates based on the operation of the device continuous operation device (jackpot), the operation of the special electric device P755 can be made to operate in a manner that is more advantageous to the player, specifically, the total opening time of the large prize opening P751 in the operation state of the device continuous operation device (jackpot) is allowed to be up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the large prize opening P751 in the small prize state is limited to 1.8 seconds. The following explanation of the game method and game progress in the special game state will be given using a jackpot as an example.

The progress of special games in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology is composed, in chronological order, of a presentation period called the "special game start demo" (in the case of a jackpot, this is called the "jackpot start demo" or "linked role operation start demo," etc., and in the case of a small jackpot, it is called the "small jackpot start demo") for informing the player that various special games have been won; a period called a "round (game)" (also called a "unit game") during which the special electric device P755 operates once; and a period called the "special game end demo" (in the case of a jackpot, this is called the "jackpot end demo" or "linked role operation end demo," etc., and in the case of a small jackpot, it is called the "small jackpot end demo") for informing the player of the game results (number of game balls won, etc.) during the special game and the type of normal game state (including specific game states) to which the player will transition.

Next, we will explain how to play during each of the special game periods mentioned above. First, during the "special game start demo" period, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the large prize slot P751 is located in the right-hand region P501R (right-hit region) of the game area, and even if a game ball is fired into the left-hand region P501L, which is the same as in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), it is unlikely that the ball will land in the large prize slot P751. Therefore, before the round play begins in the special game, when the large prize slot P751 is in a state where it is easy for the ball to land, a right-hit notification effect is executed using the effect display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and effect lamp P82 to encourage the player to fire a game ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-hit region) of the game area. In response to the right-hit notification, the player increases the amount of operation of the handle P204, adjusting it to increase the strength of the game ball's launch, and changes the launch position so that the game ball flows down into the right-hand area P501R (right-hit area) of the game area (performing a right-hit).

When the "round (game)" period begins, the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology puts the large prize slot P751 into an easy or difficult ball entry state in response to a drive signal output from the main control board P40 to the special electric device drive means P70, and produces effects such as a celebration of winning a large prize (small prize) according to the period during which the special game is being played, or an effect suggesting whether the normal game state to which the player transitions after the special game ends will be a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player. The player fires game balls into the right-hand area P501R (right-hit area) of the game area in order to get a large number of game balls to enter the large prize slot P751.

A single "round (game)" period ends when the opening pattern of the large prize opening (operation mode of the special electric device) determined based on the type of big win (small win) is completed (the opening time has elapsed), or when a predetermined "specified number" of game balls (sometimes expressed as "count" or "C") enter the slot. Then, depending on the type of special game state currently in progress (type of big win or small win), when all rounds to be played have been completed, the game will transition to a "special game end demo" state.

Next, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology will display a presentation announcing the number of game balls acquired during the current special game state, as well as the cumulative number of game balls acquired during multiple special game states that occurred consecutively with the specific game period described below (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability/low base state)). It will also display presentations announcing the type of normal game state to which the player will transition after the special game state, and presentations relating to the game method for the game state to which the player will transition (such as the right-hit notification presentation described above). The player will operate the handle based on the presentation being displayed, in preparation for play according to the type of normal game state to which the player will transition.

In most pachinko gaming machines P, with some exceptions, when a jackpot game is executed in a special gaming state, the normal gaming state transitions to a "specific gaming state" in which the player is more likely to acquire the right to transition to the special gaming state, and the gameplay allows players to enjoy so-called "consecutive wins" by repeatedly switching between the specific gaming state and the special gaming state.

[Specific gaming state]
Next, the "specific game state" will be explained. As shown in Figure 56, there are three specific game states. The elements that distinguish these types are the "probability state" and the "base state," and the specific game state is formed by combining these.

(Probability state)
The "probability state" is based on the operating state of the "probability fluctuation function" (also called "probability change"), which is a function that changes the probability that the result of the lottery in the special symbol lottery will be a "jackpot." When the probability fluctuation function is operating and the win/loss lottery in the special symbol lottery has a higher probability of being a "jackpot" than when it is not operating, it is expressed as a "high probability (state)" (sometimes expressed as a "probability change state" or "probability fluctuation state"), and when the probability fluctuation function is not operating, it is expressed as a "low probability (state)." The "high probability (state)" is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a jackpot for one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" refers to the "base," i.e., the "expected percentage of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired." Generally, a state in which the operation of the normal electric device P770 is easier (more advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is called a "high base (state)" (also called an "electric chute support (electric support) state"). Note that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, even if the "electric chute support function" is not activated, a "high base state" may be described as a state in which the "percentage of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired" increases by switching the recommended game ball firing position. The "high base (state)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that it increases the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (easier to be paid out) during the period leading up to the special game state, allowing the player to aim for the special game state while reducing the consumption of game balls.

The "electric chute support function" is a state in which the activation of the normal electric device P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability/low base state). It is primarily composed of a combination of three functions (at least one of which is included). The three functions that make up the "electric chute support function" are "normal symbol probability change," "normal symbol time reduction," and "(normal electric device) opening extension." "Normal symbol probability change" refers to a state in which the probability of the "normal symbol lottery" resulting in the activation of the normal electric device is high. "Normal symbol time reduction" refers to a state in which the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50 shortens the time from when the normal symbol lottery is executed to when the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed. "Normal electric device opening extension" refers to changing the normal electric device to operate in a manner that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the winning slot associated with the normal electric device P770, depending on the type of winning in the normal symbol lottery. One example would be extending the total time the normal electric device is in a ball-entry-friendly state.

The "normal symbol lottery" differs from the special symbol lottery described above in that while it is a lottery regarding the operation of the special electric device P755, the normal symbol lottery is a lottery regarding the operation of the normal electric device P770, and the lottery is triggered by a game ball entering the normal symbol activation gate device P740. However, they are essentially the same in that the win/loss result, symbol, and variation pattern are determined by lottery and they have a hold function. When specifically referring to the lottery for win/loss, symbol, and variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery, they are expressed with "normal symbol" (or "normal symbol") at the beginning, such as "normal symbol win/loss lottery," "normal symbol symbol lottery," or "normal symbol variation pattern lottery."

We've explained that the "probability state" and "base state" are elements that distinguish between types of "specific game states," but another element that makes up a specific game state is the "time-saving state" (also known as the "variable time-saving state" or the state in which the "variable time-saving function" is activated). Generally, the "time-saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variable pattern) of a special symbol is shortened and the number of special symbol lotteries performed per unit time increases, making it an advantageous state for players in that they can receive more special symbol lotteries per unit time. The "time-saving state" (variable time-saving state) is often controlled simultaneously with the "high probability state" and "electric chute support state" described above, and rarely constitutes a specific game state on its own.

[Specific gaming state 1: low probability/high base state]
Returning to the explanation of the "specific gaming state," we will first explain the progress of the game and the gaming method in specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in Figure 56.

Transition to specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) occurs through the gaming state transitions shown in (1), (8), and (12) in Figure 56. The gaming state transition conditions for (1), (8), and (12) in Figure 56 include (a) winning a jackpot in the respective state, and (b) the passage of a predetermined number of plays (*(8) only). Although not shown, there are also cases where a transition occurs from specific gaming state 1 back to specific gaming state 1 via a jackpot. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a transition occurs as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in Figure 56. The gaming state transition conditions for (2), (7), and (11) include (c) winning a jackpot of a type that will result in a transition to the respective gaming state in specific gaming state 1, and (d) the passage of a predetermined number of plays (*(2) only). Note that "number of plays" refers, by way of example, to "the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed."

When transitioning to specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P activates both the aforementioned "electric chute support function" and "variable time reduction function." The layout of each winning device on the game board P5 of the assumed pachinko gaming machine P is such that the normal symbol activation gate device P740 and the second start winning port P721 for the normal electric device are located in the right-hand region P501R (right-hit region) of the game area, allowing the player to easily enter the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery by "hitting right," which fires the game ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-hit region) of the game area. Furthermore, the assumed pachinko gaming machine P is also controlled in the aforementioned "time reduction state" when in specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is reached, the first step is for the player to fire a game ball into the right area P501R (right-hand hit area) of the game area and have it enter (pass through) the normal symbol operation gate device P740. Entering (passing through) the normal symbol operation gate device P740 triggers a normal symbol lottery on the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) has a high probability of winning (approximately 1/1) due to the activation of the normal symbol probability function, so when one game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol operation gate device P740, one activation of the normal electric device P770 occurs. When the normal electric device P770 is activated, the second start winning slot P721, which triggers the special pattern lottery for the second special pattern in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, enters a ball-entering state, and the player then performs the second step by firing a gaming ball toward the second start winning slot P721. When a gaming ball enters the second start winning slot P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, a special pattern lottery for the second special pattern is executed, and a lottery is held to win the right to play a special game (jackpot, small jackpot).

Specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends when a predetermined number of plays (number of times special symbol lottery draws have been made) have elapsed, depending on the gaming state transition conditions that led to the transition to that state (for example, if a jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot that has been hit, etc.), or when a new jackpot is won (note that there are cases where this state will be transitioned to again after a jackpot). In the case of a small jackpot being won, the specific gaming state often does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, it may be designed to end when a small jackpot is won (or multiple small jackpots are won, or a specific type of small jackpot is won). If specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of plays, the game will transition to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 2: high probability/high base state]
Next, we will explain the progress of the game and the game method in specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in Figure 56.

Transition to specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) occurs through the gaming state transitions shown in (3), (7), and (9) in Figure 56. The gaming state transition conditions for (3), (7), and (9) in Figure 56 are (a) winning a jackpot in each state. Although not shown, there are also cases where a transition occurs from specific gaming state 2 via a jackpot and back to specific gaming state 2. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a transition occurs as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in Figure 56. The gaming state transition conditions for (4), (8), and (10) include (b) winning a jackpot of the type that will result in a transition to the respective gaming state in specific gaming state 2, and (c) the passage of a predetermined number of plays.

When transitioning to specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state), the underlying pachinko gaming machine P differs from specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state) in that the "probability fluctuation function" is activated, resulting in a "high probability (state)." The game progress and playing method in specific gaming state 2 are the same as in specific gaming state 1, with the difference being that players can win a jackpot earlier due to a higher probability of winning the special symbol lottery.

Specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends when a predetermined number of plays (number of times special symbol draws have been made) have elapsed, depending on the gaming state transition conditions that led to the transition to that state (for example, if a jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot that has been hit, etc.), or when a new jackpot is won (note that there are cases where this state will be transitioned to again after a jackpot). Specific gaming state 2 generally does not end if a small jackpot is won. If specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends due to the number of plays, it will transition to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), specific gaming state 1 (low probability/high base state), or specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific gaming state 3: high probability/low base state]
Next, we will explain the progress of the game and the game method in specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in Figure 56.

Transition to specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) occurs through the gaming state transitions shown in (5), (10), and (11) in Figure 56. The gaming state transition conditions for (5), (10), and (11) in Figure 56 include (a) winning a jackpot in the respective state, and (b) the passage of a predetermined number of plays (*(10) only). Although not shown, there are also cases where a transition occurs from specific gaming state 3 back to specific gaming state 3 via a jackpot. On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the special gaming state are met, a transition occurs as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in Figure 56. The gaming state transition conditions for (6), (9), and (12) include (c) winning a jackpot of the type that will result in a transition to the respective gaming state in specific gaming state 3, and (d) the passage of a predetermined number of plays (*(6) only).

When transitioning to specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P enters a "high probability (state)" in which the "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and unlike specific game state 1 and specific game state 2, the "electric chute support function" and "variation time reduction function" are not activated. In the layout configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the normal symbol activation gate device P740 and the second start winning port P721 for the normal electric device are located in the right-hand region P501 (right-hit region) of the game area. However, even if a player performs a "right hit" in specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) by firing a game ball into the right-hand region P501R (right-hit region) of the game area, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is low, and there is no advantage to hitting right.

As a result, players will play by "hitting from the left" by firing the game ball into the left area P501L (left-hit area) of the play area. Because this is a high probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is high, meaning that a jackpot game can be won early. Other than this, the gameplay method and progression will be the same as in the normal play state (low probability/low base state).

Specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends when a predetermined number of plays (number of times special symbol lottery drawings have been made) have elapsed, depending on the gaming state transition conditions that led to the transition to that state (for example, if a jackpot is hit, the type of jackpot that has been hit, etc.), or when a new jackpot is won (note that there are cases where this state will be transitioned to again after a jackpot). Specific gaming state 3 generally does not end if a small jackpot is won. If specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of plays, it will transition to the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state).

Specific gaming state 3 (high probability/low base state) differs from the board layout configuration shown in Figure 56, which is described as the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, in that a third start winning slot that does not have a normal electric device P770 is placed in the right-hand area P501R (right-hitting area), and by activating the "time-saving state," many special symbol lotteries can be drawn in a short period of time. For example, depending on the layout configuration of the winning devices on the gaming board and the control of the time-saving state, it may become a gaming state in which "right-hitting" is recommended.

As explained above, the assumed pachinko gaming machine P allows gameplay to progress through multiple game states, but it does not necessarily have to have all of the game states mentioned above. Therefore, among the gaming machine specifications that are made up of combinations of multiple game states, examples of gaming machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted by the assumed pachinko gaming machine P are listed below.

Regarding typical gaming machine specifications ("specs"), examples of gaming machine specifications related to the activation of the probability variation function for special symbol lotteries include "(Until Next Time) Probability Variation," "ST (Number-Limit Probability Variation)," "V Probability Variation (also known as "Ball Probability" or "Attack Round System")," and "Latent Probability Variation." Differences in gaming machine specifications due to these differences in probability variation functions are sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is an XX machine (e.g., an ST machine)." Additionally, gaming machines without a probability variation function also have a gaming machine specification called "Small Win V," in which, when a ball passes through a specific area P760 inside the large prize opening P751 during a small win game, the device that continuously operates the special device is then activated (i.e., the game transitions to a big win game).

[(Until next time) chance]
First, let us explain "probability change (until next time).""Probability change until next time" generally refers to the gaming machine specifications for a pachinko gaming machine in which "specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next jackpot game is acquired," as the most advantageous gaming state among the multiple specific gaming states provided in the pachinko gaming machine P. In other words, a gaming machine with "probability change until next time" is configured so that specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next jackpot game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol changes, etc.

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be cases where the machine is controlled to specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state). Also, even in "pachinko gaming machines in which specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) continues until the right to play the next jackpot is acquired," it is sometimes referred to as "probability change until next time" in the sense that the probability fluctuation function continues until the next jackpot. However, since the base state is a "low base state" and play similar to the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is required with regard to the electric chute support function, it is expressed as "latent probability change" because the probability change continues until the next time when the electric chute support function is not activated.

[ST (number of times cut off probability change)]
Next, we will explain "ST (number cut probability change).""ST" is an abbreviation for "Special Time," and generally indicates the gaming machine specifications for a pachinko gaming machine in which "specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries are performed (a predetermined number of symbol variations are executed) or until the right to play a jackpot game is acquired."

Depending on the type of jackpot, there may be cases where the game state is controlled to specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) or specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state). Similar to the "probability change until next time" mentioned above, it is also possible to configure the game state to have a state called "latent probability change (latent ST)" when the game state is controlled to specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) until a predetermined number of special symbol drawings are performed or until the right to play a jackpot is acquired.

Also, even if the game is in "ST (limited number of times guaranteed probability change)", if the period during which the game state is controlled by ST is set to "until 10,000 special symbol lottery draws have been performed", and the gaming machine is designed in such a way that a jackpot is essentially guaranteed by the next time due to a high probability of success, it may be expressed as "probable probability change until next time".

As explained above, "Kakuhen until next time" and "ST (Stop chance)" are distinguished as "Kakuhen states" in terms of gaming machine specifications in that the end times of the probability fluctuation function for special symbol lottery are different. On the other hand, as in the case of "V Kakuhen (Kakuten ball, Attack Round System)" described below, gaming machine specifications ("specs") can also be expressed by requiring special conditions for whether or not the probability fluctuation function for special symbol lottery is activated in a specific gaming state, i.e., for the probability fluctuation function to begin executing.

[V chance]
Next, we will explain the gaming machine specification called "V probability change.""V probability change" refers to a gaming machine specification for a pachinko machine that controls the transition to a specific gaming state (specific gaming state 1 or specific gaming state 3) with the activation of a probability fluctuation function after a jackpot game when a game ball passes through a "specific area P750" (sometimes called a "V zone" or "V area") provided within the large prize winning slot P751 under predetermined conditions (such as during a specific jackpot round) during a jackpot game before the gaming state transitions to a specific gaming state. The "specific area" used in "V probability change" is sometimes referred to as the "probability fluctuation function activation area."

As mentioned above, "V Probability Change" is a gaming machine specification indicating that whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated depends on the game result during jackpot play (whether or not the gaming ball passes through specific area P760), and depending on whether the activated probability fluctuation function ends with control equivalent to the previously explained "Probability Change Until Next Time" or with control equivalent to "ST," different expressions are used to indicate gaming machine specifications such as "V Probability Change (V-Loop)" or "V-ST."

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines P that use "V probability variation" as a gaming machine specification, if a V does not land during a jackpot game, the probability variation function will not be activated after the jackpot game, and the game will be controlled to normal gaming mode or specific gaming mode 1 (low probability/high base state). Furthermore, whether or not a V win will result in a gaming mode in which the probability variation function is activated after a jackpot game can be switched between cases where a V win is achieved and where a V win is not achieved, and at the same time, the operating mode of the electric chute support function can also be changed. As an example, in a "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if a V win is achieved, the probability variation function and electric chute support function will continue until the next jackpot is won; if a V win is not achieved, the probability variation function will not be activated, and the electric chute support function will be limited to 100 special symbol drawings.

[Small Hit V]
Next, we will explain the gaming machine specification (spec) called "Small Win V" which is a gaming machine specification that can provide players with an advantageous gaming state in terms of winning a jackpot without having a probability fluctuation function.

"Small Win V" is a gaming machine specification that activates the continuous device operation device following the small win game, i.e., initiates the jackpot game, when the "specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as the "V zone" or "V area") located inside the large prize opening P751 passes through during the small win game (while the special electric device is operating) that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win. In other words, by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win, it is a gaming machine specification that allows you to win the jackpot game without winning a jackpot result as a result of the special symbol lottery.

"Small Win V" is a type 1 (pachinko) game that activates the continuous device operation device and special electric device as a result of a special symbol lottery, but also activates the continuous device operation device when the machine passes through a specific area P760 while the continuous device operation device is not in operation and the special electric device is in operation (while the large prize opening P751 is open). While it is sometimes referred to as a "Type 1 Small Win V," it is also sometimes referred to as a "Type 1/Type 2 hybrid machine" because its gameplay is similar to the specifications of the so-called "Type 2 pachinko" found in conventional pachinko gaming machines.

Pachinko machines that generally use the "Small Win V" feature do not have a probability variable function (probability fluctuation function), and the degree of advantage changes depending on whether or not the electric chute support function is present. In other words, by configuring the winning slot for the normal electric device P770, which is more likely to win when the electric chute support function is activated, as a starting winning slot that triggers a change in a special pattern that is more likely to win a small win (for example, a 1/2 chance of winning a small win), it becomes easier to win a small win when the electric chute support function is activated, and it becomes possible to aim for a jackpot by winning a V during small win play. In this way, rather than increasing the range of random numbers that result in a jackpot, as with the probability variable function, the gameplay increases the possibility of winning a jackpot through small wins.

[Other gaming machine specifications]
The gaming machine specifications described above are representative, and several other distinctive gaming machine specifications are known, so a brief explanation of these will be provided below.

(limiter)
A "limiter" is a function that limits the operation of the probability variation function or electric chute support function when a specific game state in which the probability variation function or electric chute support function is activated occurs repeatedly, sandwiched between jackpot games (a so-called "consecutive game state"), and when a predetermined number of repetitions (consecutive game counts) is reached, even if a jackpot game that would normally activate the probability variation function or electric chute support function is executed. A limiter function that limits the "probability variation function" based on the number of consecutive games is called a "probability change limiter," and a limiter function that limits the "electric chute support function" based on the number of consecutive games is called a "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)." Gaming machines equipped with a limiter function are called "limiter machines."

(Fall)
"Fall" refers to the gaming machine specifications that execute a "fall lottery" to decide whether or not to terminate the probability variation function each time a special symbol lottery is performed while the probability variation function for the special symbol lottery is in operation. When the probability variation function and the electric chute support function are in operation and the fall lottery is won, the operation of the electric chute support function may end along with the termination of the probability variation function, or only the probability variation function may end and the operation of the electric chute support function may continue.

It is possible to combine multiple of the gaming machine specifications described above. For example, if "ST" and "Fall" are combined, when in specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state), if any of the following conditions are met while the player is in specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state): (1) the player wins the fall lottery, (2) the player has drawn special symbols a predetermined number of times, or (3) the player is granted the right to play a jackpot, specific gaming state 2 (high probability/high base state) will end (transition to another gaming state).

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board P40, which controls the progress of play in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P. Note that this explanation is based on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine uses "ST (number cut probability change)" as its specification. Note that in the explanation of the embodiment, the notation "P-s XX" indicating the processing step in the diagram will be expressed as "Step XX" in the main text.

[Main control board power-on process (main control board main loop process)]
The main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on. Here, the power-on process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process begins on the main control board P40 of the pachinko gaming machine P, initial settings related to the operation of the CPU, which is the calculation device provided on the main control board P40, are performed (step 1002). The initial settings are used to appropriately set the necessary settings for subsequent CPU operation, and details of these settings will be omitted here.

Once the CPU initial settings are complete, it then executes input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), and based on the results of these processing, it performs processing related to the game stop state setting processing (step 1008).

Explaining in more detail, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) generates information to determine whether a flag indicating whether the "setting change process" is in a state where a "setting value" for changing the favorability of the special symbol lottery (particularly the activation probability of the consecutive operation device of the bonus device, i.e., the probability of a jackpot) of the pachinko gaming machine P is to be changed, and whether a flag indicating whether the "setting confirmation process" is in a state where the "setting value" is to be confirmed is to be established (turned on) in the game stop state setting process that is performed after the relevant process. In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, one-byte data is generated that includes data indicating the detection status of the frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects whether the front frame is open relative to the outer frame), the detection status of whether the RAM clear switch P48 is being operated by the player, and the detection status of whether the setting key switch P49 is being rotated.

The following power-off information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006) checks whether the pachinko gaming machine P shut down the power normally the last time the power was turned off, and whether the control data related to the game state at the time the power was turned off was properly saved and stored in the memory area of the CPU of the main control board P40.If the data is not normal, an error is detected and a flag is set (turned on) to stop gameplay in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described below.

The "game stop state setting process" (step 1008) is a process that sets a flag to prevent the player from actually being able to play after the power-on process has finished and the process has transitioned to the main loop to begin play. Based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power-off information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), this process sets a flag to transition to one of the following states that do not allow game progress: "setting change state," "setting confirmation state," or "irrecoverable error state." Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in Figure 58, and the following explanation will be based on the description in Figure 58.

The game stop state setting process first determines whether the slot is open (step 1100) based on the one-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). If the front slot P2 of the pachinko gaming machine P is open relative to the outer slot P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), a specific bit in the one-byte data is set to "1," and the subsequent process of step 1102 is skipped. On the other hand, if the slot is not open when the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, it is determined that some of the operations required to execute the setting change process have not been performed, and the operation information of the setting key switch is calculated to be OFF from the one-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Although not shown, in both cases where the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, the bit indicating that the slot is open in the one-byte data is also calculated to be OFF.

In the following step 1104, it is determined whether the one-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) contains information that can be used to determine whether a setting change operation has occurred. In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the following three conditions are required to determine whether a setting change operation has occurred: (1) the frame open switch P131 is on (the frame is open when the power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is on (being rotated), and (3) the RAM clear switch P48 is on. As mentioned above, the frame open switch P131 information in the one-byte data is set to off, and this step determines whether both (2) and (3) are met. For example, if two specific bit data are "1," it is determined that a setting change operation has occurred. (Note that the active data indicating that both switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; one of the data may be "0.") If it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, i.e., if step 1104 returns YES, data indicating "setting change in progress" is stored as the game stop status flag, and the game stop status setting process ends (steps 1106, 1118). On the other hand, if step 1104 returns NO, the process proceeds to the next step 1108. Note that if the setting value information stored in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (if an operation to restore from an unrecoverable error state is being performed), data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set as the initial setting value in the area for storing setting values (step 1118).

Next, in step 1108, a determination is made as to whether a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error refers to an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (changing) of settings when game play cannot proceed, such as a checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or a setting value abnormality. The determination in step 1108 determines whether a game stop state should be set based on the results of the power-off information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006) and the error information stored from the previous power-off process. If it is determined that an error state should be set (YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1110, 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the next step, step 1112.

In the following step 1112, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, the state that progresses to this step is one of the following: (a) an operation to transition to the setting confirmation state has been performed; in other words, among the determinations of "setting change operation performed," (1) the frame open switch P131 is on (frame open when power is turned on), (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the RAM clear switch P48 is on is not; (b) a RAM clear operation to clear data has been performed; in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on is not, and (3) the RAM clear switch P48 is on is; or (c) the power is turned on without any operations such as "setting change operation," "setting confirmation operation," or "RAM clear operation." In these states, the 1-byte data generated by the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is either (a) "1 (on data)" bit data indicating whether the setting key switch P49 is on or off, (b) "1 (on data)" bit data indicating whether the operation detection state of the RAM clear switch P48 is on or off, or (c) the 1-byte data is all off data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch P48 has been operated. If the RAM clear operation has been performed (YES in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine performs a process to clear the game stop state flag to transition to a playable state after clearing the RAM (step 1114). On the other hand, unless the RAM clear operation has been performed, the current one-byte data is set as is. At this time, if an operation to transition to the "setting confirmation state" has been performed (NO in step 1112), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is set to "1," and the one-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation in progress" (step 1118). Furthermore, if neither a RAM clear operation nor a transition to the setting confirmation state has been performed, the one-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is originally data indicating no game stop as the game stop state flag, and is set as no game stop information.

If a value indicating a stopped state is stored for the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), the value indicating the stopped state will be referenced in the interrupt process (step 2000) which is the main control of game progress and is executed after transition to the main loop (steps 1028 to 1036), which is the game-permitted state in the power-on process (step 1000), and the game will enter a state where it is not possible to progress as described as "basic game progress." These controls will be described in the explanation of the interrupt process below.

Returning to the explanation of the power-on process in Figure 57, the following process will now be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) is completed, it is determined whether a RAM clear operation has been performed (step 1010). A RAM clear operation is performed by operating the RAM clear switch P48 when the pachinko gaming machine P is powered on. Note that this process is executed whether the setting key switch P49 is off or on. If it is determined in step 1010 that a RAM clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the RAM memory area of the main control board P40 is initialized.

The following steps 1014 to 1020 involve processing in which, when power is turned on, the main control board P40 sets a presentation control command (presentation command) to the presentation control board P41 to recognize the state of the gaming machine. More specifically, in step 1014, a process is performed in which any presentation control commands that were not sent the last time power was turned off (when a power outage occurred) are cleared from the storage area. Then, in step 1016, information regarding the current game state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power is turned on is generated as a presentation control command, and if it is determined in step 1018 that game play is not stopped, in step 1020, the generated presentation control command indicating the returned game state is set in the area that stores the transmission data for the presentation control command.

When the processing related to setting the performance control commands at power-on is completed, the necessary data (drive signals) are output from the output port to the special electric device drive means P70 and the normal electric device drive means P71 to return the special electric device P751 (special electric device P755) and the normal electric device P770 to their pre-power-off states. (Step 1022)

Then, once the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on process is completed, a process is performed to set the interval at which interrupt processing time occurs for the CPU of the main control board P40 (step 1024). In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the interval at which the interrupt processing (Figure 59, step 2000) described below is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). Once this process is completed, the system transitions to a cyclical process called the main loop, in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclical process in the main loop is repeatedly executed until a power outage occurs.

(Main loop)
As shown in Figure 57, the main loop processing of the main control board first prohibits the occurrence of interrupt processing in step 1026, and restricts the execution of interrupt processing until the main loop processing is completed (until interrupts are permitted in step 1036).

Once interrupts are prohibited, the next step 1028 clears (initializes) the area that stores timing information used to monitor for CPU runaway (such as a situation where processing loops and stops progressing) on the main control board P40, known as a watchdog timer.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (for example, whether a power outage signal sent from the power supply board P44 due to a drop in voltage has been input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If a power outage has occurred, the current game status is stored, and power outage information and checksum information are stored, and power outage processing (step 1032) is executed to stop processing as the CPU of the main control board P40. If a power outage has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process is performed to update the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery and the random number values used in the normal symbol lottery. Note that some of these random number values are updated during the interrupt processing described below, and this process is intended to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant due to the random numbers only being updated during the interrupt processing. Note that if there are processes that are executed irregularly during the interrupt processing, it is possible to prevent the random number update period from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating the random number values in accordance with these processes, so it is not necessary to include the random number update process within the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final step in the main loop, and performs the process of enabling interrupts. Immediately afterwards, processing returns to the first step in the main loop, step 1026, which disables interrupts. However, if, when step 1036, which enables interrupts, receives an input to the CPU of the main control board P40 indicating the interrupt execution period (4 ms has elapsed since the previous interrupt processing occurred), the interrupt processing described below will be executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be explained with reference to Figure 59. In the pachinko gaming machine P, the majority of the progress of the game is controlled by the interrupt processing (step 2000), and the sub-module programs, which are provided so as to be changeable according to the gaming machine specifications (specs), are read out and controlled in a general-purpose, fixed order. The processing related to these sub-modules will be explained briefly below.

(Watchdog timer clear)
The interrupt process begins with a watchdog timer clear process. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 57, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 (step 2002).

(Input port confirmation process)
The input port confirmation process is a process for confirming information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, thereby generating information that can identify whether or not there is input information necessary for making decisions in subsequent processes (step 2004).

The information input to the input port includes input signals related to manual operation, such as input signals indicating the operation status of the RAM clear switch P48 and setting key switch P49, input signals indicating the operation status (touched or not) of the handle P204, input signals indicating the game results based on the detection of game balls by the special chart 1 start gate switch P712 and large prize gate switch P752, and input signals indicating the detection status of sensors installed to monitor for fraud, such as the magnetic sensor P73, door opening sensor P131, and vibration detection sensor P72.

During the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times at 10 μs (microseconds), and any data that is the same (same bits) in all reads is stored in the RAM of the main control board P40 as the input data for the current interrupt (referred to as "level data"). For any portion of the data that is not the same in all three reads, the data determined in the previous interrupt process (the interrupt process 4 ms ago) is used as the level data. In other words, if the data cannot be read correctly in the current interrupt, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Once the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison is made with the input data for the previous interrupt, "rising edge data" (data identifying the bit whose input data changed from off to on) is generated, and the data identifying the switch that changed to on input for this interrupt is stored.

(Random number update process)
The random number update process is a process of updating so-called software random numbers, which are random numbers updated by software, among various random numbers such as the win/loss random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers related to the special symbol lottery, and the win/loss random numbers, normal symbol random numbers, and normal symbol variation pattern random numbers of the normal symbol lottery (step 2006). In the pachinko gaming machine P assumed, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are specified to have some random numbers updated at the circuit update period in the random number generation circuit, and some updated at the software period, and by combining these, the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining the random numbers is maintained.

As mentioned above, the random number update process involves updating soft random numbers. Examples of update methods include: (a) incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) the random number, and setting it to the lower limit (or upper limit) if it exceeds the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range; (b) subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number from the random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) if it exceeds the random number range; and (c) repeatedly incrementing (or decrementing) a random number set as an initial value, and when one cycle of updating is complete, setting a separately updated "initial value random number" as the new initial value and repeating the same update (also known as initial value update random numbers). Note that the update methods are not limited to the examples, and any method that maintains the randomness of the random numbers may be used.

(Setting control process)
The setting control process is carried out when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 57) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting change in progress" or "setting confirmation in progress" (step 2008).

The setting control process first determines whether the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated, which was stored as a game stop flag during the power-on process, is on. If it is not on, meaning the setting key was not operated on when the pachinko machine was powered on, the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that a setting key is being operated while the game stop flag is on, the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the current interrupt process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above) is referenced to determine whether to end the "setting change in progress" or "setting confirmation" state. If the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared, making the game playable, and then a presentation control command is set on the presentation control board to resume (or start) the presentation, depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state."

Furthermore, during the power-on process (see Figure 57), if the game stop flag is "setting changing," the operation status of the RAM clear switch P48 (the switch operated to change the setting value), which serves as the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing, is checked during the period until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. When the game stop flag is "setting changing," if rising edge data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated during the current interrupt, the data is changed so that the "setting value" becomes the next setting value in the predetermined change order. For example, in a pachinko game machine P with setting value data in which the setting changes sequentially from 1 to 6, each time rising edge data based on the operation of the setting change switch (RAM clear switch P48) is generated, the setting value is increased by "1" in this setting control process (if the setting value before operation was 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, by setting up processing for the setting change state and setting confirmation state during interrupt processing (see Figure 59), operation of the setting key switch and setting change switch is monitored periodically during the interrupt processing, and display data can be output to the display device using the LED output processing described below. This makes it possible to omit setting up a program for periodic monitoring during power-on processing (see Figure 57), when no separate interrupt processing has been set up. It is also possible to configure the power-on processing to monitor switches related to setting changes and confirmations, control the display device, and update setting values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
The game stop monitoring process is a process in which the CPU of the main control board reads the game stop flag data generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 57) executed when the power to the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, and checks whether the game is currently stopped (step 2010).

During the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but any bit is "1", it is determined that the game is stopped (a state in which game stop is required), game is considered to be stopped, and some of the processing during the interrupt processing (from "timer subtraction processing (step 2014)" to "special electric device control processing (step 2028)" in Figure 59) is omitted.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, examples of states in which game play must be stopped, i.e., states in which the player is unable to play, include "settings being changed," "settings being checked," and "an unrecoverable error occurring."

(Timer subtraction process)
The timer subtraction process is a process for updating timer data used to manage time related to the progress of a game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include managing the variable display time that is set when the variable display of special symbols begins, updating timer data triggered by game progress such as the operation time of the special electric device P755 during jackpot play (opening time of the large prize opening P751), timing processing for error detection such as detecting ball jams, processing for timing the switching time for switching the LED lighting pattern on the main control display device P50 such as the special symbol display devices P51, P52, and processing for timing the period for outputting information to external devices (such as a hall computer) from the external information output terminal P77, etc.

The timer data updated during the timer update process is stored in consecutive memory areas in the memory area (RAM memory area) of the main control board P40, separated by timer data type, such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer."

The timer update process performs processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" on the memory area that stores these individual timer data types, updating the time values of various timers. The timer update process decrements (-1) the timer data stored in the memory area. Note that if the stored timer data is already "0," it will be processed so that it remains "0" after processing (for example, if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0," or if it is "0," it will not be decremented).

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so if the data is a 1-byte timer, only managed objects that are updated a maximum of 255 times (approximately 1 second) can be controlled. However, if there is no (or little) game information that is managed only within 1 second, it is possible to configure it using only 2-byte timer data and not have a 1-byte timer update process. Also, if it is necessary to manage time values that cannot be managed even with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage longer times, such as a "3-byte timer."

(Validity period setting process)
The valid period setting process is a process for setting valid periods for winning ports that can be changed to an easy or difficult state (mainly the large winning port P751 and the winning ports related to the normal electric device P770) during the period when they are controlled to the easy state and during the valid extension period, and for other periods (when the winning port is in the difficult state and outside the valid extension period) an invalid period is set (step 2016).

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine, the process involves setting the validity period for winnings from the large winning slot P751, which serves as the large winning device, and the second start winning slot P721, which serves as the second start winning device P720 equipped with the normal electric device P770.

The valid extension period is a fixed control period that is appropriately set depending on the structure of the electric device, so that game balls that enter the large prize opening P751 or the normal electric device P770 immediately before they transition to a difficult-to-enter state are treated as valid wins, even after the control period for executing opening control on electric devices such as the large prize opening P750 (special electric device P755) or the normal electric device P770 has elapsed.

In addition, depending on the gaming machine specifications, if a specific area P760 (V area) is present, an effective extension period for the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area P760 may also be set. In such cases, the effective period of the specific area is also set in this process.

(Winning monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process is a process that determines whether or not a winning ball is a valid winning ball based on the winning balls in the various winning slots (large winning slot P751, starting slot P711, P721, general winning slot P731) of the pachinko gaming machine, and generates information that triggers the process of generating the right to draw special symbols for the winning balls and the balls that enter the starting slot (generation of a reserve). (Step 2018)

The processing involves (a) detecting whether or not a prize has been won for each winning slot in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), (b) determining whether or not a prize has been won during the validity period for winning slots with validity periods, and if a valid prize has been won for each winning slot, (c) setting a performance control command indicating the winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the performance control board P41, and (d) updating a counter value (referred to as the "winning counter") for storing the number of times an action has been triggered based on a win for each winning slot (in other words, updating a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed actions based on the detection of each winning slot).

In addition, the winning monitoring process not only checks for winnings at various winning slots, but also checks for the out ball detection switch P792, which is installed to count out balls, the operation port switch P742, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and, depending on the gaming machine specifications, the entry and passage of gaming balls into and through the specific area P760 (V area).In addition to the generation of prize balls and the occurrence of triggers for the special symbol lottery, this process also checks for the detection of gaming balls necessary for the operation of the gaming machine (for example, the process of sending information to the performance control board P41 that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 have been passed through).

(Operation port monitoring process)
The operation port monitoring process performs processing related to the occurrence of a hold related to the normal symbol lottery when rising data of the normal symbol operation port switch P742 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal symbol operation switch P742 is detected, the number of reserved numbers related to the normal symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reserved numbers does not reach the upper limit, a random number can be stored as a new reserved number. Therefore, the data in the memory area storing the reserved number is incremented (+1) to increase the reserved number information by one, and then the normal symbol win/loss random number, normal symbol symbol random number, and normal symbol variation pattern random number are obtained from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding software random number is obtained and stored as a reserved number.

(Normal symbol control processing)
The normal symbol control process performs processing related to the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol variable display, and the operation of the normal electric role P770 (step 2022). These processes transition to different sub-module processes depending on the data indicating the control status of the normal symbol or normal electric role, called the normal symbol status, and perform control according to the status. The normal symbol status includes "0: normal symbol waiting", "1: normal symbol variable", "2: normal symbol stop display", "3: normal electric role in operation", and "4: normal electric role end demo in progress", and processes according to each status are performed.

<<Normal pattern variation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol waiting."

The normal symbol variation start monitoring and control process first checks whether the number of reserved entries related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to vary the normal symbol has not been generated, and the normal symbol control process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved entries related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it is determined that the right to vary the normal symbol has been generated, and the normal symbol variation start conditions have been met, and the process related to the start of the normal symbol variation is executed.

When it is determined that the normal symbol variation should begin, the reserved number information is decremented by 1 from the area storing reserved number information related to the normal symbol lottery, and then the normal symbol win/loss random number, normal symbol pattern random number, and normal symbol variation pattern random number are called up, and the normal symbol win/loss lottery, normal symbol pattern lottery, and normal symbol variation pattern lottery are performed, respectively. The lottery results are stored in the memory area of the main control board, the random number information used this time is cleared, the reserved number information memory area is shifted so that it is processed in the order stored, and the normal symbol status is updated to "1: normal symbol variation in progress." Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used depending on the operating status of the aforementioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function), and a high base state tends to result in a higher chance of winning, and a short normal symbol variation display time is more likely to be determined.

"Normal pattern change processing"
The normal pattern changing process is a sub-module process that is called from the normal pattern control process when the normal pattern status is "1: normal pattern changing".

The normal pattern change processing causes the normal pattern display device P53 to display changes in the normal pattern until the normal pattern change display time corresponding to the normal pattern change pattern determined during the normal pattern change start monitoring and control processing has elapsed, i.e., until the timer that manages the normal pattern change display (normal pattern change display timer) reaches 0 during the timer update processing.

More specifically, if the normal symbol variation display timer is not 0, the normal symbol display switching counter, which has a maximum value of "5", is updated each time this process is executed, and when the normal symbol display switching counter reaches "5", information regarding the next light emission pattern is stored in a memory area that stores data for specifying the light emission pattern of the LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device P53. The normal symbol display switching counter is reset to its initial value of "0" when it reaches its maximum value of "5". In other words, the lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 for the normal symbol variation display is switched at intervals of five interrupts (4 ms x 5 = 20 ms). The switching interval can be set as appropriate; for example, if the maximum value of the normal symbol display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 will be switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms).

When the normal symbol variable display time has ended, i.e., when the normal symbol variable display timer is at "0," this process stores data for specifying the LED lighting pattern indicating the stopped display mode in the memory area that stores the LED lighting pattern of the normal symbol display device P53 so that the display pattern of the normal symbol stopped display pattern determined by the normal symbol lottery is displayed stopped on the normal symbol display device P53 in the main control display device P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (the time the stopped display pattern is displayed) is stored in the normal symbol stopped display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: Normal symbol stopped display in progress."

<<Processing during normal symbol stop display>>
The normal symbol stop display processing is a sub-module processing that is called from the normal symbol control processing when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display."

During the normal symbol stop display process, at the end of the normal symbol change process, the value of the normal symbol stop display timer, which has the symbol fixation time set, is checked to see if it is "0", and when it reaches "0", processing is performed to set up the transition to the next game operation.

When the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0," if the result of this normal symbol lottery is a "win," the operation pattern of the normal electric device P770 is called up according to the operation status of the winning symbol and base state (extension function of the normal electric device), and settings such as setting the operation pattern and clearing the winning counter related to the normal electric device P770 are made, and the normal symbol status is updated to "3: Normal electric device in operation."

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer reaches "0," if the result of this normal symbol lottery is a "lose," the normal symbol status will be updated to "0: normal symbol waiting."

"Normal electric device operation processing"
The normal electric role operation processing is a sub-module processing called from the normal symbol control processing when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric role operation".

The normal electric device operation processing controls the opening operation (change to an easy-to-score mode) and closing operation (change to a difficult-to-score mode) of the normal electric device based on the operation pattern of the normal electric device P770 set in the normal symbol stop display processing, and monitors whether the operation termination conditions for the normal electric device are met. The operation of the normal electric device P770 ends when (a) the specified number of normal electric device wins set as the termination conditions for the normal electric device occur, or (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends (when the normal electric device opening operation period ends).

When the normal electric role activation termination condition is met, the timer area that stores the effective extension period of the normal electric role is set to a time that measures a fixed extension period that is predetermined in accordance with the structure of the normal electric role P770. Then, the time value related to the normal electric role activation termination demo is set in the normal electric role activation termination demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric role activation termination demo in progress."

《Normal electric device operation end demo processing》
The normal electric role operation end demo processing is a sub-module processing called by the normal symbol control processing when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric role end demo in progress."

The normal electric feature operation end demo process waits until the normal electric feature operation end demo timer set in the normal electric feature operation process reaches "0", and when the normal electric feature operation end demo timer reaches "0", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting".

(Start port monitoring process)
The start port monitoring process performs processing related to the occurrence of a hold related to the special symbol lottery when the rising data of the special symbol 1 start port switch P712 and the special symbol 2 start port switch P722 is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special symbol 1 start port switch P712 and the special symbol 2 start port switch P722 are detected, the number of reserved numbers related to the special symbol lottery is checked, and if the number of reserved numbers does not reach the upper limit, a random number can be stored as a new reserved number. Therefore, the data in the memory area storing the reserved number is incremented (+1) to increase the reserved number information by one, and then the win/loss random number, symbol random number, and variable pattern random number are obtained from the random number generation circuit, or the current corresponding software random number is obtained and stored as a reserved number.

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P has two types of special symbols: a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special symbol 2). Therefore, for each start slot on the gaming board P5, the reserved number of the corresponding special symbol and the start slot switch data are called up, and the reserved number is added for each start slot and a random number is obtained.

In addition, if the starting gate to be processed is configured as a starting gate (electric chute) for a normal electric device, the validity period setting process described above will determine whether the winning entry into the starting gate for the normal electric device P770 occurred within the validity period, and if it is within the validity period, the processing described above will be carried out.

When storing the win/loss random number, pattern random number, and variation pattern random number, the acquired random number information is used in advance using a preview judgment value table to generate information that allows prediction of the content of the fluctuations that will occur when fluctuations based on the various reserved random numbers are executed, and this information is notified to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (referred to as a "pre-judgment command," "pre-judgment information," or "pre-reading judgment command"). Pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/loss random number, pattern random number, and variation pattern random number, and when sent to the performance control board P41, they are used by the performance control board P41 in the lottery for executing the "pre-reading performance" described below.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) executes one of the following processes: management of the start of special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process), special symbol fluctuation processing, and special symbol stop symbol display processing, based on status information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also called "special symbol status") and status information for managing the operating state of special electric symbols called special electric symbol status (also called "special electric game status").

The special symbol status has the states of "0: waiting for special symbol to change", "1: special symbol changing", "2: missing symbol stopped and displayed", "3: big win symbol stopped and displayed", and "4: small win symbol stopped and displayed", and the special electric device status has the states of "0: waiting for win", "1: special electric device operating", "2: big prize entrance closed", "3: big win end demo in progress", "4: small win special electric signal operating", "5: small win closed", and "6: small win end demo in progress".
Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where the machine does not have a small win, in which case the machine does not have status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

When there are multiple special symbols, the special symbol control process is performed in a predetermined order (priority order). The predetermined order is to prioritize the second special symbol, and in a situation where both the first and second special symbols are reserved, the second special symbol begins to change first (the second special symbol changes first). This gaming machine specification is called "second special symbol (special symbol 2) priority consumption control," and in the explanation of the embodiment of the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, processing related to this type will be explained by way of example.

The special symbol control process first controls the second special symbol. When control of the second special symbol begins, the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric device status information are first referenced. If the special electric device status indicates that a big win or small win is in progress (when the special electric device status is other than "0: Waiting for win"), if the first special symbol is changing and the special pattern status of the first special symbol is other than "0: Waiting for special pattern change", the process will be completed without any further processing.

When the situation calls for the execution of control of the second special symbol, a process is executed to update the timer value for control related to the second special symbol. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the memory area that stores the timer, and if the decrement results in a negative value, it is set to "0." Once the timer update is complete, a sub-module process (described below) is called and executed based on the special symbol status corresponding to special symbol 2. Note that although timer subtraction processing is also performed during interrupt processing, the timer updated by the timer subtraction processing does not include the timer data updated by the special symbol control processing; instead, the timer data for control related to the special symbol is managed in the special symbol control processing.

Special symbol variation start monitoring and control process
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process to which transition is made when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation."

The special symbol change start monitoring and control process checks whether there are any reserved special symbols being processed. If there are no reserved symbols, the process ends. If there are reserved symbols, the next process is executed. The next process is a special symbol lottery, which is carried out when the change begins. The special symbol lottery first reads and inspects the data stored as setting values to determine whether the setting value information is appropriate. If the setting values are appropriate, the appropriate lottery table is selected by referencing the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game status, etc., and a win/lose lottery, pattern lottery, and change pattern lottery are executed. After the lottery results are stored in the memory area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: Special symbol changing." In addition, the contents determined by the special symbol lottery are sent to the effect control board P41 as effect control commands (win/lose command, pattern command, change pattern command) and are used as information for the process (lottery process) to determine the contents of the change effect that is executed in conjunction with the display of the special symbol change. Details regarding the special symbol lottery will be explained later.

Special pattern change processing
The special symbol changing process is a sub-module process to which the process is transitioned when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol changing".

During special symbol fluctuation processing, the timer that manages the special symbol fluctuation display time is monitored until the special symbol fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern lottery has elapsed, and the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24"), which is updated with each interrupt until the remaining fluctuation time reaches "0", switches the lighting display pattern of the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (first special symbol display device P51 when special symbol 1 is controlled)) every 25 interrupts to show the special symbol fluctuation display.

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbol reaches "0," the system sets information to output an external signal to an external device (such as a data counter or hall computer) connected to the pachinko gaming machine P indicating that the variable display of the special symbol has been executed once, sets the pattern fixation time for fixing the special symbol's stopped display pattern, and sets lighting pattern data to display on the special symbol display device P52 (P51) the stopped display pattern that indicates the stopped display pattern determined as a result of the win/loss lottery and pattern lottery. Then, depending on the result of the win/loss lottery, the special symbol status is set to one of "2: Miss symbol stopped and displayed," "3: Big win symbol stopped and displayed," or "4: Small win symbol stopped and displayed."

<<Processing during the display of the special symbol missing symbol>>
The process for special symbol losing symbol stop display is a process to be executed when the special symbol status is "2: Losing symbol stop display".

The special symbol stop display processing checks whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol change processing has reached "0," and if it has reached "0," updates the special symbol status of the special symbol being processed to "0: waiting for special symbol change." It also updates the remaining number of plays for the game state related to the special symbol lottery (probability change function, electric chute support function, change time reduction function), checks whether the termination condition has been met, and controls the transition of the game state (flag off, etc.) when the game state transition condition has been met.

Special jackpot pattern stop display processing
The special symbol jackpot symbol stop display processing is a process that is transitioned to when the special symbol status is "3: jackpot symbol stop display."

The special jackpot symbol stop display processing checks whether the value of the timer that manages the symbol fixation time set in the special symbol change processing has reached "0." If it does, the special symbol status of the special symbol being processed is updated to "0: waiting for special symbol change," and the special electric device status is updated to "2: large prize opening closed." Furthermore, to end the game state related to the special symbol lottery (probability change function, electric chute support function, change time reduction function), the processing clears the remaining number information storage area and operation flag storage area for each. Then, to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol, the information in the various memory areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot symbol information, and the control content data for the special electric device P755 during the jackpot game is set.

The special jackpot symbol stop display processing also executes a process to send a performance control command to the performance control board P41 to execute a jackpot game performance (jackpot start demo performance). In conjunction with this processing, lighting pattern data is also set to illuminate the right-hit indicator light P56 (an LED that lights up when the game is in a state where right-hit play, in which the game ball is fired toward the right side of the play area, is recommended), which is one of the components of the main control display device P50.

<<Processing during the stop display of the special small winning pattern>>
The processing during the stop display of the special small win pattern is the processing to be performed when the special pattern status is "4: Small win pattern stop display."

The special small win symbol stop display process, like the special big win symbol stop display process, sets data related to the operation of the special electric device P755 and performs settings related to the illumination of the right-hit indicator light P56 upon the end of the symbol fixation time. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine P of this underlying technology, when a small win game is executed (when a small win symbol is displayed), unlike when a big win symbol is stopped, there is no processing to terminate the game state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or high base state). Similar to the processing for the special miss symbol stop display process, the game state is controlled based on the determination of whether the termination conditions for each game state have been met. Furthermore, in conjunction with this processing, the special electric device status is updated to "5: Small win closed." Depending on the gaming machine specifications, as a variant, it is also possible to design a specification that forcibly terminates the game state (high probability state or high base state) when a small win game is executed, just as when a big win symbol is stopped.

When any of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the processing of the second special symbol is followed by the processing of the first special symbol. The processing of the first special symbol is essentially the same as the processing of the second special symbol, except that the information referenced differs (for example, whether a change can begin is determined by referencing the special symbol status of the second special symbol rather than the special symbol status of the first special symbol), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

《Ball entry order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority consumption control," but if a gaming machine specification different from that of the pachinko gaming machine assumed here is adopted, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process using a different process. Representative examples will be briefly explained below.

"Ball entry order consumption control" is a gaming machine specification in which reserved information corresponding to the first and second special symbols is processed one by one in the order in which it occurs. While one symbol is changing, the other symbol's change will not be displayed, and this specification is often adopted when it is expected that both reserved balls corresponding to the first and second special symbols will be generated in a certain gaming state.

"Parallel Control (Parallel Consumption)" differs from the aforementioned "Second Special Symbol Priority Consumption Control" and "Ball Entry Order Consumption" in that it is a gaming machine specification that allows the simultaneous display of both the first and second special symbols. Because two symbols can be consumed simultaneously, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol draws per unit time. Furthermore, when the special electric device P755 is activated in response to the display of special symbol 1 (when a big win or small win is executed), specifications are appropriately adopted such that the other symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss, or the remaining time for the display is temporarily suspended. As an example, it is possible to adopt a specification in which, when special symbol 1 results in a big win, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss, or when special symbol 1 results in a big win or small win, the display of the other special symbol is temporarily suspended.

(Special electric device control processing)
The special electric accessory control process is a process that executes submodule processes related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric accessory status (sometimes referred to as the special electric game status) and manages the operation of the special electric accessory (step 2028). In other words, when a big win game or a small win game is executed, it is a process that controls each state in the big win game and small win game state and controls the opening and closing of the big prize opening P751.

As mentioned above, the special electric device status has the following states: "0: Waiting for a win", "1: Special electric device in operation", "2: Large prize entry hole closed", "3: Large win end demo in progress", "4: Small win special power in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demo in progress".

If the special electric device status is "0: Waiting for a win," the player has not yet acquired the right to play a big win or small win, and the special electric device control process will end without performing any processing.

If the special electric device status is anything other than "0: Waiting for a win," one of the processes described below will be executed depending on the status.

Special electric device operation processing
The special electric device operation process is executed when the special electric device status is "1: special electric device in operation" or "4: small win special device in operation." This process is executed when a so-called round game (unit game) is being played in a special game (a state in which the large prize opening P751 can be controlled to be opened).

The special electric device activation process first determines whether the conditions for ending a round of play (unit game) have been met. A round of play is deemed to have ended when one of the following conditions is met: (a) a specified number of wins (also called a "count") have been achieved for the activated special electric device, or (b) the opening time (opening pattern) set as the activation pattern for the special electric device being executed has expired. If these conditions are not met, the special electric device control process for this interrupt process ends without further processing. Note that the activation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric device P755 include patterns that open and close the large prize opening P751 multiple times. When these patterns are executed, while the timer used to determine (b) reaches "0" multiple times during a single round of play, it is checked whether there is next activation data for a single round of play. If it determines that condition (c) "there is no next activation pattern data for this unit game" is met, it is deemed that (b) above has been met.

On the other hand, if either of the above conditions (A) or (B) for ending the round of play is met, the next process is to store the time when the large prize opening is closed in the timer for managing the closing time of the special electric device, and to increment the special electric device status to "2: Large prize opening closed." Then, command data is set to the effect control board P41 as an effect control command to notify that the round of play has ended, and the process ends.

"Processing during closing of the main prize entrance"
The large prize opening closing process is a process executed when the special electric device status is "2: large prize opening closing" or "5: small prize closing." This process is a process that is controlled during the "inter-round" period between rounds in special games, as well as during the "large prize start demo (period)" or "small prize start demo (period)" period, which are the states before the start of the first round at the start of a large prize game or small prize game, or during the waiting period until the winning end demo process (described later) is executed after the final round of round games has ended.

The large prize opening closure processing first determines whether the large prize opening closure time set in the special electric device operation processing has elapsed. If the closure time management timer is not "0," meaning the closure time has not elapsed, the special electric device control processing for this interrupt is terminated.

When the time for the large prize opening to close has elapsed, a determination is made as to whether the activation (round) of the special electric device P755 that finished activating first was the final round of play in the current winning game (big win game, small win game), and different processing is performed at the end of the final round of play and at the end of a round of play other than the final round (or at the start of the winning demo). The determination of whether or not it was the final round of play is made based on whether the cumulative data for the number of times the special electric device P755 was activated during the current winning game exceeds the maximum number of times the special electric device P755 was activated in the current winning game, and at the start of the winning demo, the cumulative data for the number of times the special electric device P755 was activated is "0".

If the large prize opening closure processing determines that the final round of play has ended, it reads and sets the execution pattern for the win end demo (mainly the win end demo time data) according to the type of win (the type of special symbol that triggered the large prize or small prize). The special electric device status is then incremented to "3: Large prize end demo in progress" or "6: Small prize end demo in progress," and a performance command is set to execute the win end demo performance on the performance control board P41. Furthermore, the time value data set as the effective extension period for setting the effective extension period of the large prize opening P751 is stored in the timer that manages the effective extension period of the large prize opening P751, and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the processing during the closing of the large prize slot determines that a round other than the final round of play has ended (or that a winning demo is in progress), it sends a performance control command to the performance control board P41, which sends information that identifies which round the next round of play will be (N-round start demo command *N is an integer) and information (right hit command) to indicate the recommended firing position during winning play (in the assumed pachinko machine, this is the right area P501R (right hit area) of the game board).

Then, the special electric device status is decremented and updated to "1: Special electric device in operation" or "4: Special small win signal in operation," and the data in the data area for counting the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening P751 during a round of play is initialized. The time value related to the first opening of the large prize opening P751 during a round of play (or its closing immediately after the start of a round of play) is then set as the operation pattern data for the large prize opening P751 (special electric device P755) during a round of play, and the data in the memory area related to the cumulative number of times the special electric device P755 has been operated is incremented.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for awarding a prize ball to a player when a game ball enters a prize slot arranged on the game board P5. The process is configured to execute the following three sub-module processes (step 2030).

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process checks for the presence or absence of control commands related to the execution of prize ball payouts transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40 and receives (stores) the transmitted commands. The main control board P0 stores information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register and stores information for determining whether information has been transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether the transmitted information was transmitted correctly. The other register is called a data register and stores information on the control content related to payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is normal, the data in the data register is stored in the storage area as payout control information.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command request process, the winning counter data for each winning slot, which stores the number of wins for each winning slot, stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018), is checked to see if there are any unpaid wins. This checking process checks each winning slot in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning slot is not "0," a control command is sent to the payout control board P43 to execute the payout of game balls according to the number of prize balls for the corresponding winning slot. This process limits the number of payout control commands sent to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt to one, even if the winning counter data for multiple winning slots is not "0."

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, a check is made to see if the payout control board P43 has received information regarding the payout number normally, and this process determines whether the command is received normally or if there is some abnormality and a communication error has occurred. Until the payout command control process determines the command reception status (determines whether reception was completed normally or an error has occurred), the transmission of the next payout control command in the payout command request process is temporarily suspended by flag data that is set on or off within the payout command request process and the payout command control process, respectively.

(Abnormality detection processing)
The abnormality detection process is a process for checking whether an abnormality has occurred based on information from a sensor provided in the pachinko gaming machine P for detecting fraud (step 2032).

More specifically, this process determines whether an abnormality has occurred based on the input information generated by the input port confirmation process (step 2004) regarding input from sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, magnetic sensor P73, radio wave detection sensor P74, and frame open sensor P131. In addition to the various sensors, other items that can be detected include the removal of harnesses for electrical connections and short circuits in the wiring.

If abnormal data is found for any of the judgment information, the corresponding error flag is turned on and stored, and then a command to notify the error information is set as a performance control command to the performance control board P41.

(Sensor detection determination process)
The sensor detection determination process is a process in which, based on the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), a period of continuous sensor or switch detection is determined, and a flag for processing is set (step 2034).

In the sensor detection determination process, if the level data of the detection data information for the target sensor or switch is on, the data for counting the continuous on input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and it is determined whether the conditions for starting execution of various processes are met. If the conditions are met, the process corresponding to the switch being monitored is executed. If the monitored switch no longer has on data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning slot detection switch installed in the winning slot detects that the switch is continuously in the on state, it is determined that a ball jam has occurred, and the system is controlled to an error state, and command information is set as a performance control command to the performance control board P41 to notify the error, and signal data is generated and output to notify an external device (such as a hall computer) of the occurrence of an error.

The switches that are detected in this process include touch sensor switches on the handle P204 and switches for detecting fraud, as well as sensors that require on-state data input for a certain period of time to determine whether the switch is due to human operation or electrical noise.

(Game status display process)
The game status display process is a process for generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although it is called a display process, the display content on the main control display device P50 is not output by this process but by the LED output process described below (step 2036).

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, lighting data (lighting patterns) for, for example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) that indicates an error state, special symbol reserve indicator lights (special symbol 1 reserve indicator light P61, special symbol 2 reserve indicator light P62) that display the number of reserved symbols related to the special symbol lottery, and regular symbol reserve indicator light P63 that displays the number of reserved symbols related to the regular symbol lottery are generated and stored as data output by the LED output process.

In the game status display process, if a blinking display is required for an LED indicator light that is lighting controlled, the display switching counter for the corresponding LED is updated and the lighting pattern is switched by comparing the counter value with a threshold value. For example, in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, although a maximum of four special symbol lottery symbols can be reserved, the special symbol reservation indicator is made up of two LED indicator lights (special symbol 1 reservation indicator P61 and special symbol 2 reservation indicator P62 each have two LEDs), so when there are three or more reserved symbols, at least one LED will blink rather than be continuously lit.

(Output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process for setting up the transmission of signals related to game operations to the electric role devices, which are operating devices on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, and the payout control board P43, etc. (Step 2038).

More specifically, when the operation pattern of a normal electric device or special electric device is set during the normal symbol control process or the special electric device control process, signal data for opening (or closing) each electric device is output to the normal electric device drive means P71 and the special electric device drive means P72 (solenoids in the assumed pachinko gaming machine) through processing during the output port output process.

In addition, the output port output processing generates and outputs a control signal (launch permission signal) to the payout control board P43 to permit or prohibit the launch of game balls based on the player's handle operation. The output content of the launch permission signal is set depending on the communication status with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Performance control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process for outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41, and in the pachinko gaming machine P, the performance control command is transmitted to the performance control board P41 only in the performance control command transmission process (step 2040). Note that the setting of the performance control command to be transmitted is set in a predetermined memory area as an untransmitted performance control command during other processing.

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P uses a ring buffer, a memory area that cyclically references a memory destination, as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. This ring buffer memory area is designed to write and read effect control commands using information called a "write pointer" and a "read pointer," which are updated with each process of writing (setting) a effect control command and reading (sending) a effect control command, to calculate the address of the memory area where the command will be written and the address of the memory area where the command will be read in the next process.

Furthermore, in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the performance control command is made up of two pieces of data: MODE data indicating the type of command, and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Let's return to the explanation of the specific processing content of the performance control command transmission process. In the performance control command transmission process, the process first checks whether the information in the write pointer and read pointer mentioned above matches. If they match, it is determined that there are no performance control commands to send and the process ends. On the other hand, if the data in the write pointer and read pointer do not match, it is determined that there are performance control commands to send and the process moves on to the next step.

If it is determined that there is a performance control command to send, the MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address in the memory area of the main control board P40 calculated from the read pointer data, and are temporarily stored in registers in the CPU of the main control board P40. After clearing the performance control command in the ring buffer from which it was read, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value to be used for the next processing.

The MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are sent sequentially to the performance control board P41 as performance control commands. First, the MODE data is set in the performance command output port, which is the output port for sending performance control commands to the performance control board P41, and a strobe signal is output to cause the performance control board P41 to perform a reading operation. The main control board P40 then outputs the EVENT data, but after inserting a waiting period of 26 μs to ensure sufficient time for the performance control board P41 to receive the MODE data, the EVENT data is set in the output port and a strobe signal is output, just as when sending MODE data. When the performance control board P41 confirms the strobe signal, it generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command sent from the main control board P40.

(External information output processing)
The external information output process is a process of outputting information about the game status and information about security, such as the occurrence of an error, as a signal from the external information output terminal 77 to an external device (such as a data counter or hall computer) connected to the assumed pachinko gaming machine P (step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set in the output port of the main control board P40, and includes a signal that transmits a pulse signal that is an ON potential for a certain period when an opportunity to output a signal occurs, and a signal that continues to output an ON potential until the condition for terminating the signal output is met.

The external information output process first generates a signal related to the game state. To enable the signal related to the game state to identify the type of specific game state, the assumed pachinko gaming machine P references information corresponding to the operating state of the probability fluctuation function (probability state), the operating state of the electric chute support function (base state), and information indicating that a special game is in progress (jackpot or small jackpot), and updates the external output data so that the corresponding data is transmitted when controlled to each game state. Note that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, output signals may be generated based on information indicating the presence or absence of a fluctuation time reduction function or information indicating a specific type of jackpot.

In addition, the output signals output by the external information output process include not only signals related to the game status, but also information based on the occurrence of predetermined game results. For example, there is a signal (also known as a "symbol locking signal") sent each time a special symbol is displayed and stops moving, and a signal set in the external output data and sent to an external device each time a game ball is detected entering one of the various winning slots, such as the start slot switch (special symbol 1 start slot switch P712, special symbol 2 start slot switch 722) or the special winning slot switch P752, or each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on balls entering one of the various winning slots (e.g., 10). These signals are primarily composed of pulse signals, with one signal being sent as a pulse signal with a 128 ms continuous on potential. However, if multiple game results occur consecutively, after one pulse signal has been output, there is a period of off potential output, and then a pulse signal is output again.

In addition, during the external signal output process, the data in the memory area that stores the error flag as a result of the check performed in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) described above is calculated and compared with comparison data used to check whether an error requiring a security notification has occurred. If it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data set in the output port is updated so that the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data is turned on.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to the multiple LEDs that make up the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light and display the progress and status of the game (step 2044).

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol hold indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second special symbol hold indicator light P62 (2 LEDs), the normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), the normal symbol hold indicator light P63 (2 LEDs), as well as the round indicator light P54, the status indicator light P55, and the right-hit indicator light (a total of 8 LEDs), for a total of 32 LED displays.

The status indicator light P55 collectively represents indicator lights related to multiple game states, and more specifically refers to indicator lights such as the special symbol probability variation indicator light that indicates whether the probability variation function is activated, the regular symbol probability variation indicator light that indicates whether the regular symbol probability variation function is activated (whether the electric chute support function is activated), and the error indicator light that indicates an error state.

The LED output process is configured to set one byte of display unit lighting data in the main control display device to the output port for each interrupt process, lighting up the main control display device P50. Based on the value of a digit counter that is updated for each interrupt process, the LEDs in the main control display device P50 to be lit for the current interrupt are selected, lighting pattern data according to the game status is selected, and this is set as display data to control the lighting of each LED.

In other words, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P controls the main control display device P50 using a dynamic lighting method that outputs lighting data to 32 LEDs in sequence using at least four interrupt processes.

In addition to the LED display that the player must see as the main control display device P50, the LED output process also controls the lighting of LED displays that are only turned on when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, setting confirmation state, or unrecoverable error state.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, if a flag indicating a game stop state is stored in the game stop flag, the setting of lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted, and all LEDs constituting the main control display device are turned off while the setting is being changed, while the setting is being confirmed, or while an unrecoverable error occurs. As a variant, when the game stop flag is set, a fixed lighting pattern set for each state may be used to display the light; for example, all LEDs constituting the main control display device P50 may be turned on while the setting is being changed.

(Out-of-area control processing)
The out-of-area control process is composed of a test signal output process (processing for outputting signals used in testing pachinko machines) that outputs signals used in testing pachinko machines, and a process that controls the display of the performance display device (step 2046). "Out-of-area" means that the process is executed by a program in a memory area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program memory area defined in the rules for pachinko machines.

The test signal output process sets information related to game results and game status in the output port for output from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko gaming machine P to external testing equipment. The performance display process checks the game status, counts the number of out balls, calculates the ratio (base) between the number of out balls and the number of winning balls, updates this as display data, and displays it on the performance display device P59.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 60 to 64. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of a "win/lose lottery," a "winning symbol lottery," and a "variable pattern lottery."

(Winners will be selected by lottery)
The "win/lose lottery" is a lottery that determines whether the special electric device P755 will be activated based on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed. More simply, it is a lottery that determines whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a "big win," a "small win," or a "lose." Note that, depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine P, there are some that do not have a "small win" as a result of the win/lose lottery. Also, when a machine is configured to have a first special pattern and a second special pattern, it may be configured so that the win/lose lottery for one special pattern has a "small win" as a result, and the win/lose lottery for the other special pattern does not have a "small win."

The winning/losing lottery is conducted using a random number value known as a "winning/losing random number" that is obtained and stored when a game ball enters a starting port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the range of possible random numbers for the winning/losing random number (random number value range) is 65,536, ranging from "0" to "65,535," and is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When the winning/losing lottery is conducted, the result of the winning/losing lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number value with a lottery table (called the "winning/losing lottery table") used for the winning/losing lottery according to the game status and setting values.

Figure 60 shows several examples of lottery tables used for the win/loss lottery. Figure 60 (A) shows a win/loss lottery table for a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and Figure 60 (B) shows a win/loss lottery table for a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. Figure 60 (C) and (D) show win/loss lottery tables for a setting value of "6" and a low probability state and a high probability state, respectively.

For example, in a situation where a win/loss lottery is performed using the win/loss lottery table in Figure 60 (A), let's assume that the win/loss random number for this special pattern lottery is a random number corresponding to the first special pattern (Special Pattern 1) and the random number value is "1500," and the flow of the win/loss lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether the result of the initial win/loss lottery falls within the jackpot random number range (from "0" to "327"). Specifically, the process subtracts the jackpot random number range of "328" being determined from the current win/loss random number's random number value of "1500". In this case, the subtraction result is "1172", which is not a negative value, so it is determined that this win/loss random number does not fall within the jackpot random number range.

The next step is to compare the random number value "1172" obtained after the previous calculation for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won with the range of random numbers for "loss" ("328" to "65370"), which is the range for determining the result of the subsequent win/loss lottery in the win/loss lottery table. More specifically, the range of random numbers for "loss" to be determined, "65043", is subtracted from the primary data for the win/loss random number, "1172". At this time, the calculation result is a negative value, and information corresponding to the "loss" result is stored as the win/loss lottery result.

If a special symbol lottery is held under high probability conditions for the current win/loss random number "1500," the lottery will be performed using the win/loss lottery table shown in Figure 60 (B), and it will be determined whether or not the random number value falls within the first jackpot random number range ("0" to "1639"). In this case, the result of the comparison (subtraction) between the win/loss random number and the random number range will be a negative value, so the win/loss lottery result will be determined to be a "jackpot."

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P employs a method for determining the lottery results by sequentially comparing the data acquired as random numbers with the random number range corresponding to the lottery results in the lottery table, and a similar method is also used for the winning symbol lottery and variation pattern lottery described below. Note that the lottery method is not limited to the above example; it may also be a method for directly determining whether the acquired random number matches the random number that will result in a jackpot, or a different lottery method may be used for each lottery content.

(Winning design lottery)
The "winning pattern lottery" is a process that, based on the results of the special pattern lottery described above, determines the stop display pattern of the special pattern as a lottery result required for switching the control content related to the subsequent operation of the special electric device P755 and the lottery table (see Figures 62 to 64) for the variable pattern lottery described below.

Figure 61 shows the big win symbol lottery table (see Figure 61(A)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the win/loss lottery result is a "big win," the small win symbol lottery table (see Figure 61(B)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the win/loss lottery result is a "small win," and the losing symbol lottery table (see Figure 61(C)) used in the winning symbol lottery when the win/loss lottery result is a "no win."

The "pattern random number" used to draw the winning pattern has a random number range of "1000" (from "0" to "999"), and when expressed as 2-byte data, the upper byte is expressed as "0" to "3" and the lower byte is expressed as "0" to "255".

To explain the winning symbol lottery using a specific example, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot and the symbol random number is "400" (higher byte "1", lower byte "144"), the lottery table for the upper byte "1" shown in Figure 61 (A) is used to select the winning symbol for the first special symbol, and the result of the lottery is "5R (5 rounds) Probable Change 2", which corresponds to the lower byte "128" to "191". When the special symbol is displayed, the "5R Probable Change 2" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device P51 (or the second special symbol display device P52 in the case of the second special symbol lottery).

When the "5R Probability Change 2" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device P51, a jackpot game corresponding to the "5R Probability Change 2" symbol will be executed. At this time, the content of each round of the 5-round jackpot game (such as the opening pattern and opening time of the large prize slot P751) may be different based on the displayed symbol when "5R Probability Change 2" is displayed as the stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device and when "5R Probability Change 1" is displayed as the stopped symbol. It is also possible to control the control content of the specific game state to which the game transitions after a jackpot game is different. The allocation of control for these jackpot games and specific game states is determined appropriately for each pachinko gaming machine P in order to realize gameplay in accordance with its specifications, and a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is described as displaying symbols organized by type of jackpot through the lottery shown in Figure 61 (A), but for example, in the previous example, after determining the type of jackpot, which is the lottery result "5R Probable Change 2," another lottery may be conducted to determine the stop display symbol that will result in the corresponding type of jackpot from multiple patterns. In this way, the winning symbol lottery may be conducted in two stages: determining the type of jackpot and then determining the stop display symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 61 (A), the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is configured so that when the jackpot pattern is determined in the winning pattern lottery in the special pattern lottery for each of the first and second special patterns, the types of winning patterns that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, there is an increased chance that a "10R Probable Change 5" or "10R Probable Change 8" will be determined in the jackpot for the second special pattern, making it easier to win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds than in the winning pattern lottery for the first special pattern, and making it easier to win a jackpot that will transition to a high probability/high base state as a specific gaming state.

Figure 61 (B) shows an example of a small win symbol lottery table. The small win symbol lottery table is a table that is referenced in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is a "small win," and the lottery method is the same as that of the big win symbol lottery table described above.

In the small win symbol lottery table shown in Figure 61 (B), most of the time the "small win 1" symbol will be the winning symbol, and in some cases where the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a "small win," "small win 2" can be determined. Note that there may be only one type of small win symbol, or it may be configured so that three or more types of symbols can be determined.

One example of the purpose of providing multiple small win symbols, as in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, is to simply change the opening mode of the large prize opening P751 during small win play to vary the number of game balls that can be won, or, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine P that uses a small win V as a gaming machine specification (spec), to differentiate the small win symbols in order to distinguish between small win games in which it is easy to get a V in a specific area and small win games in which it is difficult to get a V, or to differ the small win symbols in order to distinguish between the type of specific game to which the player transitions after a large win game is played after a V has been won.

Figure 61 (C) shows an example of a losing symbol lottery table. The losing symbol lottery table is a table that is referenced in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is a "lose." The lottery method is the same as that of the jackpot symbol lottery table described above for the first special symbol, but a different method is used for the second special symbol.

More specifically, Figure 61 (C) shows only the losing symbol lottery table for the first special symbol, and in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, the lottery process is performed only when the losing symbol lottery table shows the first special symbol, and either "Miss 1" or "Miss 2" is determined as the symbol to be displayed as a stop symbol.

The "Miss 2" symbol is a losing symbol that has a winning probability of approximately 6.4% when the first special symbol fails. When "Miss 2" is a winning symbol, the fluctuation pattern lottery is designed to make it easier to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referencing a special lottery table (not shown) that is more likely to result in a reach. For this reason, "Miss 2" is sometimes referred to as a "reach miss symbol."

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P does not have a losing symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is designed to determine the losing symbol 1 regardless of the symbol random number, omitting the process of comparing the symbol random number with the table and instead storing the losing symbol 1. It may also be configured to use a lottery table that always results in a winning symbol 1, so that the losing symbol is won.

(Variation pattern lottery)
The "variation pattern lottery" is a process for determining by lottery the variable display time until the stop display pattern, which is the result of the lottery for the special pattern, is stopped. In the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the variable display time of the special pattern is determined by using a variation pattern table described later in the special pattern lottery as the performance time required for the performance display device P80 to perform a performance notification regarding whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is.

Figure 62 shows a "low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table" primarily for the normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and the low base state (non-electric chute support state), i.e., the state in which it is recommended to fire the game ball into the left area P501L of the game board on the assumed pachinko game machine P.

In Figure 62, "ID" represents the information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and "variation pattern" represents a representative example of the variation presentation displayed on the presentation display device P80 when the ID is selected. "Variation time" is the variation display time value of the special pattern in the result of the target variation pattern lottery (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special pattern is displayed to when it stops changing.

In Figure 62, "Hold 1 Variation" to "Hold 4 Variation" indicate the number of reserved balls when the conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are met. When the result of the lottery is "Miss" and there are N reserved balls of the target special symbol (here, the first special symbol), the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table for "Hold N Variation." In other words, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbol in a low base state is configured to use different variation pattern tables depending on the number of reserved balls. Note that if there are no reserved balls and a game ball enters the starting winning slot, it is temporarily stored as reserved for processing, and the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table for "Hold 1 Variation."

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 62, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the reserved number, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the reserved number. Although not shown, if the result of the symbol lottery is "Miss 2 (reach miss symbol)", even when the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbol is performed, the variation pattern lottery is configured to use variation pattern table 1 (variation pattern table for Miss 2), which is independent of the reserved number.

In Figure 62, "10R Probable", "5R Probable", "10R Normal", and "5R Normal" indicate the variation pattern tables used to determine the variation pattern when a jackpot occurs in a low base state. The result of the lottery is "jackpot", and the appropriate variation pattern table is selected depending on which symbol is selected as the result of the symbol lottery. In Figure 62, because the second special symbol is not the main focus of play in a low base state, the jackpot variation pattern table is shown as being determined independently of the jackpot symbol, but there may also be multiple patterns for jackpots with the second special symbol depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, using Figure 62, we will explain a specific example of a variation pattern lottery in a low base state. As a specific example, we will explain a situation in which the first special symbol is drawn, the variation pattern random number is "30000", the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation is 3 (the number of reserved balls becomes 2 after the variation starts), and the result of the win/lose lottery and the winning symbol lottery is "Lose 1".

First, since the reserved number at the start of the fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table for "Reserved 3 Fluctuation" is used. Similar to the lottery process for the win/lose lottery described above, the lottery process compares (subtracts) the fluctuation pattern random number with the random number range corresponding to the fluctuation pattern ID of each lottery result to determine whether the random number falls within that range. By performing this process, the result of repeated comparisons between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number range at the timing of normal fluctuation B with ID "2" becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as the fluctuation pattern lottery. A 7-second fluctuation display of the special pattern is performed, after which losing pattern 1 is displayed on the first special pattern display device P51.

Next, we will explain the fluctuation pattern table in a high base state using Figure 63. The configuration of the fluctuation pattern table in a high base state is the opposite of the fluctuation pattern table in a low base state shown in Figure 62, and is configured to have a fluctuation pattern table for when there is a miss that depends on the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol, and a table for each jackpot symbol when there is a jackpot. Note that Figures 62 and 63 are configured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, but this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and it is also possible to configure the fluctuation patterns determined in a low base state and a high base state so that there is very little overlap, or no overlap at all.

In addition, a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in a high base state is that it is configured so that a 2-second fluctuation (fluctuation pattern ID "12"), which is the shortest fluctuation time for the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, can be determined as the result of the lottery for the "Hold 3 Fluctuation" and "Hold 4 Fluctuation" of the second special pattern when a loss occurs.

Furthermore, a feature of the variation pattern in the high base state is that the lottery for the first special symbol is always configured to determine a 10-second variation with variation pattern ID "4." The reason for configuring the first special symbol to vary over 10 seconds is that, in the jackpot symbol lottery table shown in Figure 61, the player's profit in the event of a jackpot is large (high expected number of balls won due to the large number of executed rounds, and many jackpot symbols that transition to a probability variation state as a specific game state). The purpose is to enable the player to win a more advantageous jackpot by prioritizing and frequently displaying the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol. Furthermore, even when there is little difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in a jackpot game, the adoption of second special symbol priority consumption control prevents the first special symbol from being displayed in a variable manner, making it easier to maintain the reserve established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the advantageous specific game state (high base state), and also aims to avoid requiring a large number of game balls to generate the reserve of the first special symbol in the low base state compared to the amount of game balls used to generate the reserve of the second special symbol in the high base state.

Figure 64 shows a special table for a limited period, representing a special fluctuation pattern table that is referenced during a specific period. Figure 64 comprehensively lists special fluctuation pattern tables for three periods as an example of a special fluctuation pattern table provided in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P.

More specifically, Figure 64 shows that the assumed pachinko gaming machine P is equipped with a "reserved consecutive win table" (targeting IDs "51" and "71") that is referenced during the period from the first change to the fourth change after a jackpot (the period known as a "reserved consecutive win" (reserved consecutive win) in which a jackpot results from the four reserved wins that exist at the time of a jackpot), a high-frequency reach table (targeting IDs "52", "53", "54", and "72") that is referenced during the nth to mth change after a jackpot and which tends to select a 55-second reach change, and a "result change table" (targeting IDs "55" and "73") that is referenced during the final change display in a high base state and which primarily executes the "result effect" described below.

Special fluctuation pattern tables that are referenced for limited periods of time like this are referred to as "special fluctuation pattern tables" or "limited frequency (pattern tables)."

In the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, the limited frequency pattern table reference period is configured to be referenced during a set period following a jackpot game (the activation of a special electric device, in other words, the activation of the continuous device operation device). It is also possible to vary these reference periods depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern), and it is also possible to configure the reference period to vary during a specific period following the activation of a special electric device based on a small jackpot game. The special variation pattern table to be referenced under what circumstances can be set appropriately for each pachinko gaming machine, and is not limited to the examples provided, and details will be explained separately if necessary.

Next, we will explain the control of the presentation control board P41, which controls the presentation operations of the underlying pachinko gaming machine P. Note that the operational control of the presentation control board P41 is subject to fewer restrictions in the gaming machine's type testing and has a higher degree of design freedom compared to the control of the main control board P40, so it is not limited to the processing described below, and the timing of processing can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of the performance control board ~ main loop processing]
When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine P is turned on, the CPU of the performance control board P41 executes a power-on process (step 4000). Here, the power-on process of the performance control board P41 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) begins on the presentation control board P41 of the pachinko gaming machine P, an initial setting process related to the operation of the CPU, which is the calculation device provided on the presentation control board P41, is performed (step 4002). The initial setting process appropriately performs the settings necessary for subsequent CPU operation, and details are omitted here. However, for the presentation that was running when the previous power outage occurred, there is a time lag between the completion of the power-on process for the main control board P40 (Figure 57) and the power-on process for the presentation control board (Figure 65). Therefore, if the presentation before the power outage is resumed after power is restored, there is a risk of a discrepancy with the operation of the main control board P40. Therefore, when power is restored to the presentation control board P41, the initial setting process often initializes presentation information, etc. so that the presentation that was running before the power outage is not executed (this is called a "presentation control board reset" or "sub-reset").

(Main loop of the performance control board)
In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the process proceeds to main loop processing after initial setting processing. In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the cycle (frame) time for drawing effect images on the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS) so that 30 images are drawn per second, and therefore the main loop processing is configured to be performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half of that cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

The main loop processing of the performance control board P41 first performs a watchdog timer clear process to detect CPU runaway (step 4004).

Next, a process to update the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, updating the various effect control random numbers to be used when an opportunity arises to execute an effect lottery.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The assumed pachinko gaming machine P is designed to monitor input ports even during interrupt processing of the performance control board P41, which will be described later. However, since the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing is performed at a 16 ms cycle, it is limited to monitoring inputs from switches and other devices that are necessary for the system to monitor, and does not monitor inputs from sensors and other devices that are necessary for performance control of the performance movable device P560. As a variant, sensors that need to be monitored for performance purposes may be checked during the input port monitoring processing in the main loop processing.

The input port monitoring process is similar to the input port confirmation process on the main control board, generating and storing level data from input data from various sensors, and storing rising (falling) data.

Next, the performance control board P41 performs a performance device control process (step 4010) to control performance operations other than those of the performance display device P80 (image display). The performance devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), and movable performance props P560. Performance operation commands corresponding to the performance content determined by processing such as the performance control process (step 4012) described below are sent to each of these performance devices to cause them to perform the performance operations.

The output of performance operation commands to the various performance devices in the performance device control process (step 4010) must be executed (started) in synchronization with the performance image displayed on the performance display device P80 (image display device). Therefore, when a signal is sent at regular intervals from the image control board P42, which controls the performance display device P80, to the performance control board P41, or a signal attempting forced synchronization is received (received during the input port monitoring process described above), the performance operation commands are output to the various performance devices in synchronization with the performance switch timing of the performance display device P80.

In addition, with regard to the operation control of the movable performance element P560 within the performance device, shorter cycle control is required for the drive means of the movable performance element P560. Therefore, for the operation pattern of the movable performance element P560 that is executed by the performance operation command set in this process, sensor monitoring and operation switching are also performed during the interrupt processing of the performance control board P41 (see Figure 66), which will be described later.

Next, we will explain the performance control process (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the performance control board P41. The performance control process determines the performance content to be executed by various performance devices by drawing lots or selecting it based on flags that are established based on the results of analyzing the performance control command received from the main control board P40 in the performance control command analysis process described below, information about the received performance control command itself (such as the lottery result ID for the special pattern lottery), input port monitoring process (step 4008), interrupt processing (Figure 66), and other flags that are established during other processing.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding sub-module process for effect determination. Examples of the effect content determined here include a process that determines the variable effect corresponding to one special pattern change based on commands related to the results of the special pattern lottery (win/lose command, pattern command, change pattern command) (processing that determines the details of the preview or reach, and the decorative pattern to stop), a pre-reading lottery process that determines whether to execute a pre-reading effect (also called a "pre-determination effect") for a newly created hold based on hold number information and pre-determination information sent when a hold occurs, and a special game effect content determination process that determines the effect content during special play based on information sent as an effect control command when a special game (big win or small win) is executed.

In addition, the presentation control processing not only processes presentation control commands sent from the main control board P40, but also determines the error display content when an error is detected on the presentation control board P41 (including determining the error display content based on error information sent from the main control board), adjusts the volume output from the speaker P83 based on input operations by the player using the presentation operation means P81, such as the presentation button P381 and cross key P383, adjusts the light intensity to change the light emission brightness of the lamp P82, and customizes the presentation content and presentation content determination tendency.

Note that the process for determining the various presentation contents performed by the sub-module processing called by the presentation control processing often uses specifications unique to each gaming machine, so we will not explain it here. Instead, when performing processing with characteristics in the pachinko gaming machine P that is the subject of the invention, we will provide a detailed explanation of the processing in the description of the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine P that is the subject of the invention.

Returning to the explanation of the main loop processing of the performance control board, we will now explain the performance control command analysis processing (step 4014) as the final processing step of the main loop processing.

The performance control command analysis process stores information corresponding to the performance control commands used to determine the performance content in the performance control process described above, and sets flags, based on the information stored as performance control commands sent from the main control board P40. This process must determine the processing content based on the commands sent from the main control board P40, and the processing content is determined from the contents of the performance control commands, namely, the MODE data and EVENT data, and the processing corresponding to the performance control command is executed.

Note that, since one effect control command (MODE data and EVENT data) may be sent for each interrupt process of the main control board P40 (every 4 ms), the assumed pachinko gaming machine P repeatedly analyzes the effect control command as much as possible until the main loop processing cycle (16 ms) of the effect control board P41 has elapsed (step 4016).

[Performance control board interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board P41. Unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, the interrupt processing of the performance control board P41 has multiple interrupt processing that are started at different execution triggers (see Figures 66(A) and (B)). Note that these multiple interrupt processings are assigned priorities, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, the higher priority interrupt processing is controlled to be executed even while an interrupt processing is being executed. In this explanation, we will explain the performance control timer interrupt processing (Figure 66(A)) and the performance control command reception interrupt (Figure 66(B)) as representative examples.

(Performance control timer interrupt processing)
The performance control timer interrupt processing (Figure 66 (A)) is an interrupt processing executed at 1 ms intervals in the CPU of the performance control board P41.

The port input/output process (step 5002) generates and stores level data and rising data from the input of sensors provided for detecting the position of the movable performance prop P560 and other sensors (input sensors of the performance operation means P81) via the input port of the performance control board P41, and outputs a drive signal from the output port to the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the movable performance prop P560 according to the operating pattern set in the performance device control process. In addition, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) that counts the number of outputs is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) subtracts and adds to the timer that measures the timing for switching performance actions. When the update process for each timer is completed, a comparison is performed with the comparison value to determine whether the performance action switching condition has occurred, and the performance control process (step 4012) stores the information and flags necessary for determining the performance content in a memory area.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) uses the sensor detection data generated by the port input/output process to determine whether sensor detection information related to switching performance operations has occurred, such as whether the performance operation switching conditions of the performance movable prop P560 have been met, and performs processing to switch the operation pattern table or set a condition flag to determine the performance content in the performance control process (step 4012).

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process that determines whether the effect switching conditions are met based on input from the effect operation means P81, such as the effect button P381, lever P382, and directional pad P383. The effect button monitoring process determines whether the effect operation means P81 has been operated and the type of operation based on the level data and rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from off last time to on this time) that indicate the input status of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002).

For example, if rising data is generated as input information to the effect operation means P81, it is assumed that a player operation has been performed on the effect operation means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. Note that, since determining input based solely on rising data may result in a false detection due to electrical noise, which could result in the effect operation being switched, it may also be determined that a player operation on the effect operation means P81 (sometimes referred to as a "single push (single pull) operation" or "single hit operation") has occurred when multiple consecutive inputs of level data (on data) have been made after the generation of rising data.

Furthermore, if on input level data is detected 500 times in a row, i.e., if it is determined that the performance operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined to be a "long press (prolonged)" operation and is treated as a special operation. Note that when determining whether or not a "long press (prolonged)" operation has occurred and whether it should continue, falling edge data (data indicating that the level data has changed from on previously to off this time) may be detected as electrical noise. In this case, as with the measures to prevent erroneous detection described above, the end of the "long press (prolonged)" operation can be determined based on the detection of multiple level data (off data) inputs after the detection of falling edge data.

The underlying pachinko gaming machine P can, depending on the content of the effects currently being executed, repeatedly execute a process that treats a "single press (single pull)" input operation of the effect operation means P81 at regular intervals (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing a "long press" operation on the effect button P381. This repeated execution of a process that is triggered by a special operation such as a "long press (long pull)" operation and treats it as a "single press" operation is called an "auto-rapid press" operation. Note that the "auto-rapid press" operation is not limited to the example operations, and it is also possible to employ a method that treats an "auto-rapid press" operation as having been executed based on the input of the effect button P381 by simultaneously operating multiple effect operation means P81 or by turning on and off a dip switch or the like that is provided as a switch separate from the effect button.

Note that, depending on the execution status of the effect, there are periods during which input to the effect operation means P81 is treated as a valid operation ("valid operation period") and periods during which it is treated as an invalid operation ("invalid operation period").

Multitasking processing (step 5010) involves changing the processing content to be executed during the currently occurring performance control timer interrupt processing depending on the value of the task counter (updated between values "0" and "15"), which is updated each time the performance control timer interrupt processing is executed. The task counter is configured to cycle in a 16 ms cycle, and processing at each counter value is executed approximately in sync with one cycle of the main loop processing. One example of processing in each task is to determine whether the image control board P42 can operate based on a signal sent from the image control board P42 (input information generated by port input/output processing), and to monitor the operating status of the image control board P42.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) is a process of transmitting an image control command (sometimes called a "sub-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 in order to cause the CPU of the image control board P42 to execute an image display according to the performance content determined in the performance control process P41. Note that the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured on the same board, but for convenience, they will be referred to as the image control board P42 in this specification.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the performance control board P41 is configured to send image control commands to the image control board P42, consisting of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command specifying the pattern of the display content.

Incidentally, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is configured to send image control commands via a presentation control timer interrupt process, but it is also possible to configure the sending and receiving of commands between the presentation control board P41 and the image control board P42 to be performed by providing a separate interrupt process.

(Performance control command reception interrupt)
The performance control command reception interrupt (Figure 66 (B)) is an interrupt process that occurs when a strobe signal is output during the performance control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (Figure 59) of the main control board P40 and the strobe signal is received by the performance control board P41.

When the performance control board P41 starts the performance control command reception interrupt, it reads the performance control command (MODE data or EVENT data) sent from the output port of the main control board P40, updates the temporary buffer data, and stores it (steps 5502 and 5504).

Once the temporary buffer data has been updated, it is determined whether reception of one performance control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). Note that the performance control command sent from the main control board P40 is one byte of data, with specific bits set to "1" or "0".

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, the contents of the currently received performance control command are normally stored in the lowest byte of storage area. At this time, if a specific bit in the lowest byte of the current temporary buffer data storage area before the update indicates MODE data, the stored data in the temporary buffer data is shifted and stored in the highest byte of storage area, and then the currently received EVENT data is stored in the lowest byte of storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in determining whether reception of the performance control command has been completed in step 5506, a determination is made as to whether a specific bit in the lowest byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data. If it is determined to be EVENT data, reception of performance control command 1 is deemed to be completed (step 5506 YES) and processing proceeds to the next step. If it is determined to be MODE data (step 5506 NO), the performance control command reception interrupt is exited and other processing is performed while waiting until a strobe signal based on the transmission of EVENT data is received from the main control board P40.

If it is determined in step 5506 that reception of the performance control command has been completed, it is determined whether the sent performance control command was normal (step 5508). This process is performed, for example, based on whether matching data exists in the list of performance control commands that can be sent from the main control board P40. If it is determined to be a normal command, it is stored in a memory area for storing received performance control commands so that it can be analyzed in the performance control command analysis process during the performance control timer interrupt process, and if the data is abnormal, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Basic image display example]
Next, the basic effects of the pachinko gaming machine P will be explained using Figures 67 to 70. Figure 67 is a diagram showing the symbol variation display (when decorative symbols are displayed stationary) during normal play (low probability/low base), and Figure 68 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect with a high probability of a jackpot is being performed. Figure 69 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being performed, and Figure 70 is a diagram showing game effects during operation of the electric chute support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base).

(Example of a normal gameplay display)《Decorative design》
FIG. 67 shows the symbol variation display (when decorative symbols are displayed) during normal play (low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in the approximate center of the screen in a manner that is clearly visible to the player. These three symbols are called "decorative symbols (P801)" (also called "decorative symbols") and are display objects that are displayed in response to the results of a special symbol lottery. They vary in sync with the display of the special symbol variations. While only numbers are shown in FIG. 67, each number may also be accompanied by a decorative image, such as a character image. Furthermore, if each number is configured to be accompanied by a decorative image, the display mode of the decorative image and each number may vary depending on the game state. This configuration allows the player to easily determine the current game state.

Except when a special effect is being performed, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed once for each special pattern change (each special pattern lottery). Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is displayed, the decorative pattern changes rapidly (sometimes becoming transparent or hidden), and a "preview" using animations and effect images is used to heighten the anticipation of winning the right to play a jackpot.

When the decorative pattern P801 shown in Figure 67 begins to change, it scrolls vertically (from top to bottom), and then the stopped display patterns determined by the effect control board P41 are displayed in a stopped state for each pattern row in the order of left pattern (P801a), right pattern (P801c), and center pattern (P801b). Generally, when three decorative patterns P801 are displayed in the same pattern (identical), a jackpot is announced. Furthermore, a state in which one pattern is displayed changing while other patterns are displayed, such as when the left and right patterns are displayed in the same pattern (provisionally stopped) before the center pattern P801b, which is the last pattern to stop (also called the "final stopping pattern"), stops, is called a "reach" ("reach state" or "reach mode").

The changing display of decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a manner that scrolls vertically (from top to bottom), but the manner of the changing display is not limited to vertical, and it may also be displayed in a manner that scrolls horizontally or diagonally using depth, or it may be displayed in a manner that rotates in place without scrolling and switches sequentially.

In addition, decorative pattern P801 may stop multiple times during one variable display of a special pattern. In this case, when multiple stops are displayed, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display that appears at the same time as the special pattern stop display pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device, and stop displays at other times are called "temporary stops (displays)." Note that stop displays that appear at the same time as the special pattern stop display are sometimes referred to as "main stops."

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, in order to distinguish it from the final stop display of the pattern (actual stop), the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed, but is temporarily stopped to the extent that it cannot be considered fixed, or it moves in directions such as up and down or left and right, or it sways around a single rotation axis. In addition to being called a temporary stop, this state is sometimes referred to as "swing fluctuation."

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may change again. Generally, a re-change from a state in which a pattern other than a jackpot pattern has temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-change (pseudo-consecutive)" effect, and a re-change in which the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed may be changed after the jackpot pattern has stopped is called a "promotion (change)" effect. Note that when a promotion effect is executed, it may be configured so that the pattern does not change to a jackpot pattern that is less favorable than the stopped jackpot pattern, or so that the pattern does not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when decorative symbol P801 stops, there is a type of special decorative symbol that is not displayed during normal variable display, but is displayed only when certain effects are executed; this is called the "special decorative symbol (P804)" (special symbol). Each special decorative symbol has a meaning, such as suggesting that a specific jackpot will be executed, that the aforementioned pseudo-variable effect will be executed, or that a specific reach effect (a preview effect that is displayed when a reach state is reached) will be executed. When using a special symbol, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the last decorative symbol (middle symbol P801b), or it may be temporarily stopped as a single decorative symbol that substitutes for all of left symbol P801a, middle symbol P801b, and right symbol P801c.

"Simple mounting diagram (mini mounting diagram)"
In the upper right corner of the screen, three numbers are displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801. This pattern is also called the "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design," and like the "decorative pattern" mentioned above, it is displayed as a display showing the lottery result of the special pattern in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern.

Unlike "decorative patterns," the simplified design P802 (mini design) always displays a single stop for each special pattern lottery, even when a special effect is being performed in which the decorative pattern P801 is not displayed in a static state, in conjunction with the special pattern indicating the result of the special lottery being displayed on the special pattern display devices P51 and P52.

Furthermore, the variable display of the simplified decorative pattern P802 may be configured to form the same reach state when the decorative pattern P801 described above reaches a reach state, or, in order to achieve the minimum objective of announcing the results of the special pattern lottery, a simplified variable display method may be adopted in which a certain display switching is performed until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a stopped display state, regardless of the decorative pattern P801.

《Hold display area》
A reserve display area P810 is provided in the lower area of Fig. 67. In the reserve display area P810, reserve objects P811 corresponding to reserves (random number values) corresponding to unexercised rights to special symbol lotteries that the player has acquired are displayed. The example of Fig. 67 shows a state in which three rights to special symbol lotteries are reserved.

In the example of Figure 67, the earlier the special pattern lottery is held (i.e., the earlier the hold occurs), the closer it is to being displayed in a position roughly toward the center of the bottom of the screen.The display position of the hold object located at the far right of the hold display area P810 is called "Hold 1 (display area)," and as you move toward the left side of the screen, they are called "Hold 2 (display area)," "Hold 3 (display area)," and "Hold 4 (display area)."

Also, near the right side of the pending display area P810, an object that is roughly identical to the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger than the pending object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special pattern variable display from the pending display area, and is referred to as the "variable object display area (P812)." Also, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called the "variable object (P813)," but may also be referred to as the "pending display," and the initial "variable" is added to differentiate it from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810.

The display mode of the variable object P813 in the variable object display area P812 does not need to be configured exactly the same as the reserved object P811, and when a reserved display moves and displays in the variable object display area P812 as the variable begins to change, its shape may change or it may disappear (become hidden). The variable object P813 may also be configured so that its display mode can change in the same way as the reserved display in the reserved change pre-read described below (for example, the shape or color of the object changes at a timing during the variable display).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed vertically in the center of the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called the "Simple Reserve Display (P814)." In the example in Figure 67, the number of reserved first special symbols is indicated by the number "3" displayed at the top, and the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated by the number "4" displayed at the bottom.

(Predictive effect)《Predictive change pending》
67, the reserved object P811 in the Hold 3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the display areas of Hold 2 and Hold 1. The assumed pachinko gaming machine P is configured so that the display manner of the reserved object P811 in Hold 3 is more likely to result in a jackpot than the display manner of the reserved object P811 in Hold 2. In this way, the effect of changing the display manner of the reserved object P811 for a specific reserved item is called "reserved change (prediction)."

In addition, the display mode of the reserved object P811 may be changed in stages, not limited to the mode illustrated in Figure 67, but by configuring it so that there are multiple types of change modes, each with a different probability (expectation level) of a jackpot.

In addition to "hold change (pre-reading)," when a random number stored as a hold is determined to be the target for an effect, an effect that suggests there is a high possibility that the hold that is the target for the effect will be a jackpot before the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the target for the effect begins is called a "pre-reading effect" (sometimes called a "pre-determination effect").

When a "pre-reading effect" is executed, the hold determined as the hold that will be the target for the effect may be referred to as a "pre-reading target hold," "trigger hold," "culprit hold," etc., and the variable display of the special pattern based on the pre-reading target hold is referred to as a "pre-reading target change," "trigger change," "culprit change," etc.

Here, we will provide some examples of typical "prediction effects" that can be adopted in the underlying pachinko gaming machine P.

《Chance Prediction》
"Chance eye pre-reading" is an effect in which, in the display of the decorative pattern P801 until the start of the variation of the pre-read target variation, a stopped display pattern of the decorative pattern P801 that conforms to a predetermined rule is displayed as stopped (or temporarily stopped). Examples of rules for the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 that are predetermined as chance eyes include (a) when a missing pattern is displayed as stopped by a combination of only patterns with the same color in the number portion of the decorative pattern, (b) when the stopped patterns of the decorative pattern, such as "1", "2", "3" or "5", "4", "3", are displayed in a regular stop display mode such as a sequence of numbers (forward order, reverse order), and (c) when a special number such as "7" or a pattern different from the numbers, such as "first", is displayed as a stopped display pattern of the center pattern.

"Prediction of moving props"
"Prediction of the movable effect device" is a presentation in which the movable effect device P560 or the frame movable effect device P360 (such as the lever P382 of the pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3) operates in a lively manner according to a presentation operation pattern from the start of the change until the change display of the predicted target change begins, or across the predicted target change.

Zone transition prediction
"Zone transition pre-reading" is a pre-reading effect that suggests a high probability of a jackpot by transitioning to a special presentation mode (called a "zone") during the special symbol variation display before the pre-reading target variation begins, and then executing a pre-reading lottery to execute a pre-reading effect corresponding to the special presentation mode until the variation display that becomes the pre-reading target variation. For example, it will be "display normal background → display pre-reading background → jackpot" or "display normal background → display pre-reading background → losing symbol stops and returns to normal background."

(Example of display when reach effect is executed)
Next, Figure 68 is a diagram showing a situation in which a reach effect is being performed, which has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot. As mentioned above, the "reach effect" refers to a situation in which decorative symbols (left symbol P801a, right symbol P801c) other than the one decorative symbol (center symbol P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and it is announced that a jackpot will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner.

In the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, a jackpot is often signaled by a reach effect in which three decorative symbols P801 appear in the same stopped display pattern.

In the example of Figure 68, the left decorative symbol P801a and the right decorative symbol P801c are displayed as "5," and the symbols in the changing middle symbol row are "4," "5," and "6." The "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5," a jackpot will occur.

In the example of Figure 68, the left and right decorative symbols, "5," are displayed smaller than the decorative symbol P801 displayed when stopped in Figure 67, and the decorative symbol P801b in the middle symbol row during the variable display is displayed larger and highlighted than the decorative symbol P801 displayed when stopped. The small decorative symbols corresponding to the left symbol P801a and right symbol P801c at this time are sometimes referred to as "retreat symbols (P803)" or "reach symbols." In addition to the example shown, in reach effects, whether or not a jackpot will occur may be announced based on the outcome of the preview animation (reach effect) displayed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative symbols. By displaying the left symbol P801a and right symbol P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped, as smaller retreat symbols P803 (or not displaying them), the visibility of the effect to which the player is to be drawn is enhanced.

In addition, gaming machines that display more than three decorative symbols P801 are also known, and there are also multi-line reaches that simultaneously form multiple lines of reach patterns, but we will not go into detail here.

An exception to reach effects is a reach effect called a "full rotation reach," in which all three decorative symbols P801 are displayed synchronously and changing in the same manner. While this differs from the standard for reach effects, which is "a situation in which all decorative symbols except for one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and a jackpot is announced when one more symbol stops in the same manner," a full rotation reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach effect.

Also in Figure 68, the "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of Figure 68, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The effect setting display area P850 is an area that displays the setting status and change status of the volume setting function, which adjusts the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the gaming machine P, the light intensity adjustment function, which adjusts the brightness of the decorative lamp P82 of the gaming machine P, and the effect mode change function, which changes the type of preview effect that occurs, called the effect mode, and changes the frequency at which the preview effect occurs.

The effect setting display area P850 is not displayed at all times, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs operations related to the various effect settings mentioned above (volume adjustment function, light intensity adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, by operating the directional pad P383 left or right, it is possible to display the effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. 68. In the situation shown in FIG. 68, if the player further operates the right button on the directional pad P383, the set volume level (blacked out area in the figure) will increase, and the volume setting value will change from "3" to "4."

In addition, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is configured so that when adjusting the light intensity, the change is made by operating the directional pad P383 in the up and down directions, and an example of the presentation mode change function is to switch presentation modes in a predetermined order in response to the operation of the presentation button. Note that the operations related to these presentation settings may use different operating methods depending on the execution of the presentation during play, and methods for changing settings other than those exemplified above may also be used as appropriate.

In addition, it is possible to set periods during which the player's effect setting operations are enabled and disabled with regard to the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, and when a particularly important effect is being executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of display during jackpot play)
Next, based on Figure 69, we will explain the display mode of the presentation when a jackpot game is being played on the underlying pachinko gaming machine P.

"Display showing the type of jackpot"
The decorative symbol P801 that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is displayed at the bottom left and top right of the screen in Fig. 69. As in the execution of the aforementioned reach effect, the bottom left of the screen displays the decorative symbol P801 (also called the "jackpot symbol (P805)") in a display mode smaller than the decorative symbol being displayed, and the top right of the screen continues to display the simple symbol P802 that was displayed when the display of the special symbol was completed.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the type of decorative pattern P801 that triggers the jackpot (the pattern that stops and displays when the jackpot occurs) indicates to the player the type of jackpot that will be executed, the expected number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot ends (normal game state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns (jackpot decoration pattern P805, simple pattern P802) that trigger the jackpot in this way, it is possible to indicate the type of jackpot and the expected number of game balls that can be acquired even during jackpot play.

In addition, as an indication of the type of jackpot, Figure 69 displays an icon image P821 resembling a pentagonal shield below the string "ROUND 6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"), with the word "MAX" written in the center of the icon P821. The icon P821 in the figure indicates the jackpot indicated by the string "MAX," indicating that the maximum number of rounds of jackpot play available on the underlying pachinko gaming machine P will be played. This icon P821 is also called a "jackpot icon" or "cascade (display) icon," and is a display that increases cumulatively each time a specific game state and jackpot game are repeatedly played, informing the player how many times and what type of jackpot they have won in the so-called "cascade" state.

Although not shown, the underlying pachinko gaming machine P executes a presentation to notify the player of the type of jackpot by displaying "XX Bonus!" (announces a maximum round jackpot) or "△△ Chance" (indicates a jackpot that is not a maximum round) in the "Jackpot Start Demo Presentation" presentation that is executed during the jackpot start demo period.

In addition, even if a jackpot such as a "△△ Chance" with a small number of executed rounds is indicated, it is possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" during the jackpot round, such as an "Extra Bonus! + 〇 Rounds" to announce that the executed jackpot round is actually a jackpot of the maximum number of rounds.

The "jackpot promotion effect" may also be used to indicate that a jackpot game is being played, which will result in a transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the type of jackpot that was previously announced. For example, the effect display may switch from an effect for a jackpot game (called a "non-variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") that suggests the probability fluctuation function will not be activated after the jackpot game, to an effect for a jackpot game (called a "variable jackpot" or "specific jackpot") in which the probability fluctuation function will be activated after the jackpot game.

"Display showing the progress of the jackpot game"
Next, we will explain the display effects that indicate the progress of a jackpot game when a jackpot game is played. In Figure 69, examples of display effects that indicate a jackpot include a "round display (P820)" that is executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_0" in the upper left of the screen, a "number of acquired balls display (P822)" that is executed by displaying the character string "TOTAL_00pt" in the lower right of the screen, and a "count display (P825)" that is displayed by 10 circular image objects in the approximate center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, in addition to these displays, image displays such as animations called "round effects" are also displayed during a jackpot game.

<Round Display>
The "Round Display (P820)" is a display that indicates the number of rounds of the round game (unit game) currently being played during a jackpot game. The number to the right of "ROUND" is updated when a round game starts. The example in FIG. 69 shows that the sixth round of round game is being played.

Note that the "Round Display (p820)" does not necessarily have to be synchronized with the number of rounds actually executed during jackpot play. For example, in the specifications for the aforementioned "Small Win V," the small win play may be counted as the first round, and the first round of the jackpot play executed after a V win may be treated as the second round. In another example, if the opening pattern of the large prize opening P751 during round play ends with a transition to a short-term easy-to-score state, the value of the "Round Display" may not be updated, and the round that was actually executed may be treated as an "actual round" only when the opening pattern of the large prize opening becomes a long-term easy-to-score state.

《Number of balls acquired》
The "Number of balls acquired display (P822)" includes a "Number of balls acquired in jackpot display (P823 *not shown)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in one jackpot game currently being played, and a "Cumulative number of balls acquired display (824)" that displays the number of game balls accumulated in multiple jackpots, including specific games. Figure 69 shows an example in which the "Cumulative number of balls acquired display (P824)," which displays the number of balls acquired in five digits, is displayed. Note that the "Number of balls acquired in jackpot display (P823)" and the "Cumulative number of balls acquired display (P824)" may be displayed in parallel at the same time.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the "number of acquired balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the large prize slot P751 during jackpot play. However, the accumulated prize ball payouts for the number of acquired balls display P822 may also be cumulatively added up based on balls entering the general prize slot P731 and the second start prize slot P721 located in the right-hand area P501R of the gaming board P5.

In another variation, the display period for the "Number of Balls Acquired Display (P822)" may be extended not only during jackpot play but also during specific play, and the period for adding up the cumulative number of prize balls paid out on the "Number of Balls Acquired Display (P822)" may be extended not only during jackpot play but also during specific play and small jackpot play.

In addition to the "Number of balls acquired display (P822)," the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is also capable of executing a "Cutoff number of acquired balls display" effect, which highlights and notifies the player of the cutoff number of balls acquired in addition to the "Number of balls acquired display" only in special situations, such as when the cumulative number of paid-out prize balls reaches a cutoff number, such as "2500 balls," "5000 balls," or "10000 balls" (for example, "GET 10000!!" is displayed).

<Count display>
The "count display (P825)" is a display that shows how many game balls are left to enter in one round of play until the number of game balls set as the closing condition for the large prize opening P751 is reached, or how many game balls have entered the large prize opening P751 in the current round of play. The former is displayed as a shaded circular object in Fig. 69, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two rows in approximately the center of the right side of the screen.

In the example of Figure 69, in the sixth round of play, five balls have already been placed in the big prize slot (shown by the open circular objects), and the count display P825 indicates that five more balls can be placed (shown by the shaded circular objects). The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round begins.

During a round of jackpot play, depending on the flow of game balls, a winning combination may occur in which a number of game balls equal to or exceeds the closing conditions of the large prize winning port P751, following a game ball that satisfies the closing conditions of the large prize winning port P751. Such a winning combination of game balls equal to or exceeds the closing conditions is called an "over winning combination."

Although not shown, when an "over win" occurs, a special effect may be produced using the object display of the count display P825, or the effect may be notified by a special light emission from the effect lamp P82 or a special sound effect from the speaker P83. Furthermore, with regard to the aforementioned number of balls won display P822, the number of prize balls paid out based on the "over win" may or may not be subject to addition.

Other display effects during jackpot play
Next, other effect displays that are being executed in FIG. 69 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed approximately in the center of the left side of the screen are the simple hold display P814 mentioned above.

The "Sound_2" display displayed to the right of the decorative pattern (jackpot decoration P805) in the lower left corner of the screen is the "selected song display (P854)" that shows the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. The underlying pachinko gaming machine P is designed to allow the player to select the song to be played at will by operating the effect button P381 or directional pad P383 during the first or second round of jackpot play. Regarding the selected song display P854, if the song can be changed, an image stating "You can change it with the (up) or (down) keys" is displayed near the selected song display P854, as shown in Figure 70.

Note that the selection of effects during such jackpot play is not limited to changing the music, but also allows for changes to the round effects and the selection of effects (effect modes) during specific play after the jackpot play (collectively referred to as "effect customization display (P853)"), but a detailed explanation of these will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right Hit" and right-hand arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified diagram P802 in the upper right corner of the screen are images related to the "Hit Selection Notification (P830)" (also known as the "Recommended Launch Position Notification"). In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, during a jackpot game, the game state is such that it is recommended to launch the game ball into the right-hand area P501R of the game area, so the "Right Hit Notification (P832)" (display of the text "Right Hit" and right-hand arrow symbol) is executed.

The "Shot Selection Notification" may be displayed not only during jackpot play, but also during play in specific game modes and normal game modes. In particular, in situations where the game mode changes (occurrence/end of a jackpot, or occurrence/end of a specific game mode), a larger display that is easier for the player to recognize than the shot selection notification P830 shown in Figure 69 is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., to notify the player of the recommended launch position for the next game mode.

In addition, in the "Shot Selection Notification (P830)", the image that is temporarily displayed in a larger size when the game state transitions is referred to as the "First Shot Selection Notification Image" ("Large Right Shot Display (P831)", "Large Left Shot Display (P833)"), and the display that displays the recommended launch position for the game state during a jackpot game or a specific game state for almost the entire duration of the game state is sometimes referred to as the "Second Shot Selection Notification Image" ("Small Right Shot Display (P832)", "Small Left Shot Display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of "Shot Selection Notification (P830)" effect, if a situation is detected in which a game ball is fired into a position other than the recommended launch position, for example, if a game ball is fired into the left area P501L of the play area during a jackpot, a "Left-Hit Warning Notification" ("Right-Hit Warning Notification (P835)") is issued to alert the player that the game ball should be fired into the right area P501R of the play area, displaying a message such as "Please hit right." Note that if the recommended launch position and the player's actual launch position are reversed, a "Right-Hit Warning Notification" ("Left-Hit Warning Notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of a display effect during a specific game mode)
70 is a diagram showing the game effects when the electric chute support function is activated during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). A wide variety of effects are displayed in the diagram, but we will omit the explanation of those that have been explained above and will instead explain effects that have not been explained so far and effects that differ from those explained above.

First, we will explain the "Display Mode (P840)" and "Remaining Plays Display (P841)" as display effects during specific game modes that have not been explained so far.

"Display of performance mode"
The "presentation mode display (P840)" is a display showing the current state of the presentation display mode, and is a display showing that a preview presentation corresponding to the corresponding mode is being selected by lottery based on status information called the presentation mode. When the presentation mode display differs, the types of preview presentations visible to the player are generally designed to give a significantly different visual impression, although some preview presentations have the same features. In Figure 70, the display "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the underlying pachinko gaming machine P is "ST (number cut probability change)" (high probability/high base state).

In addition to announcing the presentation mode in a specific game state, the "presentation mode display (P840)" may also be displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), and when there are multiple presentation modes in one game state, the display may be temporary each time the conditions for switching presentation modes are met, or may continue until the presentation mode ends.

《Display of remaining number of games》
The "remaining number of games displayed (P841)" indicates the number of times the special symbol will change (the number of special symbol lotteries) until the specific game state ends, or the number of times the special symbol will change (the number of special symbol lotteries) until the current presentation mode ends. In Figure 70, the message "56 remaining" is displayed in the upper center of the screen, informing the player that the "ST (number of times cut probability change)" game state will continue until 56 more special symbol lotteries are executed.

Next, we will explain the differences between the display examples for the specific game state shown in Figure 70 and the display examples for the other game states described above.

Decorative symbols (specific game states)
A variable display of a decorative pattern P801 is displayed in the center of the screen in Fig. 70. Compared to the decorative pattern P801 in the example of the effect display in the normal gaming state in Fig. 70, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the example of the effect display in the specific gaming state in Fig. 70.

In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the specific gaming state display includes a display mode P840, remaining play count P841, and jackpot icon P821 at the top of the screen, while the selected music P854 and number of balls won P824 are displayed at the bottom of the screen. In the specific gaming state, these additional displays, which are not displayed in the normal gaming state (low probability/low base state), are displayed. Therefore, if the decorative pattern P801 were displayed at the same size as in the normal gaming state, some of the displayed patterns would overlap with other displays during the stopped display, potentially reducing the visibility of the stopped display patterns. Therefore, in the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, the decorative pattern P801 is displayed small and simplified to prevent this problem from occurring. Examples of simplified decorative pattern P801 display include reducing the size, or not displaying character images or the like that are displayed in conjunction with the numbers indicating the patterns.

《Pending display area (specific game state)》
In the assumed pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in Fig. 70, the display area of reserved objects P811 in the reserved display area P810 in a specific game state is provided from the front side of the screen toward the depth direction, with reserved object display areas of "Reserved 1" to "Reserved 4". Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" presentation mode state.

When the display of the change shown in Figure 70 ends and a new change begins in this state, the display of the reserved object P811 located at the bottom of Figure 70 disappears, and the display of the reserved objects P811 lined up in the back moves forward and is controlled so that their displays become larger.

We will also explain the "result display effect," which is an important effect displayed during specific games, although it is not shown in the illustrations.

《Result display effect》
In the underlying pachinko gaming machine P, the "result display effect" is an effect that is mainly performed when the final change in a specific gaming state (high base state) is executed, or when the reserve that occurred during the specific gaming state is cleared, and is performed when the player recognizes that the "consecutive wins" state has ended. It is an effect that notifies the player of information on how many jackpot games have been won in the so-called "consecutive wins" state, and how many game balls have been won in total (equivalent to displaying the number of balls won).

<<How to display the confirmed effect>>
Next, a method for displaying the final effect according to the present invention will be described. The final effect described below can be applied to the slot machines and pachinko gaming machines described above.

<Confirmed performance>
A confirmation effect is an effect that indicates that a bonus or the like has been won. In addition to bonuses, it can also be used to transition to the AT, add to the AT (number of times, number of coins), etc. In pachinko gaming machines, it can indicate that a jackpot has been won, that a certain bonus has been entered, etc. A confirmation effect can be, for example, when letters or a predetermined background are displayed in rainbow colors on the display device 32 (effect display device P80), or when a special character is displayed. Furthermore, a confirmation effect can be not only when an image or moving image is displayed on the display device 32, etc., but also when a sound, which is a confirmation effect, is output from a speaker S, etc., or when the lighting pattern of a lamp, which is a confirmation effect, is illuminated by a cabinet lamp (a lamp on the board or a frame lamp in pachinko gaming machines), etc.

The confirmation effect may be configured to be displayed in either case, when it is decided to transition to a jackpot game such as a bonus or to an AT, when it is decided to add to the AT (number of times, number of coins) or to have consecutive jackpot games, or when it is configured to be displayed in either case.

Figure 71 shows an example of a confirmation effect where a string of characters is displayed in rainbow colors. Here, we will explain an example where the rainbow display (see the drawing if necessary) moves within each character, and then moves across the entire string of characters.

First, using Figure 71(a), we will explain the case where the word "chance" is displayed horizontally from left to right on the display device 32, and the rainbow display moves from left to right within each character, so that the rainbow display moves across the entire string of characters for "chance."

The rainbow display uses seven colors in the following order: red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple. The colors are displayed in a loop, so red is displayed after purple.

Here, the "chi" in "chance" is red on the left, purple in the middle, and indigo on the right. "ya" is indigo on the left, blue in the middle, and green on the right. "n" is yellow on the left, orange in the middle, and red on the right. "su" is red on the left, purple in the middle, and indigo on the right.

The rainbow display moves from left to right, and starting from the red of "n" and "su", the colors are displayed in the order red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple.

If we look at the colors displayed for each character, we see that three different colors are displayed within one character. To make it clear that the entire string of characters is rainbow-colored, it is preferable to display multiple colors within one character, and it is preferable to configure it so that at least one character can be displayed in three or more colors. However, this does not have to be the case, and it is also possible for one character to display two or only one color. For example, a character that is smaller than the other characters, such as the "ゃ" in "CHANCE," has a narrower displayable range, so it is more likely that two or one color will be displayed within the character compared to other characters.

Also, if the text is small, even if seven colors are displayed for one character, it may be difficult to see that there are seven colors, and the appearance may be poor.

Therefore, even if seven colors are not displayed within one character, by configuring the character to display multiple colors (e.g., three colors) from the seven colors within one character, it is possible to make the entire string appear to have seven colors.

Even with the smallest characters, the same color (same color) will never be displayed in two places within a single character. As mentioned above, the rainbow display is configured to display colors in the following order: red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple, so the same color will never be displayed in multiple places within a single character.

In this way, even if you enlarge the display area for one color, the displayed string can appear to be seven colors (rainbow colors) overall, without having to display seven colors within one character.

Furthermore, each character is displayed in multiple colors, but the colors on the same side of adjacent characters are configured to be different. For example, when comparing the "chi" and "ya" in "chans" (chance), the left side of the "chi" is red and the left side of the "ya" is indigo. The right side of the "chi" is indigo and the right side of the "ya" is green.

The colors on the left side of "chi" and "ya" are different, being red and indigo, respectively. On the other hand, the right side of "chi" and the left side of "ya" are both indigo and the same. In this way, the colors on the same end side (left and right sides) of adjacent letters are different, but the colors on different end sides (right and left sides) of adjacent letters can be the same color, as the rainbow display moves.

If the above configuration is not used, there is a risk that a string of characters consisting of multiple characters will appear to be individual characters rather than the entire string.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the entire string of characters, rather than individual characters, to appear as seven colors.

Note that in one gaming machine, not all cases in which text is displayed in rainbow colors need to be configured as described above. In other words, in the example described above, the text is arranged horizontally and the rainbow display moves horizontally, but the text may also be displayed diagonally and the rainbow display may also move diagonally in the same way. Also, the display direction of the text and the direction in which the rainbow display moves may be different. For example, the text may be arranged horizontally and the rainbow display may move vertically.

Next, using Figure 71 (b), we will explain a case where the word "chance" is displayed horizontally from left to right on the display device 32, and the rainbow color display moves from bottom to top within the word, so that the rainbow color display moves across the entire string of characters for "chance."

Here, the bottom row (W1) of the word "chance" is displayed in red, the middle row (W2) in purple, and the top row (W3) in indigo.

As explained in Figure 71 (a), the rainbow display is displayed in the following order: red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple. After this, over time, the bottom row (W1) will be orange, the middle row (W2) will be red, and the top row (W3) will be purple.

If multiple letters are not displayed in the same color horizontally (e.g., W1), and different colors are displayed for each letter, it may be difficult for the rainbow colors to be seen (for players to recognize them). Therefore, a specific configuration (color arrangement) is required to display rainbow colors that are easy to see (for players to recognize).

Therefore, by displaying the same color horizontally across multiple characters (e.g., W1) and making the vertical color shift consistent across the entire string, it becomes easier to recognize that the entire string is displayed in rainbow colors.

<Rainbow color display movement speed>
The speed at which the rainbow display moves may be set arbitrarily, but may be, for example, a speed at which the rainbow colors do not complete a full circle in one display. Because the display time of the characters in the effect displayed on the display device 32 is relatively short (about 2 to 5 seconds), by setting a moving speed at which the rainbow display does not complete a full circle while the character string is displayed, the player can be made to recognize the rainbow colors without any burden.

<Comparison with the rainbow-colored light emission of the cabinet lamps (frame lamps and panel lamps in pachinko machines)>
Next, the rainbow-colored display of the character string and the rainbow-colored light emitted by the case lamp are compared. Specifically, the timing at which the rainbow-colored display of the character string and the rainbow-colored light emitted by the case lamp start are compared.

When comparing the start timing of the rainbow display of the text string and the rainbow illumination of the case lamp, they can both start at roughly the same time, but the rainbow illumination of the case lamp (frame lamp, etc.) starts slightly earlier than the rainbow display of the text string.

This is because the housing lamp (frame lamp, etc.) is controlled by the sub-control means 1000, while the rainbow color display of the text is controlled by the image control means in accordance with instructions from the sub-control means 1000, and it takes longer for the rainbow color display of the text to start processing.

<If an error occurs during rainbow display (or rainbow light emission)>
Next, a case where a predetermined error (for example, a reel spin failure) occurs while the display device 32 is displaying a rainbow-colored character string and the housing lamp is emitting rainbow-colored light will be described.

If a specified error (e.g., a reel spinning failure) occurs while the rainbow-colored text is displayed and the rainbow-colored lighting of the housing lamp is occurring, and the reels are still spinning, the rainbow-colored text display and rainbow-colored lighting of the housing lamp will continue until all the reels come to a stop, at which point an error message will be displayed on the display device 32 and the housing lamp will switch to an error lighting mode.

Specific explanations will be given using Figure 72 (a). Please note that the explanation will begin assuming that the reels are currently spinning.

In Figure 72 (a), first, at timing t1, the rainbow-colored display of text (hereafter referred to as "rainbow text") is in progress and the housing lamp is emitting rainbow-colored light (hereafter referred to as "rainbow light emission mode").

Next, at timing t2, a specified error occurs. At this timing, no error is displayed on the display device 32. Similarly, the housing lamp does not emit an error light.

Next, at time t3, after the error occurred at time t2, rainbow characters are being displayed (also referred to as "rainbow character display in progress") and the rainbow light emission mode is being output (also referred to as "rainbow light emission in progress"), just as at time t1.

Next, at timing t4, the rainbow character display period ends.

Next, at time t5, the rainbow character display period ended at time t4, so the rainbow characters are not displayed and only the rainbow light emission mode continues.

Next, at timing t6, all reels come to a complete stop, the display device 32 begins to display an error, and the housing lamp begins to emit an error light.

In this way, even if a specified error occurs while the string of characters is displayed in rainbow colors ("rainbow characters") and the cabinet lamp is illuminating in rainbow colors ("rainbow illumination mode"), the error display and error illumination mode are not activated immediately, but rather after all the reels have stopped, thereby easing concerns that a bonus or other loss may occur due to an error occurring in the middle of a game.

Next, we will explain this using Figure 72(b). The start timing of the error light emission mode is different from Figure 72(a).

In Figure 72 (b), at timing t1, rainbow characters are being displayed and rainbow light is being emitted.

Next, at time t2, a specific error occurs. At this time, no error is displayed on the display device 32, but the housing lamp emits an error light.

Next, at time t3, a specific error occurred at time t2, so rainbow characters are being displayed and the error light is being emitted (also referred to as the error light is being emitted).

Next, at timing t4, the rainbow character display period ends.

Next, at time t5, the rainbow character display period ended at time t4, so the rainbow characters are not displayed and only the error light emission mode continues.

Next, at timing t6, all reels come to a complete stop, an error display begins on the display device 32, and the housing lamp continues to emit an error light.

In this way, it can be configured to start outputting only the error light emission mode when an error occurs.

This allows hall staff to identify the gaming machine on which an error is occurring at the exact moment it occurs.

<When an error occurs in a pachinko machine>
Next, an example will be described using Figure 73 in which an error occurs in the pachinko gaming machine while rainbow characters are displayed and the rainbow light is emitting. The rainbow characters are displayed on the effect display device P80, and the rainbow light emitting mode is output by the frame lamp (and/or the board lamp).

<When an error occurs in a pachinko machine 1>
First, we will explain what happens when a frame opening error occurs using Figure 73 (a). A frame opening error is an error that occurs when the frame opening switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is open relative to the outer frame) is off. We will start the explanation assuming that the special symbol is changing.

First, at timing t1, rainbow characters are being displayed and rainbow light is being emitted.

Next, at time t2, a frame open error occurs. At this time, the rainbow characters continue to be displayed, but the frame lamp changes to an error light emission mode indicating an error, and an error sound begins to be output from speaker P83.

The error message may be displayed together with rainbow letters on the performance display device P80. The error message and rainbow letters may be displayed with at least a partial overlap, or may be displayed in separate display areas without overlapping.

Next, at time t3, since the frame open error occurred at time t2, rainbow characters are being displayed, the error light is being emitted, and an error sound is being output (also referred to as an error sound being played).

Next, at time t4, the rainbow character display ends.

Next, at time t5, the rainbow character display has ended at time t4, so the rainbow character is no longer displayed, and the error light emission and error sound output continue.

Next, at timing t6, the frame (front frame) closes. At this point, the frame open error is resolved, but the error light emission and error sound output continue until the respective predetermined times have elapsed, so the error light emission and error sound are still active.

Here, we will provide additional information regarding the error light emission mode and error sound output in the event of a frame opening error. When a frame opening error occurs, the frame lamp will repeatedly emit a predetermined pattern of error light emission mode until the frame is closed, and will continue to do so until 30 seconds have passed since the frame was closed. The speaker P83 will repeatedly emit an error sound (the voice saying "The door is open" + a "bzzz" sound) until the frame is closed, and will continue to emit the sound until 7 seconds have passed since the frame was closed. Note that when an error display (e.g., "The door is open") is displayed on the performance display device P80, the error display may be configured to end immediately upon detection of frame closure.

Next, at timing t7, 7 seconds have not yet passed since the frame was closed, so the error light emission and error sound output continue.

Next, at timing t8, the jackpot game begins. Here, even if 7 seconds have not yet passed since the frame was closed, the frame lamp will enter the jackpot light-emitting mode when the jackpot game begins. Similarly, even if 30 seconds have not yet passed since the frame was closed, the output of the error sound from speaker P83 will end and the output of the jackpot game sound will begin when the jackpot game begins.

In this way, even if the specified period after the error is resolved (7 seconds after the frame is closed for the frame lamp, and 30 seconds after the frame is closed for the speaker P83) has not yet elapsed, if a jackpot game, which is a welcome event for the player, begins, output related to the jackpot game can be started, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play.

In addition, even if a jackpot game has started, the error light may remain on until 7 seconds have passed since the slot was closed. Similarly, the speaker output may continue to emit an error sound until 30 seconds have passed since the slot was closed, even if a jackpot game has started. In this case, it will be easier for hall staff to recognize that an error has occurred, even if the error has been resolved.

<When an error occurs on a pachinko machine 2>

First, we will use Figure 73(b) to explain what happens when a magnetic error occurs. A magnetic error is an error that occurs when the magnetic sensor P73 is on. A magnetic error is an error of greater importance than a frame opening error. As with Figure 73(a), we will begin the explanation assuming that the special symbol is currently changing.

First, at time t1, a magnetic error occurs. At this time, the performance display device P80 displays an error, the frame lamp emits an error light, and the speaker P83 begins to emit an error sound. When a magnetic error occurs, the error notification (error display, error light, error sound) continues until the power is turned off (power is cut off).

Next, at time t2, a magnetic error occurs after time t1, so the error message is displayed (also called "error display in progress"), the error light is illuminated, and an error sound is emitted.

Next, timing t3 is when the rainbow characters start to be displayed.

Next, at time t4, since the rainbow letters began to be displayed at time t3, the rainbow letters are being displayed, an error is being displayed, the error light is being emitted, and an error sound is being played. Note that the lamp on the effect movable object does not emit light while a magnetic error is occurring, and is turned off (no output) without entering either the error light-emitting mode or the light-emitting mode due to the effect. The error display and rainbow letters may be displayed overlapping each other, or may be displayed in separate display areas without overlapping.

Next, at time t5, the rainbow text display ends.

Next, at time t6, the rainbow letter display ends at time t5, so the error display, error light illumination, error sound, and the moving object lamp are turned off.

Next, at timing t7, the jackpot game begins.

Next, at timing t8, the jackpot game begins, but the frame lamp, speaker, and lamps for the effect-moving objects do not begin outputting information related to the jackpot game. In other words, the error light emission mode, error sound output, and the lamps for the effect-moving objects continue to be off. Furthermore, the effect display device P80 continues to display the error message, and begins displaying movies and effects for the jackpot game.

Next, at timing t9, the power is turned off and then back on (power is turned off and then on again). This clears the magnetic error. The game returns to the jackpot mode.

In this way, when a high-importance error occurs, the occurrence of a jackpot can be clearly notified by displaying rainbow letters on the effect display device P80, without the need to use a frame lamp, speaker, etc. to notify the player that a jackpot has been reached, and the occurrence of a high-importance error can also be notified by a frame lamp, speaker, etc.

In addition, if a magnetic error occurs, the game may be stopped and the magnetic error may be canceled when the power is turned off and then restored. If configured in this way, when a magnetic error occurs, the display device 32 will display the words "Magnetic error detected" across the entire screen, the frame lamp will emit an error light, an error sound will be output from the speaker, and no light will be emitted from the movable effect object.

<Additional Information>
In addition to the frame lamps and the lamps on the effect-moving objects, lamps may also be provided on gaming machines. For example, lamps may be provided on the sub-switch 20 of the slot machine PS1 or the effect button P381 of the pachinko gaming machine P, or on the side of the gaming machine (slot machine PS1, pachinko gaming machine P). When announcing a jackpot or the like, some or all of these lamps may not emit rainbow colors.

For example, when an ally character wins a battle effect displayed on the display device 32 (effect display device P80), when rainbow letters are displayed, when the sub-switch 20 (effect button P381) is operated to display a display indicating a jackpot, or when a movable effect object moves to indicate a jackpot.

It is also possible to configure the sub-switch 20, the effect button P381, and some or all of the lamps on the side of the gaming machine to emit rainbow colors. For example, when the sub-switch 20 (effect button P381) is operated to display a message indicating a jackpot, the lamp on the sub-switch 20 (effect button P381) will emit rainbow colors, but the lamps on the side of the gaming machine will not emit rainbow colors.

<<Period during which songs can be changed and volume can be changed>>
Next, the period during which music can be changed and the period during which the volume can be changed will be described with reference to Figure 74. Figure 74 shows an example of a display screen displayed on the display device 32 when music can be changed. Note that although the example is based on the configuration of the slot machine described above, it can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines.

The currently set song name is displayed in the bottom left of the display screen. Here, the song name "ABC" is displayed along with "♪" to indicate that it is a song name, and the display of "♪:ABC" indicates that the current song is set to "ABC."

On the display screen, above the song name, there is an indication that the song can be changed. Here, to indicate that the song can be changed by operating the left or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21, an image imitating the sub-cross key switch 21 is displayed with the left and right switches blacked out, along with the words "You can change the song with" (hereinafter, these will be collectively referred to as the "song change suggestion image").

At this time, the volume can also be changed, but there is no indication on the display screen that this is possible. However, an indication that the volume can be changed may be displayed. For example, to indicate that the volume can be changed by operating the up switch or down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21, an image of the up switch and down switch of the cross button being filled in black may be displayed at the bottom right of the display screen, along with the text "You can change the volume with ."

When changing the volume, an operation sound is output each time the up or down switch is operated, but when changing songs, an operation sound is not output each time the left or right switch is operated. In other words, an operation sound is provided for the up or down switch when changing the volume, but an operation sound is not provided for the left or right switch when changing songs. The operation sound for changing the volume may be the same for the up and down switches, or may be different. Also, a sound may be output for each volume.

Next, using Figure 75, we will explain the period during which music can be changed and the period during which volume can be changed.

First, we will explain what happens when a song is changed using Figure 75(a).

First, the music will change at timing t1.

When the music is changed at timing t1, it is not possible to change the music again until a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has passed. However, it is possible to change the volume even before the predetermined period has passed.

Next, a predetermined period of time elapses at timing t2.

Once the specified period has passed at time t2, it becomes possible to change the music again. Of course, it is also possible to change the volume even after the specified period has passed.

Next, we will explain what happens when the volume is changed using Figure 75 (b).

First, the volume change occurs at timing t1.

If the volume is changed at timing t1, it is possible to change the music volume again even before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed. After the volume is changed, it is possible to change the music even before the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Next, a predetermined period of time elapses at timing t2.

At timing t2, after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to change the volume again and also change the song.

Next, using Figure 76, we will explain how the display screen displayed on the display device 32 changes when a song is changed, the period during which a song can/cannot be changed, and the period during which the volume can/cannot be changed. Note that we will explain this configuration assuming that the volume can be changed by operating the up switch or down switch.

In (a), 1: An image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: The song name "ABC" is displayed; 3: The song can be changed; 4: The volume can be changed.

Next, when the right switch is operated, the song changes and a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) begins. As explained in Figure 75, the predetermined period is a period during which the song cannot be changed again. At a predetermined timing during the period during which the song cannot be changed again (predetermined period), the song becomes playable. In other words, the song will be played and become playable before the predetermined period has elapsed. Note that, depending on the song, it may take longer than the predetermined period before it becomes playable.

Specifically, in (b), 1: an image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: the song name "DEF" is displayed; 3: song changes are not possible; 4: volume changes are possible. In other words, in (b), the song has been changed since (a), and because it is within the specified period, it is not possible to change the song again. However, the image suggesting a song change continues to be displayed without being erased.

Next, the right switch is operated before the specified period has elapsed. However, the specified period is still in progress, so the song does not change.

Specifically, in (c), 1: an image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: the song name "DEF" is displayed; 3: song changes are not possible; 4: volume changes are possible. In other words, in (c), time has passed since (b), but these states have not changed.

Next, when the up switch is operated, the volume increases by one level, and an image indicating the volume (hereinafter referred to as the "volume image") is displayed on the display screen. The volume image displayed is an image of the volume increased by one level.

Specifically, in (d), 1: An image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: The song name "DEF" is displayed; 3: Song cannot be changed; 4: Volume can be changed; 5: A volume image (volume 5) is displayed. In other words, in (d), the volume has been changed from (c), and a new volume image is displayed. Note that the display period for the volume image can be set arbitrarily, and may be shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds), or may be approximately the same as the predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds), or may be longer than the predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds).

Next, a predetermined period of time elapses. Note that the sub-cross key switch 21 is not operated.

Specifically, in (e), 1: an image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: the song name "DEF" is displayed; 3: song can be changed; 4: volume can be changed. In other words, in (e), the volume image is erased from (d), making it possible to change the song again.

Next, when the right switch is operated, the music changes and the predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) begins again.

Specifically, in (f), 1: an image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: the song name "GHI" is displayed; 3: the song cannot be changed; 4: the volume can be changed. In other words, in (f), the song has been changed since (e), and since it is within the specified period, it is not possible to change the song again.

Next, when the down switch is operated, the volume decreases by one level and a volume image is displayed on the display screen. An image of the volume decreased by one level is displayed as the volume image.

Specifically, in (g), 1: An image suggesting a song change is displayed; 2: The song name "GHI" is displayed; 3: Song cannot be changed; 4: Volume can be changed; 4: Volume image (volume 4) is displayed. In other words, in (g), the volume has changed from (f), and a new volume image is displayed on the display screen. Also, because it is within the specified period, it is not possible to change the song again.

When the up or down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated to change the volume, a specific operation sound is output, and when the left or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated to change the music, the specific operation sound is not output.

Furthermore, in a game state other than the above-described game state, when music cannot be changed and operation of the left switch or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is valid, an operation sound may be output if the left switch or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is validly operated. For example, while a menu screen is displayed, operation of the left switch or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is valid, and at this time, a specific operation sound may be output if the left switch or right switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is validly operated.

Similarly, the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21 may be configured to output an operation sound if the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21 is effectively operated when the game state is different from the game state described above, the volume cannot be changed, and operation of the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21 is valid. For example, the operation may be valid while a menu screen is being displayed, and if the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21 is effectively operated at this time, a specific operation sound or a special operation sound different from the specific operation sound may be output.

<Feature 1>
The above example has the following feature 1: - Changing music After changing music (operating the left or right switch), if a predetermined period of time has passed, the music can be changed by operating the left or right switch.
After changing the song (operating the left or right switch), the song cannot be changed even if the left or right switch is operated before the specified period has passed. - Volume change After changing the volume (operating the up or down switch), the volume can be changed if the up or down switch is operated after the specified period has passed.
After a volume change (operation of the up or down switch), if the up or down switch is operated even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume can be changed.

In other words, when changing songs, once you change songs, you cannot change them again until a specified period of time has passed, and when changing volume, after changing the volume once, you can change it again even before the specified period of time has passed.

In this way, by differentiating the activation timing of the switch for changing songs and the switch for changing the volume, it is possible to prevent operational errors. For example, even if you intend to change the volume after changing songs by pressing the up or down switch, this can prevent the operation of the left or right switch from being detected and the song from being changed.

<Feature 2>
The above example has the following feature 2.
The song title is visible (can be output) even during the period when the song cannot be changed again (from the time the song is changed until a predetermined time has elapsed). Also, at least a part of the song can be heard at a predetermined timing during the period when the song cannot be changed again (predetermined period).

By ensuring that the intro section is available for viewing when changing songs, players can not only see the song title but also hear the song, improving their song selection.

<Feature 3>
The above example has the following feature 3.
When changing the volume, an operation sound is output each time the up switch or down switch is operated, but when changing the music, an operation sound is not output each time the left switch or right switch is operated.

When changing music, the operation sound (change sound) of the left or right switch is not output, so the music sound is not interrupted. When changing the volume, the operation sound (change sound) is output at the volume changed by operating the up or down switch, making it easier for the player to adjust the volume.

<Additional Information>
Once the music is changed, it will be impossible to change the music again for a certain period of time, but the music change suggestion image will continue to be displayed on the display screen. This will prevent the player from having to worry about the music change suggestion image appearing and disappearing. It will also clearly show that the music can be changed in the current game state.

<<Additional Configurations>>
The above-described example may be provided together with the following configurations. Note that the following configurations may be provided in combination if there are no inhibiting factors.

<Additional Configuration 1>
Even if the first error occurs during auto-hit (by holding down the sub-switch 20 or effect button P381), the auto-hit continues without interruption, but if a second error occurs, it will be interrupted.

First errors are errors of relatively low importance (first error < second error), such as frame open errors and full tank detection errors, while second errors are errors of relatively high importance, such as magnetic errors.

<Additional Configuration 2>
You can change the volume during auto-tap.

In other words, even if the volume is changed during auto-tap, auto-tap will continue.

<Additional Configuration 3>
If the volume is changed during auto-tap, the volume image is displayed and is not erased based on the detection of the tap.

In other words, the volume image will not be erased by repeated auto taps, but will be erased after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has passed.

<Additional Configuration 4>
Even if an effect allowing automatic rapid-fire occurs after the volume is changed and the volume image is displayed, the volume image continues to be displayed (does not become hidden), and even if automatic rapid-fire starts thereafter, the volume image continues to be displayed (does not become hidden).

In other words, the volume image will not be erased when an effect that allows auto-tap occurs while the volume image is displayed, or when auto-tap is initiated. The volume image will be erased after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed.

<Additional Configuration 5>
The volume image has a higher display priority than the button images and effects that occur when a button is pressed (repeatedly pressed).

The display priority of the volume image is higher than the display priority of the button images and the effects that occur when a button is pressed (rapidly pressed), so even if the volume image is displayed simultaneously with the button images and the effects that occur when a button is pressed (rapidly pressed), the player can still see the volume image, making it easier for the player to adjust the volume to their desired level.

<Additional Configuration 6>
The volume image has a higher display priority than the display of the song name.

Because the display priority of the volume image is higher than the display priority of the song name, the player can see the volume image even if it is displayed at the same time as the song name, making it easier for the player to adjust the volume to their desired level.

<Additional Configuration 7>
The effect button (sub-switch 20, effect button P381) can be operated multiple times to produce a button rapid-fire effect, and while the button rapid-fire effect is executed without spanning between variations (games), volume changes can be executed across variations (games). In other words, volume changes are possible even when the variations have stopped (when symbols are fixed, when waiting for the next variation) or when all the reels have stopped, and volume adjustments that were started when the variations stopped or when all the reels have stopped can continue even after the variations have started or the reels have started spinning. In other words, volume changes are possible when the variations have stopped or when all the reels have stopped, and a volume image is displayed when the volume is changed, and the volume image can continue to be displayed even after the variations have started or the reels have started spinning.

By configuring it this way, you can change the volume when the fluctuation stops or when all the reels come to a complete stop, and then immediately start the fluctuation or reel rotation to check the volume during play. Since the volume can also be changed after the fluctuation or reel rotation has started, you can further change the volume if it is not to your liking, allowing you to adjust the volume during play to suit your preferences.

<Additional Configuration 8>
The game device is provided with a button rapid-fire effect that allows the effect button (sub-switch 20, effect button P381) to be operated multiple times, and the button rapid-fire effect is not executed across jackpot fluctuations, jackpot games, games that notify bonuses, etc., and bonus games, while the volume change (volume screen) can be executed across jackpot fluctuations, jackpot games, games that notify bonuses, etc., and bonus games.

By configuring it this way, you can change the volume during games that notify you of jackpot fluctuations, bonuses, etc., and even if the jackpot game or bonus game starts afterwards, you can still change the volume during the jackpot game or bonus game. Therefore, if the volume is not to your liking, you can immediately change it, and you can adjust the volume during gameplay to suit your preferences.

<Additional Configuration 9>
Even if the power is turned on (power on) while the volume change button (up or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21, left or right button of the cross key P383) is pressed, the volume will not be changed.

By configuring it in this way, if the power is turned off due to a power outage or other reason and the button used to change the volume is accidentally pressed when the power is restored, the volume will not be changed immediately after the power is restored.

<Additional Configuration 10>
Auto-repeated pressing is enabled for the effect buttons (sub-switch 20, effect button P381), but auto-repeated pressing is not enabled for the volume change buttons (up or down switch of sub-cross key switch 21, left or right button of cross key P383).

Enabling auto-press for button rapid-fire effects can save players the trouble of pressing buttons, but enabling auto-press for volume changes can result in the volume being changed to an unintended level. Therefore, by not enabling auto-press when changing the volume, players can check the volume one level at a time, preventing the volume from suddenly becoming too loud unintentionally.

Auto-rapid pressing may also be enabled for the volume change buttons (the up or down switch of the sub-directional key switch 21, the left or right button of the directional key P383) and the buttons for changing music mentioned above (the up or down switch of the sub-directional key switch 21, etc.). In this case, it is conceivable that the detection speed for auto-rapid pressing of effect buttons will be configured to be faster than the detection speed for auto-rapid pressing of volume change or music change. The detection speed for auto-rapid pressing of effect buttons can be set to a fast speed, while the speed for volume change or music change can be set to a speed that allows the player to set it as intended.

<Additional Configuration 11>
The volume change buttons (the up or down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21, the left or right button of the cross key P383) have a first button (the up switch of the sub-cross key switch 21, the right button of the cross key P383) that increases the volume and a second button (the down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21, the left button of the cross key P383) that decreases the volume, and if one of the buttons is operated while the other is being operated, the operation of the other button becomes effective.

For example, if the down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 to decrease the volume is pressed while the up switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 to increase the volume is pressed, the press of the down switch of the sub-cross key switch 21 is detected as valid, and the volume decreases. By configuring it in this way, the player's most recent button operation can be effectively reflected.

In addition, even if a performance button (sub-switch 20, performance button P381) is being pressed, if a volume change button (up or down switch of sub-cross key switch 21, left or right button of cross key P383) is pressed, the volume can be changed by validating the press of the volume change button.

<Additional Configuration 12>
The specific operation makes it possible to set whether to enable or disable volume change, but the specific operation does not make it possible to set whether to enable or disable light intensity change.

For example, if the power is turned on while the effect button P381 is pressed, if the setting key switch is turned on after power is turned on, or if a specific button (for example, the right stop switch) is pressed after the setting key switch is turned on after power is turned on, the administrator menu will be displayed. In the administrator menu, it is possible to enable/disable volume changes, but it is not possible to enable/disable light intensity changes to adjust the light intensity of specific lamps on the gaming machine.

In other words, the light intensity change is always active, and players can adjust the light intensity to their liking at any time. Therefore, players can prevent epilepsy and other conditions by adjusting the light intensity according to their own constitution and physical condition.

<Additional Configuration 13>
When the light intensity change button is pressed, a predetermined lamp pattern different from the lamp pattern used during the performance is emitted.

The light intensity adjustment button may be the same as the volume adjustment button, or it may be different.

The specified lamp pattern for changing the light intensity may be a pattern with a slower flashing rate than the lamp pattern for a specific effect, a pattern with fewer lit lamps than the lamp pattern for a specific effect, or a pattern with a single light color. This allows the player to distinguish between the lamp pattern for the effect and the lamp pattern for changing the light intensity, making it easier to change the light intensity.

<<Power line>>
Next, referring to Figures 77 to 82, we will explain the power supply lines for supplying power (voltage) from the power supply device (power supply board) to the main control board (sometimes referred to as the "first main control board"), sub-control board (performance control board), payout control board (including a board for controlling hopper 44; sometimes referred to as the "second main control board"), etc. in each of the slot machines and pachinko gaming machines.

<Configuration 1 of power supply lines for slot machines>
First, configuration 1 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

Power (voltage) is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the main control board 100, sub-control board 1000, hopper 44, etc.

The power supply unit 39 and the main control board 100 are connected by a power line L1, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the main control board 100 via the power line L1.

The power supply unit 39 and the sub-control board 1000 are connected by a power line L2, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the sub-control board 1000 via the power line L2.

The power supply unit 39 and hopper 44 are connected by a power line L3, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the hopper 44 via the power line L3.

Comparing the lengths of power supply line L1 and power supply line L2, power supply line L1 is shorter than power supply line L2. This is because the main control board 100 is a board for controlling the progress of the game, and is therefore required to be configured to be more resistant to noise, etc. than the sub-control board 1000, which controls the presentation. The shorter the power supply line, the less risk there is of noise being picked up, so when comparing power supply line L1 connecting to main control board 100 and power supply line L2 connecting to sub-control board 1000, it is preferable to configure power supply line L1 to be shorter.

Furthermore, when comparing the thickness of power line L1 and power line L2, power line L1 is thinner than power line L2. This is because, just as the risk of noise being carried varies depending on length, the risk of noise being carried also varies depending on thickness. Since the risk of noise being carried decreases when the power line is thinner, when comparing power line L1 connected to main control board 100 and power line L2 connected to sub-control board 1000, it is preferable to configure power line L1 to be thinner.

Furthermore, when comparing the lengths of power line L1, power line L2, and power line L3, the order from shortest to longest is power line L3, power line L1, and power line L2. Because the hopper 44 is a device related to the progress of the game that pays out medals, it is controlled by the main control board 100 (main control CPU). For this reason, it is preferable to configure power line L3 to be as short as possible. Therefore, it is preferable to configure power lines L1 and L3, which supply power to devices related to the progress of the game (main control board 100, hopper 44, etc.), to be shorter than power line L2, which supplies power to the sub-control board 1000, which simply controls the presentation.

Furthermore, the power supply unit 39 and the main control board 100, the power supply unit 39 and the sub-control board 1000, and the power supply unit 39 and the hopper 44 are directly connected by power lines L1, L2, and L3, without going through a board on which another CPU is mounted (hereinafter also referred to as a CPU-mounted board).

In a configuration that uses other CPU-equipped boards, if noise occurs on some power lines, it can affect the other CPU-equipped boards, potentially causing malfunctions. Furthermore, if a malfunction occurs on a board due to an overcurrent or similar issue, the board must be replaced, but the replacement procedure for a board that manages the CPU serial number (for example, the main control board) is time-consuming and labor-intensive. Since gaming parlors cannot operate during the time it takes for this replacement procedure to be completed, this is an issue that directly affects profits, so a configuration that allows for replacement as quickly and easily as possible, or that does not require this labor-intensive process, is preferable.

Therefore, it is desirable to configure the power supply device 39 and the CPU board so that they are directly connected, without going through another CPU board. However, there is no problem with the gaming machine configuration if another CPU board is provided between the power supply device 39 and the CPU board.

<Configuration of power supply lines for pachinko gaming machines 1>
Configuration 1 of the power supply line of a pachinko gaming machine can be configured almost the same as configuration 1 of the power supply line of the slot machine described above. Configuration 1 of the power supply line of a pachinko gaming machine will be described below with reference to Figure 78.

Power (voltage) is supplied from the power supply board P44 to the main control board 40, performance control board P41, payout control board P43, etc.

The power supply device P44 and the main control board P40 are connected by a power line L1, and power is supplied from the power supply device 39 to the main control board 40 via the power line L1.

The power supply unit P44 and the performance control board P41 are connected by the power line L2, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the performance control board P41 via the power line L2.

The power supply unit P44 and the dispensing control board P43 are connected by a power line L3, and power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the dispensing control board P43 via the power line L3.

Comparing the lengths of power supply line L1 and power supply line L2, power supply line L1 is configured to be shorter than power supply line L2. This is because the main control board P40 is a board for controlling the progress of the game, and is therefore required to be configured to be more resistant to noise, etc., than the presentation control board P41, which controls the presentation. The shorter the power supply line, the less risk there is of noise being picked up, so when comparing the power supply line L1 connecting to the main control board P40 and the power supply line L2 connecting to the presentation control board P41, it is preferable to configure power supply line L1 to be shorter.

Furthermore, when comparing the thickness of power line L1 and power line L2, power line L1 is configured to be thinner than power line L2. This is because, just as the risk of noise being carried varies with length, the risk of noise being carried also varies with thickness. Since the risk of noise being carried decreases when the power line is thinner, when comparing power line L1 connected to main control board P40 and power line L2 connected to performance control board P41, it is preferable to configure power line L1 to be thinner.

Furthermore, when comparing the lengths of power line L1, power line L2, and power line L3, the order from shortest to longest is power line L3, power line L1, and power line L2. The payout control board P43 is related to the progress of the game as it controls the payout of game balls. For this reason, it is preferable to configure power line L3 to be as short as possible. Therefore, it is preferable to configure power lines L1 and L3, which supply power to equipment related to the progress of the game (main control board P40, payout control board P43), to be shorter than power line L2, which supplies power to the presentation control board P41, which simply controls the presentation.

Furthermore, the power supply device P44 and the main control board P40, the power supply device 39 and the presentation control board P41, and the power supply device 39 and the payout control board P43 are directly connected by power lines L1, L2, and L3, without going through another board on which a CPU is mounted (a CPU-mounted board). The reasons for this are omitted here, as they are the same as those explained in Slot Machine Power Line Configuration 1. Similarly, there is no problem with the gaming machine configuration even if another CPU-mounted board is provided between the power supply device P44 and the CPU-mounted board.

<Configuration 2 of power supply lines for slot machines>
Next, configuration 2 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 39 is connected to the main control board 100, and the power supply unit 39 is connected to the sub-control board 1000. Relay boards 500 are provided between the power supply unit 39 and the main control board 100, and between the power supply unit 39 and the sub-control board 1000. The relay boards 500 are provided to distribute power to the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and do not have a CPU mounted on them.

In other words, the power supply unit 39 and the main control board 100 are connected via the relay board 500, and the power supply unit 39 and the sub-control board 1000 are also connected via the relay board 500. The power supply unit 39 and the relay board 500 are connected by power line L0, and the relay board 500 and the main control board 100 are connected by power line L1, so power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the main control board 100. The relay board 500 and the sub-control board 1000 are connected by power line L2, so power is supplied from the power supply unit 39 to the sub-control board 1000. Note that the supply of power from the power supply unit 39 to the hopper 44 is the same as in power line configuration 1 of the slot machine, so explanation will be omitted.

Here, comparing the lengths of power supply line L1 and power supply line L2, power supply line L1 is configured to be shorter than power supply line L2, similar to slot machine power supply line configuration 1.

In terms of thickness, power line L1 is also configured to be thinner than power line L2, similar to configuration 1 of the slot machine power line.

The relay board 500 is installed in the cabinet PS3, near the main control board 100. This configuration allows the length of the power line L1 to be shortened.

<Configuration of power supply lines for pachinko gaming machines 2>
Configuration 2 of the power supply line of the pachinko gaming machine can be configured almost the same as Configuration 2 of the power supply line of the slot machine described above. Configuration 2 of the power supply line of the pachinko gaming machine will be described below with reference to Figure 80.

The power supply board P44 is connected to the main control board P40, and the power supply board P44 is connected to the performance control board P41, but a relay board P45 is provided between the power supply board P44 and the main control board P40, and between the power supply board P44 and the performance control board P41. The relay board P45 is provided to distribute power to the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, and does not have a CPU installed.

In other words, the power supply board P44 and the main control board P40 are connected via the relay board P45, and the power supply board P44 and the sub-control board P41 are also connected via the relay board 45. The power supply board P44 and the relay board P45 are connected by power line L0, and the relay board P45 and the main control board P40 are connected by power line L1, so power is supplied from the power supply board P44 to the main control board P40. The relay board P45 and the sub-control board P41 are connected by power line L2, so power is supplied from the power supply board P44 to the sub-control board P41. Note that the supply of power from the power supply board P44 to the payout control board P43 is the same as power line configuration 1 of a pachinko machine, so explanation will be omitted.

Here, comparing the lengths of power line L1 and power line L2, power line L1 is shorter than power line L2, similar to slot machine power line configuration 2.

In terms of thickness, power line L1 is thinner than power line L2, similar to configuration 2 of the slot machine power line.

The relay board P45 is located near the main control board P40. This configuration allows the length of the power line L1 to be shortened.

<Configuration 3 of power supply lines for slot machines>
Next, configuration 3 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG.

In slot machine power line configuration 3, power line L1 and power line L2 are bundled together by tube T. Furthermore, the power supply unit 39 and the payout control board 200 for controlling the hopper 44 are connected by power line L3. The payout control board 200 is located on the rear side of the hopper 44.

Even with this configuration, the risk of one power line burning due to an overcurrent can be dispersed. Specifically, by separating the power line L1 for the main control board 100 and the power line L3 for the dispensing control board 200, it is possible to prevent each from being caught up in an accident on the other's power line.

<Configuration of power supply lines for pachinko gaming machines 3>
Next, using Figure 82, configuration 3 of the power supply line (power supply harness) of a pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

In power line configuration 3 of the pachinko gaming machine, the power supply board P44 and the main control board P40 are connected by a power line L1, and the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41 are connected by a line group LG that includes power lines. The power supply board P44 and the payout control board P43 are connected by a power line L3.

In other words, power is supplied to the main control board P44 via the route power supply board P44 → main control board P40, and to the performance control board P41 via the route power supply board P44 → main control board P40 → performance control board P41. Power is supplied to the payout control board P43 via the route power supply board P44 → payout control board P43.

In this way, by separating the power line L1 for the main control board P41 and the power line L3 for the dispensing control board P43, it is possible to prevent each from being involved in an accident on the other's power line.

In addition, the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41 are connected by a line group LG that includes a power supply line (power supply harness), and the line group LG includes a signal line (signal line harness) for transmitting control signals (commands) from the main control board to the performance control board P41.

The power harness and signal wire harness are constructed with the same thickness. One type of cheating in gaming machines is known as "hanging goto." This hanging goto is designed to work by removing power from the power line. Therefore, making it difficult to distinguish between the power harness and signal wire harness of the line group LG is an effective anti-cheating measure.

<Other configurations>
<Additional Configuration 1>
Each board is equipped with overcurrent protection measures. In particular, the main control board (100, P40), which mainly controls the progress of the game, has more protection measures than the other boards (for example, the sub-control board 1000 (performance control board P41), payout control board P43), and many overcurrent protection circuits and components are installed.

For example, compared to other boards, the main control board has more capacitors, larger capacity capacitors, and more fuses.

Generally, the voltage supplied to the main control board is lower than the voltage supplied to the sub-control board (performance control board). Despite this, the main control board has stronger overcurrent protection measures in place than the sub-control board (performance control board).

As mentioned above, the procedure for replacing the main control board is particularly time-consuming and labor-intensive. For this reason, many measures have been implemented to make the main control board less susceptible to failure.

<Additional Configuration 2>
Next, configuration 1 of a power cable applicable to a pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power plug of the power cable EC is inserted into a standard power outlet, current is supplied to the power supply board P44, where it is converted to a specified voltage.

As shown in Figure 82, the power cable EC starts from the power supply board P44, extends from below the power supply board P44 toward the hinge mechanism, extends approximately vertically upward from a predetermined position on the hinge mechanism side, and reaches a position approximately horizontal to the spherical tank.

In this way, the power cable EC is provided on the side opposite to the side that opens when the outer frame P1 and front frame P2 are unlocked with the key, making it difficult to commit fraud from the side that opens.

This makes it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts such as tampering with the power cable EC, which can cause a power outage. Since settings can be changed when the power is restored after an outage, preventing unauthorized power outages is an important fraud prevention measure.

<Additional Configuration 3>
Furthermore, the power cable EC is fixed at a position approximately horizontal to the spherical tank using a fixing device (such as a resin or nylon clamp), and the tip of the power cable EC equipped with a power plug is arranged to extend rearward.

The power plug for the gaming machine is inserted into a socket located on top of the so-called island equipment in the gaming parlor. Therefore, if the power plug is unplugged, it may fall into the ball tank and cause a ball jam.

With the above-mentioned configuration, if the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, the power plug will be more likely to fall rearward from the fixed position provided by the fixture, making it less likely to fall into the bulb tank.

This means that clogging is less likely to occur even if the power plug is unplugged from the outlet.

In this specification, the configurations of slot machines and pachinko machines are mainly used as examples of gaming machines, but the invention can also be applied to various gaming machines such as parrots and casino machines.

The technical details described above to explain the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub-control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Bet number display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Credit number display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin count display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply device 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board P : Pachinko game machine P1 : Outer frame P2 : Front frame P3 : Glass frame P4 : Back set unit P5 : Game board P40 : Main control board P41 : Performance control board P42 : Image control board P43 : Payout control board P44 : Power supply board P47 : Power switch P48 : RAM clear switch P49 : Setting key switch P50 : Main control display device P51 : First special symbol display device P52 : Second special symbol display device P80 : Effect display device P81 : Effect operation means (P380 Effect operation unit, P381 Effect button, P382 Lever, P383 D-pad) P82 : Effect lamp (P350 Frame lamp, P550 Board lamp) P83 : Speaker (P141 Curtain panel speaker, P371 Upper speaker) P560 : Effect device P710 : First start-up winning device P720 : Second start-up winning device P730 : General winning device P740 : Regular gate device P750 : Large winning opening device P755 : Special electric device P770 : Regular electric device

Claims (1)

It has a stop switch,
Has a max bet switch,
It has one bet switch,
It has an adjustment switch,
Max bet switch lamp,
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode, a predetermined symbol combination may or may not be displayed;
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a specific manner, the predetermined symbol combination cannot be displayed.
When a specific lottery result is achieved, a specific symbol combination may or may not be displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop switch.
When a specific lottery result is obtained and a specific symbol combination is displayed, a specific number of gaming media can be awarded.
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the second gaming state can be started;
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the second gaming state is not started,
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined lottery result is achieved, if the stop switch is operated in a specific operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the second gaming state is not started,
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, even if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the operation probability of the condition device related to replay does not change,
When a predetermined lottery result is achieved, even if the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operating manner and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the probability of operation of the condition device related to the winning does not change,
When a predetermined lottery result is reached, the stop switch is operated in a predetermined manner, and even if a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the predetermined lottery result is not carried over to the next game or later,
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first game state, the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation manner, and a game after the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed is compared with a game in the second game state, and the game in the second game state has a higher rate of announcing an operation manner that can display a specific symbol combination,
In a predetermined situation, a power outage occurs, the 1 bet switch is pressed when there is no power supply, and the power is turned on when the 1 bet switch is pressed. If the 1 bet switch continues to be pressed after the power is turned on, the bet process based on the pressing of the 1 bet switch will not be executed, but if the max bet switch is pressed in this situation, the bet process based on the pressing of the max bet switch can be executed.
In the first situation, a power outage occurs, the settlement switch is pressed while no power is being supplied, and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed. In the second situation, where the settlement switch continues to be pressed after the power is turned on, the settlement process is not executed, the max bet switch lamp is lit, and pressing the max bet switch in the second situation allows the bet process to be executed. A gaming machine.